Health – Pet News Daily https://petnewsdaily.com Tue, 28 Mar 2023 13:50:48 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.2.2 https://petnewsdaily.com/wp-content/uploads/2021/04/cropped-favicon-32x32.png Health – Pet News Daily https://petnewsdaily.com 32 32 Puppy Weight Calculator: Height and Weight Predictions for Every Breed (with Chart) https://petnewsdaily.com/puppy-weight-calculator/ Thu, 23 Feb 2023 05:00:53 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=435 Our puppy weight calculator determines how big your puppy will be when it becomes an adult dog.

The calculator was built by a data scientist to ensure the results will be as accurate as possible, and approved by our team of veterinarians. All the calculations are based on The American Kennel Club’s database of adult dog weights and heights.

To use the calculator, fill in your puppy’s current age, weight and other details below.

Note: please don’t feed your dog more or less based on the results. For that advice, consult your veterinarian.

Vet’s Puppy Weight Calculator

PUPPY WEIGHT CALCULATOR
What’s your puppy’s breed

What’s your puppy’s weight

What’s your puppy’s birth date?

What’s your puppy’s gender


If you like our puppy weight calculator and want to learn all you need to know about puppy weight and growth rates, such as the factors that influence them, weights for various breeds, and our custom puppy growth charts, then read on for more information about puppy weight.

How Big Will My Dog Get? 4 Key Factors that Influence a Puppy’s Weight

As you can imagine, as we built our puppy weight calculator we had to incorporate many factors which can influence both a dog’s current weight and a puppy’s adult weight and eventual adult size. Some are genetic and others are environmental.

1. Size of Puppy’s Parents

First, as we mentioned, whether you’re looking at a small dog or larger breeds, you can look at your puppy’s parents as a possible predictor. While it’s not a surefire method, if both parents are approximately the same size and weight, there’s a good chance that your pup will grow up to be about the same size.

Many times, of course, you won’t be able to see both parents (or even one parent), so this makes it more of a guessing game. Even if the puppy’s mother is, say, 30 lbs, that doesn’t mean that his father wasn’t 20 lbs or 50 lbs.

2. Puppy’s Gender

Sex can also make a difference when it comes to puppy weight. Male dogs of each breed tend to be larger and heavier than female dogs of the same breed. If you are getting a male puppy, then, it’s likely that if the father is the same breed, your pup will be a bit bigger than his mother. A female puppy might end up being the same size as her mother, assuming the father wasn’t much bigger.

3. When You Spay/Neuter

Spaying and neutering can make dogs more likely to end up overweight if you don’t modify their diet. The reduction in sex hormones makes your puppy’s energy needs go down, so it’s often necessary to feed him less. You should not change his diet drastically without speaking to your veterinarian, though; keep in mind that if you have him neutered before he’s a year old, he’s still growing and needs more calories than an adult dog of the same size.

4. Diet and Exercise

And on that note, diet and exercise will play a role in how much your puppy weighs once he’s an adult. Just like humans, dogs can become overweight or obese. And just like humans, there are serious health effects from obesity in dogs. So be sure to feed your dog a healthy diet and help him get the exercise he needs for good health.

How to Calculate Puppy Weight: Formula to Predict Puppy to Adult Dog Weight

There is no one-size-fits-all formula to predict a puppy’s adult weight (this is why we built our custom puppy weight calculator). There are various factors that can impact weight such as:

  • Breed
  • Genetics
  • Nutrition

That being said, there are some general guidelines that can help you estimate your puppy’s weight ad a full-grown, adult dog.

One common method is to use the puppy’s current weight and age to project its adult weight. For example, for medium to large breed dogs, you can use the following formula:

Adult weight = current weight (in pounds) / (age in weeks) x 52 (weeks in a year)

So for example, let’s say your puppy is 8 weeks old and weighs 7 pounds. That calculation would look like this:

Adult weight = 7 (lbs) / 8 (weeks) x 52 = 45 lbs

Keep in mind that this formula provides only an estimate and is not a guarantee of your puppy’s adult weight. Additionally, besides, breed, other factors (such as the puppy’s diet and exercise routine) will also impact its growth and adult weight.

To get a much more accurate puppy weight estimate for you specific breed, use our Puppy Weight Calculator.

Puppy Weight By Breed: Factors that Impact Growth by Breed

If you know your puppy’s breed (or breeds, in the case of a mixed-breed dog), you might be able to guess what his adult weight will be. The puppy calculator takes breed into consideration, but here are a few examples of what you might expect depending on the breed of your pup. Remember that where there is a range, the females will generally be on the smaller end and the males on the larger end, but there is a lot of overlap between individual dogs.

Toy Breeds

  • Chihuahuas will generally not exceed 6 lbs. 1For more, see our Chihuahua Growth Chart
  • Maltese will usually be under 7 lbs. 2
  • Toy Poodles will be between 4 and 6 lbs. 3

Small Breeds

  • Standard Dachshunds will grow to be between 16 and 32 lbs. 4
  • French Bulldogs will be under 28 lbs. 5
  • Pugs will usually be between 14 and 18 lbs. 6

Medium Breeds

  • Border Collies will often grow to be 30 to 55 lbs. 7
  • Goldendoodle (medium) typically weighs 36 to 50 lbs. 8For more, see our Goldendoodle Growth Chart
  • Siberian Huskies will usually be 35 to 60 lbs. 9
  • Dalmatians will often be between 45 and 70 lbs. 10

Large Breeds

  • Akitas are usually between 70 and 130 lbs. 11
  • Belgian Malinois are between 40 and 80 lbs as adults. 12
  • Doberman Pinschers are between 60 and 100 lbs. 13

Giant Breeds

  • Great Danes will grow to 110 to 175 lbs. 14For more, see our Great Dane Growth Chart
  • Saint Bernards will often reach between 120 and 180 lbs. 15
  • Mastiffs will generally be between 120 and 230 lbs. 16

3 Puppy Weight Predictors: How Fast Will My Puppy Gain Weight?

1. Puppy Breed Size

The speed at which your puppy will reach his adult weight depends on his overall size.

In general, toy and small breeds will mature more quickly than large and giant breeds. Toy breeds might reach their adult size at as young as 8 months, while the largest of the giant breeds will continue growing until they are 2 years old. Small, medium, and large breeds will fall in line along that spectrum.

Using a puppy growth chart like these from the Waltham Petcare Science Institute can help you determine whether your pup is at the right weight for his breed and size. Keep in mind, however, that these weight charts are good as a rule of thumb but that there will be some individual variance.

Your vet can help you decide whether your puppy is underweight, overweight, or just right.

2. Check Their Ribcage

As he becomes an adult, you can use the method where you feel his ribs. For most dogs, you should be able to easily feel his ribs without pressing inward; you should not see his ribs.

Some breeds tend to be leaner or heavier, however, so again, this is something your veterinarian should help you determine.

3. Double Their Weight at 4 Months

If you want to guess at how much your puppy will weigh as an adult, you can double what he weighs or weighed at 4 months of age. This is a good estimate for medium and large dogs, but it doesn’t work well with very small or giant breeds, as they grow more quickly or slowly than average.

It also can’t take into consideration the possibility that your dog may become overweight or obese. Still, it will give you a good ballpark estimate if you are curious.

As with everything else pertaining to your puppy, keep in mind that he is an individual. Even littermates generally don’t end up weighing the same as adults, so keep an eye on how your pup is growing with the help of your veterinarian, who will see him several times over the course of his first year and then annually after that.

Your vet is your best source of information pertaining to your specific puppy and what he should weigh.

To get a vet-approved prediction of your puppy’s adult weight, use our Puppy Weight Calculator.

Puppy Growth Chart: Track Your Dog’s Adult Weight and Size

In addition to our puppy weight calculator, we’ve also created a puppy growth chart. This is so dog owners can see just how big their puppy will get (“age in months”) based on their dog breed’s size (toy, small, medium, large and giant dogs).

If you like our puppy growth chart and want to share it, just copy and paste the code below the chart.

puppy growth chart for toy, small, medium, large and giant dogs

Share This Puppy Weight Chart on Your Site

Dog Growth By Breed

You can run the puppy weight calculator above against a variety of breeds, and we’ve also created some breed-specific growth charts for specific breeds. Want answers to questions like “how big do goldendoodles get” or  “when do golden retrievers stop growing“? We also have a Great Dane Growth chart, chihuahua growth chart, and labrador growth chart.

One of the things we found interesting in building our puppy weight calculator was researching the breeds that people most frequently search for when it comes to puppy weight gain. Here are some of the breeds people most frequently look for according to Google’s own search suggestions:

  • Bernese Mountain Dog
  • Bullmastiff
  • Golden Retriever
  • Rottweiler
  • Spaniel
  • Yorkshire Terrier
  • German Shepard
  • Labrador Retriever
  • Labradoodle
  • Labrador
  • Cavapoo
  • Yorkie
  • Shih Tzu
  • Sheepadoodle
  • American Bully

Puppy & Dog Weight FAQs

There are a number of questions we’ve been asked related to topics like puppy size, dog size, weight gain and growth. We’ll walk through some of the most frequently asked questions here:

How can I estimate my puppy’s weight?

We get a lot of questions along these lines (eg, how can you tell how big a puppy will get? How big will a 10 pound 8 week old puppy get, etc.). This is obviously the aim of the puppy calculator! It’ll answer these questions in detail, or you can see more granular estimates by age by looking at some of our growth charts or our post that answers the question “how heavy should my dog be?”.

How can I calculate a weight for a mixed breed?

This is a great question! Some of the same factors (puppy’s age, the size of the parents, environmental) will impact mixed breeds as well. Our calculator also has options for general categories such as large dogs, toy breeds, etc.

How much should my puppy weigh each week?

This is a big “it depends.” Again here growth charts can be helpful in answering this, but it’s also a good idea to consult with your vet.

How much should my puppy eat based on weight?

How much your puppy should eat will vary based on a number of factors. First, choose a high quality dog food. Next, measure food amounts with a measuring cup and follow instructions by weight carefully. Finally, confirm with your vet that the amount recommended on the package will be right for your dog.

At what age is a puppy half their weight?

According to veterinarians for many breeds you can assume 4 months for this question, but again there’s a lot of variance across breeds and depending on a variety of genetic and environmental factors.

What can I feed my puppy to gain weight?

Adding in foods that are high protein or high fat, switching to wet or fresh foods, or changing your dog’s feeding schedule can help them gain weight – but don’t take any of these steps without consulting with your vet!

Why is my puppy not putting on weight?

Typically this is due to either the wrong diet (insufficient or the wrong type) or a medical issue (such as parasites). If your dog is not putting on weight it’s an important time to check in with your vet.

How do you tell if your puppy is a healthy weight?

If you’re concerned about your dog’s weight, it’s really best to take the dog to your vet.

Does paw size determine dog size?

Generally speaking, big paws are found on big dogs, but this isn’t necessarily a great predictor of how big a dog will or won’t get.

Going Beyond Puppy & Dog Body Weight: Dog Health Information & Advice

If you’ve used our puppy weight calculator but want to go beyond answering the question “how big will my puppy get?” we also have a ton of great content to help with keeping your dog healthy. We’ve created a dog collar size chart to help identify the best collar size for your dog as they grow and a dog crate size chart to make sure they have the right space in their crate. We also have a vet-verified list of the best automatic dog feeders if you’re portioning food for your pup that way. If your dog needs exercise indoors, our list of the best dog treadmills might be of interest, along with our guide on how to train your dog to use a treadmill. We also put together a list and reviews (complete with pros and cons) of the best dog food for Dobermans if you have that breed at home.

We’ve also gone deep on a number of other dog health topics. An important one (and one our staff has struggled with with their own dogs) is how to keep your dog out of the trash (and the best dog proof trash can if you’re still struggling there). We’ve also covered topics like how long it takes for a dog to digest food, remedies for your dog’s upset stomach, the best high fiber dog food, and a guide to adding fiber to a dog’s diet if digestion issues are your main concern. We’ve gone into how much exercise your dog needs daily, and of course we have a list of foods dogs can and cannot eat (as well as individual full-page breakdowns for over 30 categories of foods) if you’re not sure what foods are right for your dog, and reviewed the best no escape harnesses for dogs.

]]>
Goldendoodle Growth Chart: How Big Will Your Goldendoodle Get? https://petnewsdaily.com/goldendoodle-growth-chart/ Thu, 23 Feb 2023 05:00:08 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=927 Bred to be part Golden Retriever and part Poodle, the Goldendoodle is considered a crossbreed or designer breed. They’re bred for three different sizes – miniature, medium, and standard. The Goldendoodle is not, however, a registered dog breed and isn’t recognized by the American Kennel Club, or AKC.1 But they have gained the love of many who are drawn to the demeanor and beauty of the two parent breeds. Though there is no guarantee your Goldendoodle will have particular traits of either of their parents, the Goldendoodle tends to be energetic, smart, and friendly, just like the Golden Retriever and Poodle.

Since Goldendoodles may be different sizes, how can you tell how big your Goldendoodle will be? We consulted our veterinarian, Dr. Jennifer Coates, who reviewed and approved data about Goldendoodle weights and sizes, which we then used to create a convenient Goldendoodle growth chart

Goldendoodle Growth Chart

Goldendoodle Size and Growth Chart
Share This Goldendoodle Growth Chart on Your Site

Text Transcript of the Goldendoodle Growth Chart

Miniature Goldendoodle – Age Weight
8 weeks
12 weeks
16 weeks
24 weeks
36 weeks
One year
Fully grown
4.5 – 9 lbs
6 – 12 lbs
8 – 16 lbs
11 – 22 lbs
13.5 – 27 lbs
14.5 – 29 lbs
15 -30 lbs
Medium Goldendoodle – Age Weight
8 weeks
12 weeks
16 weeks
24 weeks
36 weeks
One year
Fully grown
9 – 13.5 lbs
12 – 18 lbs
16 – 24 lbs
22 – 33.5 lbs
27 – 41 lbs
29 – 43 lbs
30 – 45 lbs
Standard Goldendoodle – Age Weight
8 weeks
12 weeks
16 weeks
24 weeks
36 weeks
One year
Fully grown
13.5 – 27 lbs
18 – 36.5 lbs
24 – 48 lbs
33.5 – 67 lbs
41 – 82 lbs
43 – 87 lbs
45 – 90 lbs

Our Goldendoodle size chart shows you a healthy Mini, Medium, and Standard Goldendoodle puppy’s monthly average weight range during the growing phase (as well as how tall your Goldendoodle will get). Also, check out our Goldendoodle puppy weight calculator – a tool that gives you an idea of how big your puppy may get based on a few factors.

About the F1 Goldendoodle

The Goldendoodle is a crossbreed that only recently captured the hearts of dog lovers. Many of the current Goldendoodles are considered first-generation, or F1; each F1 Goldendoodle has both a Golden Retriever and Miniature or Standard Poodle parent. Both the Golden Retriever and the Standard Poodle are a medium- to large-size breed, thereby creating a medium- to large-size breed in the Standard Goldendoodle.23 When crossed with a Miniature Poodle, though, the Miniature or Medium Goldendoodle is small to medium in size. In comparison, F2 Goldendoodles have two F1 parents. Either way, this designer breed is active, a good companion, intelligent, social, easily trainable, and can also make a good guide or therapy dog.4

What is the Best Size for a Goldendoodle?

The best size for a Goldendoodle is the size she is when she’s officially done growing and obtains an ideal physique. Most veterinarians monitor your puppy’s health and growth by weight, age, and the body condition score. Our veterinarian, Dr. Jennifer Coates, emphasizes the importance of keeping puppies lean. The body condition score gives vets and pet owners a guide for determining a dog’s healthy weight and size, which can help you keep your growing puppy in tip-top shape.5 A dog’s ideal weight should be associated with easily palpable ribs with minimal fat covering. The abdomen and waist should show a noticeable tuck when viewed from the side and top of the dog.

Work with your veterinarian to figure out the best size for your Goldendoodle as she grows into adulthood. The Waltham Petcare Science Institute offers puppy growth charts that you fill in with your puppy’s personal information in order to track her progress. Using roughly 50,000 healthy dogs as a reference, the Waltham puppy charts show the target range for a healthy growing puppy.6 If your puppy’s weight moves higher on the chart, it could indicate unhealthy weight gain. Moving lower on the chart could be associated with unhealthy weight loss.

What Age do Goldendoodles Stop Growing?

A Goldendoodle puppy goes through a typical puppyhood, consisting of multiple developmental stages. Those stages make up the first to second year of life.7 As she grows from a newborn pup to an adult dog, your puppy gains weight and height at relatively the same rate as other same-size breeds. For instance, a Standard Goldendoodle puppy will, on average, grow at about the same rate as other medium to large dogs like the German Shepherd and Collie.

 

According to the AKC, a small- to medium-size dog reaches 66 to 75 percent of their adult size by the time they’re 6 months old.8 If you have a Miniature Goldendoodle, chances are he’ll be pretty close to his full size at this point. A Medium Goldendoodle may take a couple of more months to reach most of his adult size.

A Standard Goldendoodle is a large-size dog and typically takes just over a year to become fully grown. But this is an average and some dogs can take up to 2 years to become full-grown adult dogs. The AKC estimates a large dog who weighs anywhere from 51 to 100 pounds reaches full size at around 18 months old.

How Big Will My Goldendoodle Get?

If you’re considering a Goldendoodle you know that the answer to this question “how big will my Goldendoodle get” is a crucial one. How big your puppy gets depends on which type of Goldendoodle you have or are going to get – mini, medium, or standard. Across the three types, adult dogs can weigh anywhere from 15 to 90 pounds. Even then, knowing how big your Goldendoodle will get is not exact. For a guide, check out our Goldendoodle weight chart, which breaks down the weight range for each type of Goldendoodle puppy, from 8 weeks old to fully grown.

The Miniature Goldendoodle weighs approximately 15 to 30 pounds in adulthood. He stands about 13 to 15 inches high at the shoulders. The Medium Goldendoodle weighs around 30 to 45 pounds in adulthood and stands roughly 15 to 20 inches at the shoulder. The Standard Goldendoodle weighs approximately 45 to 90 pounds in adulthood, and measures about 20 to 24 inches at the shoulders.

Our veterinarian, Dr. Coates, advises the numbers are a general gauge. “There certainly will be individuals who fall outside of the ranges due to being overweight or because of ‘unorthodox’ breeding decisions.” Discuss your Goldendoodle puppy’s growth with your veterinarian to help catch any factors that may affect your puppy’s healthy growth.

Goldendoodle Puppy Size and Weight Calculator

Goldendoodle puppies sport a variety of coat types and colors, never mind sizes. While goldendoodles don’t shed much, they still do shed. If you want to keep your furniture dog-hair free, check special pet hair removal tools to keep your home tidy. No matter which Goldendoodle graces your life, or might soon, your new puppy is sure to bring you lots of smiles. Take care of your puppy, monitor her growth, and keep close tabs on her health. Refer to our Goldendoodle puppy growth chart to see the average growth rate for puppies 8 weeks old and up. Beginning with the Mini Goldendoodle growth chart and ending with the Standard Goldendoodle growth chart, we provide you with the average weight ranges per month across the three different-size Goldendoodles, for males and females.

 

For instance, a 3-month-old Miniature Goldendoodle puppy typically weighs between 6 and 12 pounds, while a 3-month-old Medium Goldendoodle puppy weighs between 12 and 18 pounds. Also included in the chart is the average height for the full-size Miniature, Medium, and Standard Goldendoodle.

Beyond that, if you’ve gotten your Goldendoodle home and you’re looking for additional products to help keep your puppy healthy and happy, we also have a series of buying guides to help you select the best dog ear yeast cleaner, the best animal clippers for dogs, the best dog clippers for poodles, the best dog fur dryer, and our guide to finding the best brush for an Australian Shepherd.

You can also use our puppy size predictor to find out how big your Goldendoodle might get as an adult.

PUPPY WEIGHT CALCULATOR
What’s your puppy’s breed

What’s your puppy’s weight

What’s your puppy’s birth date?

What’s your puppy’s gender


Goldendoodle Growth Frequently Asked Questions

How do I know how big my Goldendoodle will be?

A rule of thumb for standard Goldendoodles will be to multiply your puppy’s weight at 4 months by 2 and add 5-10lbs. That doesn’t take into account gender and won’t be accurate for mini or medium sized Goldendoodles. You can also try a growth calculator for a better estimate.

How big should a Goldendoodle be at 6 months?

A standard Goldendoodle should be 33.5-67 pounds, a mini Goldendoodle should be 11-22 pounds, and a medium Goldendoodle should be 22-33.5 pounds.

How long does it take for a Goldendoodle to grow to full size?

A Standard Goldendoodle is a large-size dog and typically takes just over a year to become fully grown. But this is an average and some dogs can take up to 2 years to become full-grown adult dogs. The AKC estimates a large dog who weighs anywhere from 51 to 100 pounds reaches full size at around 18 months old.

How much do 8 week old goldendoodles weigh?

A standard Goldendoodle should weigh 13.5 – 27 pounds at 8 weeks. A mini Goldendoodle should weigh 4.5 – 9 pounds, and a medium Goldendoodle should weigh 9-13.5 pounds at 8 weeks.

Additional Resources

If you’re looking for more information about dog growth in general, we’ve created a series of growth charts for different breeds (and dogs and mixed breeds in general):

]]>
The Best Cat Beds https://petnewsdaily.com/best-cat-beds/ Thu, 22 Dec 2022 02:34:04 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=1033 Cats sleep as many as 16 hours per day (some, like kittens, even more!), so having a cozy cat bed is essential.

A good cat bed gives kitties a soft, warm, and safe place to pass all those hours they spend snoozing.

More than you may realize can go wrong in selecting a cat bed, however. The wrong bed can lead to:

  • A total lack of use if your cat doesn’t take to the bed.
  • Physical issues for the cat if the bed is difficult to keep clean.
  • A cat retching from having ingested the bed’s materials

To help navigate all of this, we asked our veterinary advisor, Dr. Jennifer Coates, to review a large number of cat beds and share her top picks.

Her top pick is the Best Friends by Sheri OrthoComfort Deep Dish Cuddler. This cozy cat bed is made from plush sherpa material and has high walls and AirLoft filling to allow your cat to sink into it. It’s even self-warming!

Our Vet’s Top Pick

Best Friends by Sheri OrthoComfort Deep Dish Cuddler

The Best Friends by Sheri OrthoComfort Deep Dish Cuddler is the softest, coziest cat bed out there.

While this is Dr. Coates’ top pick, there’s still a lot to consider in selecting a cat bed. For that reason, we asked her to not only select the best cat bed, but also to offer tips for what to look for in a cat bed, advice on when your cat may not need a bed at all, and to offer her top picks for a variety of use cases.

The 5 Best Cat Beds

Cat Beds Compared

Here are the top picks from our veterinarian. Compare the ratings and features of different models.

Editor’s Picks Model Rating Dimensions Machine Washable Material
Best Overall Best Friends by Sheri OrthoComfort Deep Dish Cuddler 4.2 20 x 20 x 12 inches Virgin AirLOFT fibers
Best Budget Buy Furhaven Pet Products – ThermaNAP Cat Bed Pad 4.5 17 x 22 x 0.25 inches Polyester, Mylar
Best Cat Window Bed Zakkart Cat Window Perch for Indoor Cats 4.7 23 x 13 x 12.5 inches Sherpa covered pad, metal support
Best Heated Cat Bed K&H PET PRODUCTS Heated Thermo-Kitty Fashion Splash Cat Bed 4.6 18 x 18 inches (Small) or 16 x 22 inches (Large) Polyester
Best Elevated Cat Bed Catry Cat Bed with Scratching Post 4.6 23 x 16 x 20 inches Plush, Wood, Sisal, Fabric

*Ratings are on a scale of 1 to 5 and based on reviews, feedback, and opinions of actual customers

Who Should Buy a Cat Bed

  • Cat owners who want to keep their cats off the furniture – If you own a cat, you know how stubborn they can be. One of the best ways to prevent them from doing things you don’t want them to do is to provide a more pleasant alternative. In this case, that means getting a cat bed that’s more appealing to your cat than your bed or couch.
  • Cat owners who want to minimize the spread of fur and dander – Even if you’re fine with your cat on the furniture, it can be a good idea to provide a cat bed to help keep fur and dander contained. You could even put a mat-style bed on the furniture itself to encourage your cat to stick to that particular spot. Plus, it’s easier to throw a cat bed or cover in the wash than to try to clean your sofa.
  • Owners of older cats – Senior cats who aren’t as spry as they used to be may have a hard time jumping up to their favorite snoozing spots, like the bed, couch, or cat tower.1 A cozy bed lower to the ground can give them a comfy place to rest that’s easier to access.
  • Cat owners who just want to treat their cats to a cozy sleeping spot – Of course, sometimes we just want to get our cats something because we love them. In that case, a cozy cat bed can be the perfect gift for your beloved kitty.

Who Should Not Buy a Cat Bed

  • Owners of picky cats – If your cat has some favorite spots and tends to turn their nose up at anything unfamiliar, a new cat bed will probably get the same reaction. Save your money and give your cat some extra cuddles or playtime instead.
  • People whose cats already have convenient favorite spots to nap – If your cat has carved out some favorite spots that both you and the cat are happy with, there’s really no need to introduce a new bed. Still, if you just want to give your cat a new option, you could try one out anyway.

Buying Guide: Research Tips from a Veterinarian

Cats need spots in their home where they are comfortable and feel safe. A good cat bad can do that! Here are a few tips for choosing the best cat bed.

Talk to friends and family who are pet parents to learn what types of cat beds have worked well for them. Your veterinarian can also point to any features that might be ideal based on your cat’s age, size, and health status. Closely read product descriptions to avoid unpleasant surprises. Looking at customer reviews posted on trusted sources can give you an idea of how satisfied pet parents are with their purchase.

  1. Look for a warm bed – Cats spend a lot of time sleeping,2 and they enjoy having a cozy spot to call their own. Since cats can have trouble staying warm, particularly as they become older, they often prefer beds that they can snuggle into, are elevated off cold floors, can be placed near a sunny window, or are self-warming or electrically heated.3
  2. Make sure it’s easy to clean – Though they clean themselves, cats can still leave their beds messy with fur, dander, kitty litter (even when you’ve opted for dust free clumping cat litter), and more. For that reason, you want a cat bed that you can throw in the wash, or at least one with a removable, machine-washable cover. Ideally, you can also vacuum the cover between washes.
  3. Consider the material – You want to make sure your cat’s bed is made of materials that are safe for your cat. Construction also matters. Your cat shouldn’t be able to rip apart the bed, as damaged pet products may no longer be pet safe.
  4. Think about size and shape – Different cats have different preferences for the size and shape of their bed. You can look at their current favorite places to nap for ideas. For example, if your cat prefers to nap on a bare area of furniture or floor, they’ll probably prefer a mat-style bed with no walls. Do they prefer to cuddle into blankets? Then a plush bed with walls will probably be a hit. If they like to nap on the sill, maybe a window-mounted cat bed is the right choice. Under furniture? A cave-style bed may be their preference.

How Much Do They Cost?

Between $10 and $60

For a decent cat bed, you can anticipate paying between $10 and $60. The simpler the design, the less the bed will cost. For example, a plain sleeping mat will be close to $10. An enclosed or walled cat bed will cost more. As you add extra features, like heaters, scratching posts, or window mounts, the price rises even more. Of course, there are very fancy cat beds available that cost even more than $60, but unless your vet recommends a bed in that price range, you’re probably better off saving your money.

Our Methodology: Why Trust Pet News Daily

I’ve evaluated these cat beds based on my professional experience as a veterinarian combined with product feature considerations. Every cat is different, so I’ve chosen a variety of cat beds to fit all kinds of cat personalities. However, all of the beds I recommend are high-quality beds that will stand up to years of use. All you have to do is figure out which one your cat will like best! – Dr. Jennifer Coates, DVM

The Best Cat Bed Reviews

1. Best Overall – Best Friends by Sheri OrthoComfort Deep Dish Cuddler

Our Vet’s Top Pick

Best Friends by Sheri OrthoComfort Deep Dish Cuddler

The Best Friends by Sheri OrthoComfort Deep Dish Cuddler is the softest, coziest cat bed out there.

The Best Friends by Sheri OrthoComfort Deep Dish Cuddler is one of the coziest cat beds out there. This bed has elevated sides and a high back for comfort and support. The rear wall is 12″ tall and the front and sides are 9″ tall. The lower front and sides make it easier for your cat to get in and out and provide a comfy place for your kitty to rest its head. The high loft filling and sherpa fabric make the bed soft and warm. It’s perfect for your cat to cuddle into.

To make things easier for you, the bed has a water and dirt-resistant bottom and is machine washable. It’s also available in two sizes and several colors, so you can choose the one that best suits your cat and your home decor.

pros
  • Machine washable
  • Water and dirt resistant bottom
  • Reasonably priced
  • Soft, warm, and cuddly
Cons
  • Regular size may be too small for large cats
  • Sides are floppy, not firm

2. Best Budget – Furhaven Pet Products – ThermaNAP Cat Bed Pad

Best Budget

Furhaven Pet Products – ThermaNAP Cat Bed Pad

For a quality cat bed that won’t empty your wallet, go with the Furhaven Pet Products – ThermaNAP Cat Bed Pad.

The Furhaven Pet Products – ThermaNAP Cat Bed Pad is great for owners looking for a budget cat bed and for cats that prefer a simple, mat-style bed. It’s also great for putting on furniture to create a barrier for cat fur and dander. And it’s light and thin, making it an excellent option for travel.

The interior contains a reflective thermal sheet covered with polyester fiber cushioning, so the bed is self-warming with no need for electricity. The cover is quilted and made of soft faux-fur. The cover is removable and safe to machine wash and dry. It’s available in two sizes and six colors, all of which are very inexpensive. The smaller size measures 17″ x 22″ and is great for most cats. The larger size measures 36″ x 24″ and is perfect for multiple cats to share the bed or even just a single cat that likes to sprawl.

pros
  • Simple, versatile design
  • Self-warming
  • Very inexpensive
  • Can be machine washed and dried
Cons
  • No soft sides
  • Minimal padding
  • Thermal sheet can make a crinkling sound, which some cats may not like

3. Best Window Bed – Zakkart Cat Window Perch for Indoor Cats

Best Cat Window Bed

Zakkart Cat Window Perch for Indoor Cats

The Zakkart Cat Window Perch for Indoor Cats is perfect for the cat that likes to hang out on the window sill.

If your cat is a bird watcher or even just a nosy neighbor, they’ll love the Zakkart Cat Window Perch for Indoor Cats. This cat bed features a metal support frame with strong suction cups that attach to the glass on your window. The supports are under the bed, unlike other window beds where the bed hangs with cables on either side. This prevents the bed from wobbling and allows the cat to easily jump on and off the bed from any direction. The 40-pound weight limit makes the bed sturdy enough for virtually any cat. Just remember to periodically check the suction cups to make sure they’re still in good condition.

The bed itself has a soft sherpa cover that is removable and machine washable. Between the soft fabric and the raised edges, this bed will help your cat stay cozy and warm, even when the weather on the other side of the window is chilly. It’s also large enough for big cats, measuring 23″ x 13″. The bed itself is available in gray and white, while the frame is black.

pros
  • Can be used on any window, with or without a sill, and at any height
  • 40-pound weight limit
  • Machine washable
  • Available in grey and weight
Cons
  • Need to inspect suction cups regularly to ensure safety
  • Not the most attractive design

4. Best Heated – K&H PET PRODUCTS Heated Thermo-Kitty Fashion Splash Cat Bed

Best Heated Cat Bed

K&H PET PRODUCTS Heated Thermo-Kitty Fashion Splash Cat Bed

The K&H PET PRODUCTS Heated Thermo-Kitty Fashion Splash Cat Bed will keep your cat warm even on the coldest days.

The K&H PET PRODUCTS Heated Thermo-Kitty Fashion Splash Cat Bed electrically heats up to your cat’s normal body temperature to keep them warm and comfortable but goes no higher for safety. It’s also thermostatically controlled, so it only heats up while your cat is using the bed. It uses an energy-efficient, low-wattage heater and K&H Pet Products sells replacement parts so it’s easy to repair, extending the life of the bed.

The bed also features an orthopedic foam base with bolsters, making this bed especially good for older cats and cats with joint issues. The cover is removable and machine washable for your convenience. It comes in two sizes and two colors to suit a variety of cats and homes. The small size is a 16″ diameter circle, while the large is a 16″ x 22″ oval.

pros
  • Heated
  • Thermostatically controlled
  • Two sizes and two colors
  • Machine washable cover
Cons
  • Requires an outlet
  • Small size is a little small for most adult cats
  • Warms while in use, which cats may not understand at first

5. Best Elevated – Catry Cat Bed with Scratching Post

Best Elevated Cat Bed

Catry Cat Bed with Scratching Post

The Catry Cat Bed with Scratching Post is elevated to allow your cat to survey their territory from the comfort of their bed.

The Catry Cat Bed with Scratching Post is an excellent choice for cats that like to sleep up high and for owners who want a cat bed that doubles as a scratching post. The elevated bed satisfies a cat’s desire to survey their territory, while the sisal scratching post underneath allows them to engage in natural scratching behaviors without damaging your furniture or carpet. The post is large, 16″ x 12″ x 4,” which gives your cat plenty of room to scratch and provides plenty of support for the bed on top. It’s also a great option for placing in front of a window. The wide base makes sure the bed is stable despite its tall height.

The bed itself is big and plush, measuring 23″ x 16″, so it’s large enough for most cats. The soft bed cover is removable and machine washable. Finally, the overall design of the bed is much more attractive than many other beds on the market.

pros
  • Elevated bed
  • Good height to put in front of window
  • Large base for stability
  • Machine washable cover
Cons
  • Requires you to assemble the bed yourself
  • The bed isn’t very padded

Frequently Asked Questions

What kind of bed is best for cats?

Like people, different cats have different preferences for their beds. Look at the places that your cat already likes to snooze and try to find a bed that provides similar elements, like elevation, materials, and side height. For example, if your cat likes to sleep under the bed, an enclosed cat bed might be the best option. If they like to cuddle up near a heating vent, a heated or self-warming cat bed might provide them with the warm, cozy place to sleep that they want.
Do cats prefer round or square beds?

Cats generally like to curl up to sleep,4 so most cats prefer to sleep in a round bed. That way the sides will fit closer to your kitty’s body, helping them feel safe and snug. With that said, most cats love a box, so they’ll generally be happy with a square or rectangular bed too.
Do cats prefer closed or open beds?

Many cats prefer closed beds because these beds tend to be warmer and make cats feel safer. However, all cats are different. If your cat likes to look around from their favorite spot or doesn’t like enclosed spaces with only a single entrance and exit, they may prefer an open cat bed.
What do cats like to sleep on?

As a cat owner, you probably know that cats can make do on just about any surface. However, they’ll almost always prefer something soft and warm. Cats naturally have a higher body temperature than humans,5 so they often find the ambient temperatures that we like just a little too chilly. Soft, warm bedding material helps them feel nice and toasty while they sleep.
]]>
The Best Dust Free Cat Litter https://petnewsdaily.com/best-dust-free-cat-litter/ Thu, 22 Dec 2022 02:31:37 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=994 Cleaning up after your pets is obviously a gross but necessary task. Scooping out a litter box particularly isn’t a very fun job.

Beyond the obvious (scooping cat droppings and clumped cat urine) cat litter can have a number of dangerous chemicals for humans. It’s also a special mess in and of itself! Even moving a litter box around will often leave you with bits of litter all over your floor or behind furniture. Dusty, smelly cat litter is the last thing you want to have hiding out under a couch or bureau.

Dust-free cat litter helps address at least some of these issues by being easier to clean up and not hanging in the air as long as traditional cat litter.

The wrong dust-free cat litter can leave you with a number of issues, however:

  • Cat litter being labeled “dust-free” doesn’t always mean the litter is actually dust-free, unfortunately.
  • Some brands of dust-free cat litter will actually help with dust, but are terrible at clumping so scooping what you’re there to scoop is almost impossible.
  • If your dust-free cat litter isn’t absorbent you can end up with a mess and some very unpleasant cleanup at the bottom of your litter box.

Don’t worry, though. To help you avoid these issues (and more) we asked our veterinary advisor Dr. Chyrle Bonk (a licensed and practicing veterinarian who is an expert on cats and cat products) to personally review each and every major brand of dust-free cat litter and share her findings with our readers.

Dr. Bonk selected Dr. Elsey’s Precious Cat Unscented Ultra Clumping Cat Litter as the best of the best. It’s hypoallergenic with all-natural ingredients, making it suitable for families with allergies, and it has superior odor control, too.

Our Vet’s Top Pick

Dr. Elsey’s Precious Cat Unscented Ultra Clumping Cat Litter

This hypoallergenic, odor-controlling, 99.9% dust free natural litter will keep your house clean and smelling fresh.

While this was Dr. Bonk’s top pick, she’s also got you covered if this option isn’t for you. In this article, she’ll share her top tips for choosing the best dust-free cat litter, which cat owners may want to avoid dust-free cat litter altogether, and share her personal recommendations for the best dust-free cat litter brands for a variety of use cases.

The 5 Best Dust-Free Cat Litters

  1. Best OverallDr. Elsey’s Precious Cat Unscented Ultra Clumping Cat Litter
  2. Best for Multiple CatsFresh Step Scented Multi-Cat Litter
  3. Best ClumpingPurina Tidy Cats Instant Action Clumping Cat Litter
  4. Best BiodegradablePurina Yesterday’s News
  5. Best LightweightWorld’s Best Cat Litter, Unscented

Dust-Free Cat Litter Compared

Here are the top picks from our veterinarian. Compare the ratings and features of different models.

Editor’s Picks Model Rating Odor Control Scented Material Dust-free
Best Overall Dr. Elsey’s Precious Cat Unscented Ultra Clumping Cat Litter 4.4 100% bentonite clay 99.9%
Best for Multiple Cats Fresh Step Scented Multi-cat Cat Litter 4.6 Clumping clay 99.9%
Best Clumping Purina Tidy Cats Instant Action Clumping Cat Litter 4.6 Natural clay with deodorizing system 99.9%
Best Biodegradable Purina Yesterday’s News 4.5 Paper pellets 99.7%
Best Lightweight World’s Best Cat Litter 4.7 Whole-kernel corn with odor control 99%

*Ratings are on a scale of 1 to 5 and based on reviews, feedback, and opinions of actual customers

Who Should Buy Dust-Free Cat Litter?

  • Families who have allergies – The dust from some cat litter may aggravate your allergies.1 Choosing a dust-free option – ideally, a hypoallergenic one – could help a lot.
  • Owners of cats with allergies – As with humans, if your cat has allergies, the dust from cat litter can worsen their symptoms. Your cat may even be allergic to the cat litter itself. Dust-free, hypoallergenic cat litter can help to reduce your kitty’s symptoms.2
  • Cat owners with small homes – Dust and the tracking of litter can be particularly problematic in a small apartment or house.
  • Owners of any cats that seem reluctant to use their litter box correctly – Cats can be picky … and changing to dust-free litter could instantly improve their litter box behavior.3

Who Should Not Buy Dust-Free Cat Litter?

  • For individuals, couples, or families on a very tight budget – Dust-free litter can come at a premium price.
  • Owners of cats who are happy with their current cat litter – If it’s working for you and your cat, why change it?

Buying Guide: Research Tips From a Veterinarian

Dust-free cat litter is a relative term: it’s hard to make something that is 100% not dusty. That being said, there is plenty of cat litter that is very close to dust free. In order to judge which litter is best, I recommend that you:

  1. Consider trying different materials – Not all cat litter is made from clay. You can choose from a multitude of materials including wood chips, corn, newspapers, and even silica gels. Try different options to see what works for both you and your kitty.
  2. Think about clumping vs non-clumping – Some pet parents like clumps, while others don’t. It all depends on how you prefer to clean your litter box and the litter box system that you’re using.
  3. Consider odor control – Nobody likes the ammonia odor of a stinky litter box, especially your cat. Some cat litter doesn’t conceal odors at all, while others may have added fragrance or the ability to trap odors. If your litter box is in a high-traffic area, odor control is particularly important.
  4. Check whether the cat litter is scented or not –This is really down to personal preference: you might like to use a fragrance to mask odors or you may not want a strong perfumy smell lingering in your home.
  5. Check the texture and size of the litter – Some cats are picky about this, so make sure you know your cat’s preferences and choose a dust-free cat litter that’s similar to their current favorites. If your cat doesn’t mind, opt for a larger-sized litter: smaller sizes will stick between your kitty’s toes and get tracked around more easily.

How Much Does It Cost?

Between $20 and $45 for 40lb

The price of dust-free cat litter depends on the material, but most will cost between $20 and $45 for 40 lbs. In general, traditional clay litter will be cheaper than litter made from other materials. You’ll also find that litter is sold in a wide range of sizes, so we’ve given the price range for the equivalent of a 40lb bag. You can expect to spend anywhere between about $20 and $45 for 40lb of dust-free cat litter, depending on the type you go for.

Our Methodology: Why Trust Pet News Daily?

The first feature that I looked for in dust-free cat litter is the actual degree that it is dust free! I wanted the least of the least when it comes to dust produced. Next, I went after odor control, because nobody wants a stinky litter box, and absorbability makes litter box cleaning easier. My final consideration for dust-free cat litter choices was availability. If a product was constantly out of stock or very expensive, I didn’t consider it a practical purchase. Of course, if your cat has health issues that might require specific types of cat litter, I strongly recommend speaking to your own veterinarian to get a personalized recommendation. – Dr. Chyrle Bonk

The Best Dust-Free Cat Litter Reviews

1. Best Overall – Dr. Elsey’s Precious Cat Unscented Ultra Clumping Cat Litter

Our Vet’s Top Pick

Dr Elsey’s Precious Cat Unscented Ultra Clumping Cat Litter

This hypoallergenic, odor-controlling, 99.9% dust free natural litter will keep your house clean and smelling fresh.

Dr Elsey’s Precious Cat Unscented Ultra Clumping Cat Litter is a fantastic choice if you’re looking for a dust-free cat litter. It’s budget-friendly, coming in right at the low end of our price range. With hard-clumping medium-grain clay, it prevents moisture and is a perfect option for sifting and mechanical litter boxes.

It’s suitable for multiple cats if you have more than one kitty in your home. Plus, it’s designed to reduce tracking so you don’t end up with litter all over your floors. There’s even a money-back guarantee if your cats don’t use the litter box 100% of the time.

Pros
  • Hypoallergenic litter, suitable for cat owners with allergies
  • Costs just $19.99 for a huge 40lb bag
  • Forms hard clumps for easy twice-daily cleaning and disposal
  • Comes with a money-back guarantee from Dr. Elsey
Cons
  • Clumps are quite large, so you might get through the litter quickly
  • Not fragranced (only a problem if you prefer scented litter!)

2. Best for Multiple Cats – Fresh Step Scented Multi-Cat Litter

Best for Multiple Cats

Fresh Step Scented Multi-Cat Litter

This scented cat litter is ideal for multi-cat homes and busy litter boxes, with ClumpLock technology to keep liquid and odors under control.

Looking for a robust cat litter that can stand up to the needs of multiple cats? Try Fresh Step Scented Multi-Cat Litter. It’s easy to clean up: just remove clumps and solids daily. The fragrance is pleasant rather than overpowering, and many reviewers said this product was the only one their cats really liked.

If you’re keen on finding a cat litter that excels at odor control (and that smells good even when you’re cleaning out the litter tray) then this is the one for you.

Pros
  • Pleasant-smelling litter that successfully masks odors
  • Easy to clean out once a day as it clumps well
  • Popular with picky cats that reject other types of litter
Cons
  • Some reviewers felt it produced too much dust for a “dust-free” option
  • Litter may track outside the litter box quite easily

3. Best Clumping – Purina Tidy Cats Instant Action Clumping Cat Litter

Best Clumping

Purina Tidy Cats Instant Action Clumping Cat Litter

To fight odor, minimize dust, and achieve better clumping, then go for this fantastic cat litter from Purina.

Purina Tidy Cats Instant Action Clumping Cat Litter is a great option if you want a cat litter that clumps well for easy clean-up. Their cat litter is also designed to be as dust-free as possible, easily preventing clouds of dust when you pour it out.

It has a natural, clean scent rather than a fragrance, which many reviewers said they preferred.

Pros
  • Clean-smelling cat litter that will mask odors for up to 2 weeks
  • Clumps well and is easy to clean out of the litter box
  • Good-value cat litter that’s cheaper than many competitors
Cons
  • A few reviewers felt it produced too much dust, making their cats sneeze
  • The box it’s supplied in is heavy and may be tricky to carry and pour from

4. Best Biodegradable – Purina Yesterday’s News

Best Biodegradable

Purina Yesterday’s News

This environmentally-friendly cat litter is made from recycled paper, is 3x more absorbent than clay and can be flushed after use.

Worried about your cat’s carbon footprint? Purina Yesterday’s News is a biodegradable cat litter made from recycled paper, mostly newspapers. It can even be flushed away down your toilet.

The paper pellets are suitable for sensitive paws and don’t contain any harmful chemicals, making them a great alternative to traditional clay cat litter.

Pros
  • Biodegradable, environmentally-friendly option
  • Doesn’t create much dust at all
  • No smell, not even the “natural” smell of many clay litters
  • Suitable for other pets such as bunnies and rodents
Cons
  • Cats accustomed to clay litter may not like it
  • The large pellets may not fall through your poop scoop

5. Best Lightweight – World’s Best Cat Litter, Unscented

Best Lightweight

World’s Best Cat Litter, Unscented

This lightweight cat litter is made from whole-kernel corn and no harmful chemicals, making it people, pet, and planet friendly.

Does World’s Best Cat Litter, Unscented, live up to its name? Plenty of reviewers think so. It’s a popular choice of dust-free litter, as it’s made from corn rather than clay. This prevents dust and helps avoid tracking, too.

It’s also easy to clean up if it does happen to get outside the litter box. It should vacuum easily out of your carpet and wash off hard surfaces with just water.

Pros
  • An eco-friendly option that’s great for your pet and the planet
  • Won’t track around your house on your pet’s paws
  • Easy to clean up if it gets outside the litter box
  • Has great odor control, despite being unscented
Cons
  • May take some time for cats used to clay litter to adjust to it
  • Clumps may fall apart a bit when scooping

Frequently Asked Questions

Is there a cat litter that is truly dust-free?

All cat litter will produce at least some dust, but the ones we’ve picked here are as dust-free as it gets. If you find that clay litters are still producing too much dust, or getting tracked around your house, you may want to try out a paper or corn alternative.
How do you make cat litter less dusty?

Seeing dust around your litter box? Consider switching to a covered litter box that will help minimize the spread of dust. Your pouring technique can also make a difference in the amount of dust produced. If you’re tipping cat litter into the tray from a height, it’s going to make more dust than if you scoop the litter carefully into the litter box. You’ll also want to pop the litter box on a litter mat to help stop dust and litter from getting tracked onto your floor.
Where is the best place to put a cat litter box?

You can keep your cat’s litter box wherever makes the most sense for you. Ideally, you want a low-traffic area that’s well away from your cat’s food and water bowls. It should be easy and convenient for your cat to get to. The exact location hasn’t been shown to make a difference to whether or not cats use the litter box correctly.4
How often should you change a cat’s litter?

Ideally, you should spot clean (remove clumps and solids) every day. Some cat litter manufacturers recommend twice daily. You should replace all the litter regularly, usually once a week, though once every 2 weeks may be enough.
]]>
6 Remedies That Will Settle Your Cat’s Upset Stomach https://petnewsdaily.com/remedies-that-will-settle-your-cats-upset-stomach/ Thu, 22 Dec 2022 01:41:32 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=107 Does your cat have diarrhea? Or maybe they’re vomiting? If you’re like many cat owners, these issues have led you to search for remedies that will settle your cat’s upset stomach. These symptoms can be brought on by many different causes including:

  • Viral and bacterial infections
  • Parasites
  • Ingesting a toxic substance, unusual food, or foreign material
  • A food allergy
  • A food intolerance
  • A serious disease, such as an inflammatory bowel disease, organ dysfunction, or cancer
  • A side effect of drug treatment
  • Hairballs

So what can you do to help ease your cat’s upset stomach?

If your cat’s vomiting or diarrhea is severe and/or frequent, talk to your veterinarian immediately. Keep in mind that besides occasional vomiting caused by hairballs, it is not normal for cats to vomit.1 Both vomiting and diarrhea may be symptoms of a range of medical conditions, so it is best to take your cat to the vet to get the all-clear.2

If, however, your cat’s vomiting or diarrhea just started and is not severe or is a rare occurrence, the following 6 remedies may help settle your cat’s upset stomach.

1. Fasting

Cat next to their empty cat food bowl looking up to show their hunger

When your cat is suffering from an upset stomach, one of the best remedies to try is the simplest: fasting. Fasting (that is, withholding food from your cat) will give your cat’s upset stomach a chance to settle.

To put your cat on a fast, you will need to remove their food sources. You can also remove water, but just for a few hours, until it’s clear that their stomach has started to settle. Keep in mind, though, that cats can develop a potentially serious condition called hepatic lipidosis if they don’t eat for even relatively short periods of time.3 Never fast your cat for longer than 12 hours unless told to do so by your veterinarian.

Here is a rough timeline that you can follow to put your cat on a fast:

  1. Remove both food and water for 2 hours.
  2. After 2 hours, reintroduce water if they are no longer vomiting.
  3. After 8 to 12 hours, gradually reintroduce food.

2. Bland Diet

When it comes time to reintroduce food to your cat, it is advisable to put them on a bland diet. A bland diet is recommended by vets when your cat’s digestive tract is upset and needs a rest.4 It is designed to provide your cat with some nutrition to help them get on the road to recovery.

So what foods can you feed them on a bland diet? Boiled white meat chicken mixed with a little cooked white rice is a popular option. The length of time you should stick to a bland diet will depend on your cat’s condition. Anywhere from a few days to a week may be necessary. However, many bland diets do not provide all the nutrition a cat needs to stay healthy. Your veterinarian can prescribe a complete and balanced bland diet for long term feeding if that proves necessary.

While they are on the bland diet, be sure to avoid giving your cat treats or any other foods.

3. Sensitive Stomach Cat Food

Cat eating sensitive stomach cat food from their cat bowl outside on a sunny day

Photo courtesy: Pixabay Public Domain

As mentioned above, your cat’s upset stomach may be caused by a food intolerance. If this is the case, switching to high-quality sensitive stomach cat food may help to settle your cat’s upset stomach.

Sensitive stomach cat foods are formulated to provide cats with a nutritious diet that won’t aggravate their gastrointestinal (GI) system. This type of cat food is typically highly digestible and may contain ingredients that promote beneficial gut bacteria.

Of course, if switching your cat to a sensitive stomach cat food doesn’t improve their symptoms, you should make an appointment with your veterinarian.

4. Medication

If you take your cat to the vet, they may prescribe medication to help settle your cat’s upset stomach after assessing their condition. The type of medication will depend on the vet’s diagnosis. For example, if the upset stomach is a one-off occurrence, they may prescribe a short course of anti-nausea medication and/or anti-diarrheal agents. Or, if your cat’s symptoms are caused by certain parasites, the doctor will prescribe a deworming medication.

In more severe cases, cats may require hospitalization for monitoring, supportive care, like fluid therapy, and other treatments.

5. Probiotic Supplements

Cat sitting on their owner's lap sniffing a probiotic supplement their owner is trying to give them

Probiotic supplements may be able to help if your cat’s upset stomach is caused by or leads to changes in their intestinal microbial population.5 Probiotics are naturally-occurring live, good bacteria that help to balance a cat’s gut microbiome (the numerous microorganisms that live in their intestinal tract).

When your cat gets sick, it can lead to a die-off of good bacteria and an increase in the bad bacteria in their gut. This imbalance can in turn cause or exasperate your cat’s upset stomach.

Probiotic supplements help to increase the number of good bacteria in your cat’s gut, so taking one may help settle your cat’s stomach or prevent the issue from recurring in the future.

When selecting a probiotic, it is important to select one that has undergone rigorous research.6 This is why it is best for your vet to recommend one, rather than choose a product yourself.

6. Hairball Remedies

If your cat’s upset stomach is due to a hairball problem, giving them a hairball remedy may help it pass. A variety of hairball remedies are available. Veterinarians commonly recommend flavored lubricant gels (Laxatone, for example) that are available over the counter. Follow the directions on the label, and be sure to reach out to your veterinarian if you have any questions or concerns.

If your cat’s upset stomach is indeed caused by hairballs, the good news is that there are plenty of things you can do to help prevent hairballs in the future.7

Conclusion

The 6 remedies outlined above may be able to help settle your cat’s upset stomach. The suitability and effectiveness of each one will depend on your cat’s overall health and the cause of their upset stomach.

If your cat’s upset stomach appears to be serious or if you are worried that your cat’s stomach issues may be symptomatic of a more serious health concern, remember that it is vital to seek veterinary advice as soon as possible.

If your cat is having other health issues, you may find our guide to what to do if your cat has blood in its stool, whether cats can get colds, and home remedies for a cat vomiting.

Additional Resources

We’ve created a series of posts here on Pet News Daily related to gastro intestinal issues for cats and cat health in general, including:

]]>
5 Things to Put in a Dog House for Bedding https://petnewsdaily.com/things-to-put-in-a-dog-house-for-bedding/ Thu, 22 Dec 2022 01:39:28 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=308 You have just spent the time and effort to set up a nice house for your dog, and now you might be wondering what things to put in a dog house for bedding to keep your pup safe, comfortable, warm, and dry. In this article, I’ll explain the various types of dog house bedding to consider depending on the environment and your dog’s needs.

Before you select one of these things for your dog house, make sure to think about your particular dog house and its location. Is it an indoor dog house or an outdoor dog house? Think about the size of the dog house and the shape. Do you need a waterproof bed?  Is the item you selected easy to wash, especially for outdoor dog houses, puppies, and senior dogs?

And, importantly, remember to think about the needs of your particular dog. See below for some added tips for puppies and senior dogs.

5 Types of Bedding for Your Dog’s House

1. Dog Bed

Jack Russell Terrier laying in green dog bed

A great item to consider for dog house bedding is a dog bed. Dog beds come in all shapes and sizes, making it easy to select one that fits your space. A dog bed is also made for a dog to sleep on and will be durable for long-term use.

There are a variety of different materials that make up dog beds. For an indoor dog house, any bed you like may work well (some sofa dog beds may fit nicely). If this is for an outdoor dog house, you can consider different options like an elevated outdoor dog bed, a standard outdoor dog bed, or an outdoor dog bed that’s waterproof.

Most dog beds will come with a washable cover that helps to keep the bed clean.

While the perfect dog bed may be a bit of an investment, getting the one that suits your needs will be long-lasting and worth it.

2. Rug

A rug can work well for dog house bedding. A rug such as a bathroom rug or area rug works nicely. These rugs often have a rubber backing, making them non-slip. Rugs are easy to wash and come in many sizes and shapes. You can also choose the density and thickness of the carpeting to best suit your dog’s needs.

Rugs are also fairly inexpensive, which is nice for the budget. However, rugs are more likely to need replacement due to wear than some heavier-duty alternatives.

An indoor/outdoor rug can also be considered. While this will be less cozy, it will likely last a bit longer for outdoor use compared to an indoor rug.

3. Kennel Pad

A kennel pad (or dog crate pad or mat) is a good option for dog house bedding. There are many types of these pads that are fairly indestructible and durable.

Depending upon your needs, there are many thicknesses of kennel pads. It may be nice to have a pad that is not too thick, especially in hot environments. These pads also come in many sizes, though they do tend to be rectangular in shape.

Kennel pads will provide padding and some support. There are washable kennel pads, but depending upon the size, it may difficult to wash in a non-commercial washing machine.

4. Blankets

Yellow lab laying on rug under blanket

Blankets or linens also can work for dog house bedding. Blankets are easily bunched up into a cozy sleeping space for your pup. Blankets also offer soft support for your dog. Dogs tend to really like to get cozy into the blankets, so they usually feel very comfortable and safe in blankets.

Blankets are easy to wash and dry. Depending on your environment, blankets will likely need more washing and drying than other types of bedding.

A nice comforter can provide plenty of warmth and comfort for your dog.

5. Foam Pad Covered with Water Resistant Material

For those do-it-yourselfers out there, you can make your own dog house bedding. By using a foam pad and covering it with water-resistant material, you can create a bed that is like a combination of a dog bed and a kennel pad.

This works nicely as you can choose the type of padding your dog needs, something more comfortable and supportive for a senior dog, or maybe something thinner for a young dog and a smaller space. You can also customize the size and shape so it fits your dog’s house perfectly.

Depending upon the materials you choose, this will also be a more economical way to go.

How to Keep Your Dog House Bedding Safe

There are a few additional factors that you need to consider when deciding which of the above bedding makes sense for your dog.

First and foremost, is your dog a puppy or an adult chewer? If your dog chews and ingests items, then you don’t want a dog bed they will destroy. And, if they consume pieces of material, it can pose a health hazard, such as a gastrointestinal obstruction.1 For a destructive dog, consider kennel pads or maybe a dog bed that is intended for chewers. For a dog that is destructive, it is critical to monitor your dog and the bedding.

Also, really think about where your dog house is located. If it’s outdoors, then consider whether the bedding will attract insects. Does the bedding allow for good hiding spots for critters, especially snakes and rodents? Blankets and linens may be a hiding spot for these animals, so if you’re concerned about critters, you should choose an alternative.

For an indoor dog house, consider whether certain types of bedding might get too hot if the sun is shining on the house.2

Finally, for an outdoor dog house, consider cold temperatures and moisture.3 In some areas, you made need to change the bedding more frequently, and you may need waterproof material.

Special Considerations for Puppies

If you need dog house bedding for a puppy, there are a few special considerations.

Puppies commonly chew and eat items.4 Choose chew-proof material. There are kennel pads that are made of indestructible material, these are a good option for a strong chewer.

For puppies that are still potty training, consider bedding that can be easily washed. Again, most kennel pads and dog bed covers can be washed readily.

Special Considerations for Senior Dogs

Senior dogs need consideration too. As dogs age, their joints are more prone to the aches and pains of arthritis.5 To help their joints, make sure to choose dog house bedding that is supportive. I suggest orthopedic or memory foam dog beds that are moderately thick, but not so thick that it is hard for your dog to climb in.

Senior dogs may be more likely to have urinary incontinence issues also.6 Therefore, a washable and absorbent top layer for bedding is ideal.

If you keep all of these tips in mind, you will find bedding that will keep your dog safe and cozy in their house! Your pup is sure to enjoy their space for a long time to come.

]]>
Why Your Dog Snores (and When & How to Stop It) https://petnewsdaily.com/why-your-dog-snores-and-how-to-stop-it/ Thu, 22 Dec 2022 01:30:19 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=177 Wondering why your dog snores? The slow rumble of a snoring dog sleeping nearby in bed may be an endearing noise to some dog owners, but to others, it may cost them precious hours of sleep and worrying that something is wrong. Snoring may be normal in some dogs, but there are some instances that should give a dog owner reason for concern.

What is Snoring?

Snoring is a noise that occurs when air flows past relaxed tissue in the throat while breathing when asleep. It is the vibration from the movement of the relaxed tissue and the pressure of the breath that causes the sound we know as snoring.1

Why do Dogs Snore?

Short-nosed dog sleeping in dog bed

For some dogs, snoring could be due to an anatomic variation in the throat that may be considered normal or at least not detrimental to the dog’s health.2 Sometimes snoring is related to the sleep position, abnormal anatomy causing harm, disease, infection, or some other medical issue.3 Here are some common causes of snoring in dogs.

Obesity

Excess weight can cause snoring or exacerbate breathing problems in dogs that already experience snoring or trouble breathing. Excess fatty tissue around the throat can put pressure on the throat or can cause partial obstructions that lead to snoring when the pup is relaxed or sleeping.4

Conformation and Anatomy

Variations in a dog’s anatomy can cause snoring. This is particularly true in brachycephalic breeds (we will go into more detail about these breeds below) that have shorter, squished, and smaller noses and airways. Some dogs, brachycephalic breeds in particular, also have excess tissue in the soft palate which can causes snoring.5

Allergies

Any dog can suffer from allergies, similarly to people. When there is dust, dirt, pollens, sprays, and other allergens in the environment, it can cause swelling of the airways and snoring.6

Infections

Upper respiratory infections due to viral or bacterial colds can cause swelling and inflammation of the upper respiratory tract such as the sinuses, nasal passages, and throat. This congestion, swelling, inflammation, and discharge can all lead to problems such as snoring or other breathing difficulties.7

Nasal Foreign Body

There are different objects that can cause a full or partial obstruction inside the nose or in the throat that can cause snoring. Some of the most common things that cause obstructions in dogs include benign masses or polyps, cancerous tumors, small pieces of material such as sticks, grass awns, pieces of toys or chews, or other foreign material. When something is stuck in the airway, not only does it cause an obstruction, but it can also lead to infection and inflammation of the surrounding tissue, any of which can cause snoring or breathing difficulty.8

Sleep Position

Any time a dog is sleeping, they could snore due to simply being relaxed. While sleeping, a dog may be in a position that may make him or her more prone to snoring. This is especially true when a dog sleeps on their back. Dogs that sleep with their necks kinked, laying their heads on something in an awkward (yet apparently comfortable) position, or head hanging down off of the bed, all can contribute to snoring.9

If you’re looking to change up your dog’s sleep position with a new bed, we have a number of resources to help you including: our guide to evaluating waterproof large dog beds, our breakdown of the best raised outdoor dog bed, our look at the best elevated dog bed with stairs, or our guide to selecting the best dog bed for a couch.

Fungal

In some parts of the country, there are certain fungal infections that have a prevalence of infection in the nose and airway. Some of these fungal diseases cause small masses, inflammation, or irritation and can lead to snoring. Aspergillosis is the most common nasal fungal infection seen in dogs.10 It is caused by the Aspergillus fungus and causes mold that can be breathed in.

Secondhand Smoke

Smoking is not only dangerous in people, but many forget that it can affect their furry companions just as badly. Smoke can cause inflammation in the respiratory tract leading to bronchitis, respiration irritation, asthma, and can contribute to snoring.1112

Relaxation

Your dog may be most prone to snoring when they have had a really exciting and active day and are simply worn out. When they fall asleep, they have such a deep and relaxing snooze that they snore.

Medications

Some medications such as muscle relaxants, sedatives, and pain medications can lead to excessive tissue relaxation and can cause snoring.13

When Should I be Worried About My Dog Snoring?

Dog sleeping in dog bed laying on back

If your dog doesn’t typically snore and suddenly starts snoring, you may want to take a trip to see your veterinarian to make sure there are no concerning reasons for this. You should especially be concerned if your dog starts snoring in addition to acting sick and showing other signs of abnormalities such as difficulty breathing, coughing, nasal discharge, lethargy, inappetence, or other changes in behavior. If your dog snores and you can find a reasonable cause such as excessive sleepiness or sleeping in a position that could lead to snoring, you have less reason to be concerned.

Dog Breeds Most Prone to Snoring

Any dog can be heard snoring, but brachycephalic breeds are the most common breeds known to snore. Brachycephalic breeds are those that are bred to have short noses and muzzles.14 Some examples include:

  • English Bulldogs
  • French Bulldogs
  • Boston Terriers
  • Pugs
  • Boxers
  • Cavalier King Charles Spaniels
  • Shih Tzus
  • Mastiffs
  • Pekingese
  • Lhasa Apso
  • Brussels Griffon, Japanese Chin

These breeds are prone to brachycephalic syndrome which includes syndromes such as an elongated soft palate, stenotic nares, and everted laryngeal saccules.15 Any of these conditions can exacerbate or cause snoring.

How to Stop or Help a Snoring Dog

If your dog snores and you are concerned, there are some things you can do to help. You may not be able to stop the snoring, and in reality, it may not be something you need to stop. However, in some cases, snoring can be concerning, and a worried dog owner can do some things to help if needed.

See Your Vet

A trip to see your veterinarian should be the first thing you do if you are concerned about your snoring dog. Your vet will partner with you in the best interest of you and your dog to make sure he or she is in the best of health. They will make recommendations about additional diagnostics or tests that need to be performed, medications to give, or procedures that may need to be done.

Weight Loss

An exercise program and diet change are two things that a dog owner can easily do at home to help an overweight dog. More than half of adult dogs in the United States are overweight, according to the American Animal Hospital Association.16 It is still important to work closely with your veterinarian to develop an appropriate weight loss program for your dog.

Allergy Medications

If your vet thinks that allergies are the cause of your dog’s snoring, he or she may prescribe an allergy medication to help relieve allergy symptoms.

Change Position

If your dog is snoring and you notice that he or she is sleeping in an abnormal or uncomfortable position, you can try gently changing their sleep position to see if that helps the snoring. Providing a high-quality dog bed that allows your dog to sleep comfortably can help. Waterproof dog beds are a good solution for dogs who drool or sometimes have accidents while sleeping (you can also get waterproof outdoor dog beds).

Clean Air

To help reduce environmental allergens and irritants that can be breathed in and possibly cause snoring, you should reduce artificial fragrances and sprays, stop using harsh chemicals around your dog, and keep your dog away from secondhand smoke. It can also be helpful to add air purifiers and change furnace filters regularly.

Snoring may not be something you have to be worried about in your dog, but it is important to seek veterinary attention if you think your dog may be sick or suffering from brachycephalic syndrome.

If you’re concerned with your dog’s sleep, you may also be interested in the best nutrition and health for your dog. Our dog weight calculator can let you know how big your dog is likely to be, our answer to what can dogs not eat? can help you figure out what’s safe to feed your dog, our healthy dog weight chart can help you identify different inflection points in your dog’s growth, and our collection of breed-specific growth charts can help you get a better sense of things like how big are goldendoodle puppieshow big are great dane puppieshow big are golden retriever puppieshow big are chihuahua puppies, or how big are labrador puppies.

]]>
4 Best Home Remedies for Cat Vomiting https://petnewsdaily.com/home-remedies-for-cat-vomiting/ Thu, 22 Dec 2022 01:23:58 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=91 Is your cat vomiting? There are a few home remedies for cat vomiting that can help. However, if the vomiting is severe or accompanied by other potentially serious symptoms like abdominal pain, the presence of blood, profuse diarrhea, and weakness, stop reading now and call your veterinarian.

On the other hand, if your cat has just vomited a few times and seems to feel fine or only vomits occasionally, trying a home remedy or two before calling your vet makes sense.

There are many possible causes of vomiting in cats. Some common examples include:

  • Hairballs
  • Ingesting household products, cosmetics, or medications that are poisonous1
  • Inflammatory bowel disease and other gastrointestinal disorders
  • Ingesting unusual foods or foreign material (string, for example)2
  • Viral or bacterial infections
  • Food intolerance or allergy3
  • Diseases related to organ dysfunction such as diabetes,4 pancreatitis,5 and hyperthyroidism 6
  • Intestinal parasites7
  • A side effect of some types of medications, like NSAIDs8

Because many of these conditions are potentially very serious, it’s always safest to talk to your veterinarian before trying any of the four following home remedies for cat vomiting.

1. A Very Short Fast

Orange cat pawing an empty food bowl

Not offering food for a period of time is often recommended as a home remedy for vomiting, but cats are unique in this regard (and many others!). Cats who do not take in sufficient calories, even for relatively short periods of time, are at increased risk for a disease called hepatic lipidosis.9

With that said, it is fine to fast your cat for 8-12 hours. Skipping one meal won’t do any harm and can give your cat’s upset stomach a chance to empty and rest. But leave out fresh, clean water to prevent dehydration. Unlike dogs, cats will rarely overindulge with water. If your cat’s vomiting continues or if your cat is not willing to eat after 24 hours or so, give your veterinarian a call.

2. Bland Food

Feeding your cat bland, easy to digest food is another way to rest their gastrointestinal tract, but wait for at least 3 to 4 hours after their last vomiting episode.10 Initially, try offering a few small pieces of boiled white meat chicken (no skin or bones). If your cat keeps this down, you can continue to offer small portions every few hours and even mix in a little white rice. Bland cat foods that are easy to digest are also available from your veterinarian.

Slowly switch back to your cat’s regular food or a food for sensitive tummies (see below) once your cat seems to be back to normal. Chicken and rice is not nutritionally complete and balanced so don’t feed it alone for more than a few days. Gradually mix increasing amounts of cat food in with decreasing amounts of chicken and rice until your cat is eating only cat food after 3 to 5 days or so.

3. Feeding Your Cat Sensitive Stomach Cat Food

Cat eating sensitive stomach cat food from a food bowl

Photo courtesy: Pixabay Public Domain

Once your cat is ready to start eating regularly again, you may want to consider changing their diet. Switching to food that is specifically formulated to be easy on your cat’s stomach, such as high-quality sensitive stomach cat food, may help ease your cat’s discomfort. If your cat eats dry food, it’s also worth considering a change to an all wet food diet.

If you find that switching to sensitive stomach cat food does the trick, this may indicate that the reason your cat threw up is related to their diet. For example, they may have a dietary intolerance or an allergy to one or more ingredients.11

4. Hairball Remedies

Hairballs are a common cause of long term, intermittent vomiting in cats. If hairballs are the reason your cat is vomiting, a hairball remedy can help. However, if your cat brings up hairballs more than once every week or two, you should discuss the situation with your veterinarian. Frequent hairballs are often associated with health problems affecting the gastrointestinal tract or coat and skin.

Numerous hairball remedies are available for you to try out. One of the most common types is a hairball control gel that acts as a lubricant. Hairball control gels are flavored so that cats will (sometimes) readily lick them up. Never give your cat mineral oil, butter, lard, grease, or vegetable oils as a home treatment for hairballs. At best, they won’t work. At worst, they can make your cat very sick.

Brushing your cat more frequently and feeding a hairball prevention diet are good preventative measures for reducing hairballs in the future.12

When to Take Your Cat to the Vet

Sick cat resting his head

Photo courtesy: Pixabay Public Domain

When it comes to your cat vomiting (or exhibiting any health issues whatsoever, for that matter), it’s wise to err on the side of caution. Here is a general guide to help you decide when you should take your vomiting cat to the vet.

  • If your cat could have swallowed something poisonous or hazardous contact your vet or the 24/7 Pet Poison Helpline immediately.
  • If you have reason to suspect that your cat’s vomiting could be a symptom of a more serious health problem, your cat continues to vomit for several hours, or their vomiting is getting more severe, contact your vet.
  • If your cat has been vomiting for more than a day or two, take them to the vet.13

Remember, while vomiting is a relatively common problem for cats, it shouldn’t be a regular occurrence. So if you notice your cat vomiting several times a month, take them to the vet, even if their vomiting isn’t severe.

Your vet will be able to evaluate your cat’s condition and give them a proper diagnosis and appropriate treatment.14

If your cat is having other health issues, you may find our guide to what to do if your cat has blood in its stool, whether cats can get colds, and home remedies for a cat’s upset stomach.

Additional Resources

We’ve created a series of posts here on Pet News Daily related to gastro intestinal issues for cats and cat health in general, including:

 

]]>
8 Remedies for Your Dog’s Upset Stomach https://petnewsdaily.com/remedies-for-your-dogs-upset-stomach/ Thu, 22 Dec 2022 01:01:31 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=151 If you’re reading this article, it means that you’re on the hunt for practical remedies for your dog’s upset stomach. Fortunately, there are a few things you can do to address this health concern and ease your pup’s discomfort.

Many things can bring on an upset stomach in your dog, from consuming certain foods and plants,12 to eating too fast, to serious health issues such as pancreatitis (to name just a few!).3 It is important to take your dog to the veterinarian if:

  • Your dog’s vomiting or diarrhea is severe
  • It appears to be getting worse
  • It is accompanied by other serious symptoms like abdominal pain or enlargement, depression, lethargy, or repeated unsuccessful attempts to vomit.

A vet will be able to diagnose your dog and recommend appropriate treatment options. Vomiting and diarrhea can be signs that big trouble is on the horizon, so when in doubt, always seek expert advice.

A vet may be able to identify different issues your dog is having as being related to areas other than food, such as a dog’s need for daily exercise or something like a puppy having issues with sleeping through the night (if sleep is indeed the issue you can also check out our series of dog bed buying guides to: the best waterproof dog beds, the best outdoor dog beds, the best elevated large beds, and the best dog couches).

On the other hand, if your dog is only suffering from a mildly upset stomach and seems to feel fine otherwise, one of the following 8 remedies may be able to help.

1. Fasting

Fasting dog staring hungrily at his empty dog bowl next to him

Fasting gives your dog’s upset stomach a chance to rest and heal, so it can be a good way to treat a mild case of vomiting. A fast typically lasts between 12 and 24 hours,4 but the ideal amount of time will depend on your particular dog.

If your dog is still vomiting after fasting for a few hours, they may require a full 24 hour fast before you transition them back to eating. But if your dog’s stomach has settled after a few hours of fasting, you can begin to transition them to a bland diet.

But do not fast younger dogs or dogs with underlying health problems without first talking to your veterinarian.5 Also, only withhold food but not water when fasting your dog. If your dog has a tendency to gulp down large amounts of water, offer them small amounts frequently.

2. The Bland Diet

Putting your dog on a bland diet for a few days can be a good remedy for a dog who is experiencing a mild case of diarrhea or vomiting. As the name suggests, a bland diet is a diet made up of plain foods that are highly digestible, so they’re easier on your dog’s gastrointestinal tract.6

If you’d like to give a bland diet a try, the following foods may be suitable to feed your dog:

  • Boiled white meat chicken (no skin or bones)
  • Boiled lean hamburger
  • Cooked white rice
  • Boiled and mashed potatoes

Add equal parts of one of the proteins mentioned above with one of the starches and mix thoroughly. Remember, the whole point of this diet is to focus on bland foods, so steer clear of any added spices, fats, and oils!

The key to an effective bland diet is patience. Start with just a very small amount and wait an hour or so to see how it goes. If your dog holds the food down, you can give them a bit more. Slowly increase the amounts and decrease the frequency until your dog is eating a small meal every four hours or so.

When your dog can hold down food again, you can begin to transition them back to their regular diet gradually after one to two days on a bland diet. Similar to fasting your dog, if symptoms persist, don’t delay in taking your dog to the vet.

3. High Fiber Meals

Cocker Spaniel lying next to a bowl of high fiber dog food
Photo courtesy: Pixabay Public Domain

If your dog is experiencing loose stools, it may be helpful to consider switching them to a high fiber dog food or giving them a fiber supplement. Adding more fiber to your dog’s diet can help firm up stools and promote a healthy population of gut bacteria.

Always consult your vet before making the switch to a high fiber diet. There are many different kinds of fiber, each of which tends to have particular benefits, and it can be hard to know which type to use under different circumstances.7 Also, high fiber dog food may not be suitable for all dogs, particularly younger dogs or those with high energy requirements.

4. Bone Broth

Similar to the comfort a warm bowl of chicken soup provides when we’re feeling under the weather, a bone broth may help soothe your dog’s upset stomach. Bone broth tends to sit well on an upset stomach and can help pets stay hydrated while also providing them with some protein and other nutrients.8 You can either try making a homemade bone broth for dogs or purchase a pre-made broth from a reputable pet food brand.

5. Ice Cubes

Melting ice cubes scattered on a table
Photo courtesy: Pixabay Public Domain

One of the many things you’ll need to be mindful of when treating a dog with an upset stomach is hydration. Both vomiting and diarrhea can lead to dehydration, particularly in combination. To make matters more complex, drinking too much water all at once on an upset stomach can cause your dog to vomit even more.

So how do you ensure your dog maintains a healthy level of hydration when they have an upset stomach? In between small drinks of water, give them some ice chips to chew on.

6. Probiotics

Regardless of the initial cause of your dog’s digestive issues, their symptoms may continue due to disruptions in the populations of microbes that normally live in the gastrointestinal tract. Giving probiotic supplements can help. Probiotics supplements increase good bacteria in your dog’s gut, which can aid digestion.9

However, it is best to consult your vet about whether these supplements are the right remedy for your dog and if so, which brand they would recommend. This is particularly important given that the quality and effectiveness of probiotics are not always known.10

7. Slow-Feed Dog Bowls

A slow food feeder filled with kibble

Does your dog tend to eat a whole meal in just a few seconds? Eating too quickly can cause vomiting and other health problems, so it’s a good idea to put a stop to it.11

Slow-feed dog bowls (and automatic dog feeders) are a convenient way to encourage your dog to nibble rather than gulp. Unlike a typical dog bowl, the interior of slow-feed dog bowls feature ridges or other obstacles that prolong the time it takes for dogs to consume a meal. Not only can they encourage your dog to consume food at a slower pace, but they also make mealtimes more fun and mentally stimulating. 12

8. Medicine

Depending on the cause of your dog’s upset stomach, medication may be able to help. For example, an antidiarrheal medicine, like loperamide (Immodium) may help ease their diarrhea.13 You should only give your dog over the counter medications under the guidance of your veterinarian, so contact your vet before giving your dog loperamide or any other medications or supplements. Dogs with more severe or persistent symptoms may need medications or other treatments that are only available through veterinarians.

If you’re in doubt about which of these remedies for your dog’s upset stomach is best for your pup or you have any questions at all, talk to your vet. 

Additionally, if you’re concerned about your dog’s upset stomach, you’re likely interested in your dog’s food and your pet’s overall health. Luckily, we have a lot of resources to help! We can even answer the question of how long does it takes a dog to digest food. We also have a dog weight predictor, a guide to how much your dog should weigh, and we even have a list that answers the question what foods can dogs not eat?

Beyond that, if you’re looking for additional resources to help keep your puppy healthy and looking good we also have a series of buying guides to help you select a medicated dog ear cleaner, the best professional dog clippersdog clippers for poodle hair, and our guide to finding the best dog brush for an Australian Shepherd.

]]>
The Best Pet Stores in America https://petnewsdaily.com/best-pet-stores-in-america/ Wed, 21 Dec 2022 01:18:02 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=445 Finding a pet store that carries the supplies you need for your furry, feathered, or scaly family member can be difficult. You want a store that has fair prices, and a staff of caring, knowledgeable experts. You might also have special pet-related needs, like a pet store that caters to exotic creatures or one that carries raw or natural pet foods (to make sure your pet isn’t hungry and and consuming human foods that dogs can’t eat) or food for your pup on a diet if your pooch isn’t at the desired dog weight.

We looked at hundreds of pet stores in the United States to find the very best. We focused on small, individually-owned pet shops (not big-box, pet store chains or franchises), and we chose ones that meet a range of needs. We also consulted with our team of veterinarians for tips on how to choose the best pet store in your city. Keep reading to see our list of the best pet shops in America.

How to Choose a Pet Store: Expert Vet Tips

We spoke to three veterinarians to find out what makes a good pet store. All three stressed the importance of a clean and sanitary store, which is a strong indication that the store is focused on health and safety. You also make sure that rodents and insects are not getting into any of the products, particularly the pet foods.

Dr. Addie Reinhard had the following tips:

  • Dr Addie Reinhard DVMIt’s a good sign if pet store employees can recommend a good veterinarian.
  • They’ll carry high-quality pet foods.
  • If the store sells small animals, you should ask where they obtain them from. If the staff doesn’t want to answer or doesn’t know, find a different pet store.

Dr. Jennifer Coates says that:

  • Dr Jennifer Coates DVMYou should check edible and health products to be sure they’re not past their expiration dates.
  • Look carefully at the discounted racks; a pet store willing to sell outdated items might also be cutting corners elsewhere.
  • A good pet store doesn’t sell cats and dogs; these pets are provided by pet breeding facilities and are typically not well-socialized or healthy. However, many pet stores partner with rescue organizations and have dogs and cats to adopt.

Dr. Melody Aitchison-Steed suggests you should:

  • Look at the small animals (rodents, reptiles, birds, and fish) that the store might have for sale. Do they look healthy? Are they active? Make sure that their cages are clean.
  • Talk to the employees to see if they are helpful and can answer questions about animal care and health. Their advice should align with what your veterinarian says; if it is completely different, that might be a red flag to look elsewhere.

Of course there’s more to pet health than just shopping at the right store as well. You want to make sure to be monitoring and tracking your pet’s overall well-being, which you can do with tools like our dog weight calculator, our Goldendoodle growth chart (or any of our other growth charts by breed), our our guide to foods dogs can and can not eat.

The Top Pet Stores and Pet Shops in America (in 50 Cities)

We looked at pet stores in 50 major metro areas all across the United States. In each city, we selected a top pick, then we also looked for two additional categories. For example, some pet stores really shine when it comes to customer service, while others have the distinction of carrying organic and holistic products. Most cities have a great store for the owners of exotic pets, such as lizards and snakes. We hope you’re able to find an amazing pet store near you, and we think this list is great place to start.

NOTE: Use the links below to jump to your city. 

Albuquerque, NM

Simply Diego’s – Top Pick
Simply Diego's Pet Store

What we like: Simply Diego’s has a great selection of pet products and a clean, well-organized store. Their staff is friendly and helpful, and the prices are reasonable. They also have a rewards program.

Long Leash on Life – Best for DIY Grooming

What we like: You’ll be able to find high-quality pet products at Long Leash on Life. What makes it unique, though, is that they offer a DIY doggie wash, which allows you to bring in your dirty dog and use their products and space to get him squeaky clean.

Southwest Reef Company – Best for Tropical Fish

What we like: Keeping tropical fish and saltwater fish can be expensive, but Southwest Reef Company works hard to keep their prices as reasonable as possible. The staff is friendly and the selection of fish, corals, and supplies is large and varied.

Arlington, VA

The Dog Park – Top Pick

The Dog Park Pet Store

What we like: The Dog Park is a great boutique-style store with many unique products and a friendly, helpful staff. They have homemade goodies, including puppy ice cream, and they’re very welcoming of pets.

Nature’s Nibbles – Best for Natural Food

What we like: Nature’s Nibbles is a small shop that specializes in natural pet food that benefits not only pets but also the planet. The staff is great at making recommendations based on your pet’s needs. They have two locations in Alexandria.

American Bird Company – Best for Birds

What we like: The staff at American Bird Company is top-notch, and they make it easy to choose and socialize your new baby bird. They will also adjust tags, clip nails, and perform other regular bird-related maintenance.

Atlanta, GA

Park Pet Supply – Top Pick

Park Pet Supply Pet Store

What we like: Park Pet Supply carries a wide range of supplies for all different types of pets, and their customer service is excellent. They offer health supplements, homeopathic remedies, natural foods, herbal shampoos, and many other safe products.

Inman Park Pet Works – Best for Unique Products

What we like: If you are looking for cool products for your pet, you’ll want to visit Inman Park Pet Works. This is a boutique pet store that includes a grooming salon and even an art gallery. There are a lot of high-quality items that you won’t want to miss.

Exotic Envy Reptiles – Best for Exotics

What we like: Exotic Envy Reptiles recently celebrated their one-year anniversary. They are known for having excellent customer service, clean and healthy animals, and lots of knowledge when it comes to keeping these exotic pets healthy.

Austin, TX

P & F Pet Provisions – Top Pick

p and f pet provisions pet store

What we like: The staff at P & F Pet Provisions are friendly, and they have a great selection of food, toys, and other pet products. One nice perk is their policy of accepting opened food if a pet doesn’t like it; local rescues pick up opened bags weekly, so it doesn’t go to waste.

Healthy Pet – Best for DIY Grooming

What we like: In addition to carrying a wide variety of pet products, Healthy Pet has a DIY dog wash center. You can go in with your dog and you’ll have everything you need to groom him yourself, from a grooming table and shampoo to after-bath treats.

Gallery of Pets – Best for Exotics

What we like: You’ll be able to find what you need for your dog, cat, fish, or small animals. The store also carries well-cared-for reptiles, particularly bearded dragons, leopard geckos, chameleons, and tortoises, along with the products you need for them.

Baltimore, MD

Howl – Top Pick

Howl pet store

What we like: Howl is a pet store carrying high-quality brands. The customer service is excellent and the staff is helpful when it comes to choosing products. There is also a DIY dog wash for bathing, and they’ve recently implemented a discount rewards program.

Mutt Mart – Best for Adoptions

What we like: Mutt Mart has relationships with local rescues and has dogs, cats, puppies, and/or kittens available on the weekends for adoption. They also collect gently used pet supplies to donate to pets in need. On top of that, you’ll find a wide selection and excellent customer service!

House of Tropicals – Best for Exotics

What we like: In addition to an impressive selection of fish and a small section of reptiles, House of Tropicals carries feeder rodents and insects for various meat-eating critters. The staff is helpful, and while it’s a small store, it’s also well-stocked and well-organized.

Boston, MA

The Fish and Bone – Top Pick

Fish and Bone Pet Store

What we like: The Fish and Bone makes shopping for pets in Boston fun and convenient. They offer free local delivery and excellent customer service. Add that to their large selection of high-quality pet supplies and you’ll understand why this shop made the top of our list.

PAWSH – Best for Stylish Pets

What we like: Not only does PAWSH carry everything needed to care for your pets but they also offer award-winning grooming services. The staff is friendly and helpful, and your dog will come out of the salon looking as posh (err, pawsh) as possible.

Jabberwock Reptiles – Best for Exotics

What we like: Jabberwock Reptiles is the place to go in the Boston area if you’re looking for a healthy, captive-bred reptile or amphibian. The animals are well taken care of and the employees are kind, helpful, and full of the information you need.

Charlotte, NC

Four Dogs Pet Supplies – Top Pick

Four Dogs Pet Store

What we like: Four Dogs Pet Supplies is a favorite among Charlotte residents. The staff is very knowledgeable and friendly, and they’ll give individualized nutritional advice. They are also happy to order any type of food that your dog needs even if they don’t carry it.

4 Paws Holistic – Best for Holistic Products

What we like: At 4 Paws Holistic, you can be assured that you’ll get only the highest quality of pet food and supplies. This store also offers dog training; you can set up a free consultation so they can help you help your dog become a well-behaved member of the family.

Cold Blooded & Bizarre – Best for Exotics

What we like: The owners and staff at Cold Blooded & Bizarre have made it their mission to educate locals about the various types of reptiles available. If you need a reptile, supplies, or just some comprehensive information, stop in!

Chicago, IL

Liz’s Pet Shop – Top Pick

Liz's Pet Shop

What we like: Liz’s Pet Shop has a bit of everything: a helpful, knowledgeable staff; a focus on healthy and holistic foods; and the ability to order online 24 hour per day and pick up your items in the store or at curbside. They also have nutritional counseling available.

Wigglyville Pet Boutique – Best Sustainable

What we like: At Wigglyville, sustainability is of the utmost importance. They focus on products that will encourage a positive lifestyle for your pets. From the most nutritious foods to eco-friendly toys that are built to last, you can feel confident in your Wigglyville purchase.

Curious Creatures LLC – Best for Exotics

What we like: Alison and Andy are the founders and owners of Curious Creatures, and they have centered their business around helping pet lizards and other exotics in Chicago enjoy their lives to the fullest. They offer not only reptile products but also the knowledge you’ll need to successfully raise these creatures.

Colorado Springs, CO

Mike’s Natural Pet Market – Top Pick

Mike's Natural Pet Market

What we like: Mike’s Natural Pet Market carries a range of natural, holistic, and organic foods, treats, and supplements for your  pets. They also have toys, all types of pet gear, and even CBD products.

Wag N Wash – Best for Grooming

What we like: Do you want to get your dog clean and fresh while shopping for supplies? If so, Wag N Wash is the place to be. You can use their self-serve dog wash or make an appointment for grooming; pick up your pet’s toys and other gear at the same time.

Exotic Bird Shop – Best for Birds

What we like: Exotic Bird Shop has a variety of hand-fed baby birds that are properly socialized, in good health, and ready to go to their new homes! The knowledgeable staff is able to answer questions and they have everything you need for your new bird.

Columbus, OH

Mutts & Co. – Top Pick

Mutts & Co Pet Store

What we like: Mark, the owner of Mutts & Co. is very friendly and knowledgeable and does his best to help pet-owners with whatever they need to keep their pets happy and healthy. The store is also very clean and well-organized.

Fangs & Fur – Best for Raw Food

What we like: Fangs & Fur prides itself on carrying only the best, whether that’s raw food, supplements, or pet gear. Their shop is clean, uncluttered, and stress-free, and they welcome you and your pet to stop in and enjoy a seamless shopping experience.

Moochie & Co. – Best for Stylish Pets

What we like: If you want the best dressed or accessorized pet on the block, then you’ll want to check out Moochie & Co. This store caters to pets who have a sense of style, and they carry leashes, bow ties, jackets, collars, sweaters, shirts, and so much more.

Dallas, TX

Uptown Pup – Top Pick

uptown pup pet store

What we like: Customers describe Uptown Pup as a beautiful store, and it’s also chock-full of products, including those that are natural and good for your pet’s health. The staff is engaging and friendly, too, and is always happy to help.

Odyssey Pets – Most Knowledgeable

What we like: The staff at Odyssey Pets are knowledgeable and happy to share their best tips and advice. The store carries a wide range of products for dogs, cats, fish, birds, and more. According to Odyssey Pet’s owner, Sherry Redwine, the store doesn’t carry anything with corn, gluten, or by-products. “We encourage our clients to feed a species appropriate diet like raw food and… it needs to be the highest grade that someone can afford for their budget.” The store also offers grooming services.

DFW Reptarium – Best for Exotics

What we like: DFW Reptarium is the place to go if you want to see and purchase reptiles and amphibians of all types. They also carry feeder insects and mice for the animals they sell. The staff is friendly and knows a lot about these creatures.

Denver, CO

Luke & Company Fine Pet Supply – Top Pick

Luke and Company Pet Store

What we like: If you’re looking for safe and healthy toys, food, and treats for your pet, look no further than Luke & Company Fine Pet Supply. They’re picky about what they sell, and they also offer grooming services, a DIY dog-wash, and low-cost delivery of anything on their shelves.

Two Pals and a Pup – Best for Baked Treats

What we like: While you won’t find typical kibble or non-dusty cat litter at Two Pals and a Pup, you will find a plethora of delicious baked goods that will delight your pup whether it’s for a birthday or an everyday treat. They also carry adorable apparel and fun toys for your four-legged friends.

Exotic Birds of Denver – Best for Birds

What we like: Whether you want information about birds or you are ready to take the plunge and add a feathered friend to your family, Exotic Birds of Denver is the shop you need to visit. They allow their birds to self-wean and they only clip wings once the birds are fully fledged, so these birds are well-adjusted and healthy from the start.

Detroit, MI

City Bark – Top Pick

City Bark Pet Store

What we like: City Bark is a small pet store with a good variety of high-end products for your pets. The staff is friendly and helpful, and they can order items that they don’t have in stock. Several customers commented on the resident bird, Cleo, who is an important part of the staff, too.

3 Dogs 1 Cat – Best for Stylish Pets

What we like: 3 Dogs 1 Cat is an urban pet shop for the stylish cats and dogs. They carry items like neckties, collars, bandanas, and spiffy leashes. In addition, they have cat towers, dog toys, and even items for owners to use, such as a sling to wear a small dog. This is a fun boutique to check out.

Lou’s Petshop – Best for Exotics

What we like: Lou’s Petshop is home to birds, reptiles, fish, amphibians, and even spiders. They breed these animals themselves or get them from local breeders, and they’re able to get species that are not commonly found at pet stores.

El Paso, TX

Happy Tails – Top Pick

Happy Tails Pet Store

What we like: You can visit Happy Tails to choose your products for your pet, or you can sign up for their delivery services. In addition to healthy treats, fun toys, and comfortable pet beds, they also offer pet subscription boxes that are sure to delight.

Fino’s Rainforest – Best for Exotics

What we like: Chameleons and geckos and frogs, oh my! Fino’s Rainforest is stocked with all of the exotics you might be looking for. The staff is knowledgeable about all of the critters they sell, and the store is clean and well-organized.

Reef City & More – Best for Fish

What we like: Great customer services and a wide variety of freshwater, saltwater, and pond fish and accessories put Reef City & More at the top of our list of fish stores in El Paso. The owner, Miguel, is very helpful and friendly and is happy to assist with information and knowledge.

Fort Worth, TX

Russell Feed & Supply – Top Pick

Russell Feed Supply Pet Store

What we like: Russell Feed & Supply is a family-owned business with eight locations around northern Texas. They carry feed and supplies for all types of animals, from dogs and cats to livestock. You’ll be able to find high-quality brands here that the big-box stores don’t carry.

Handley Feed Store – Best for Farm Animals

What we like: If you have a farm, you won’t want to pass up the opportunity to visit Handley Feed Store. Their feed and products are of the best quality, and in addition to livestock supplies, they also carry items for dogs and wild birds.

The Fish Place – Best for Fish

What we like: For over 45 years, The Fish Place has been serving Texans who keep fish as pets. They offer hundreds of species, tank deliver and setup services, maintenance, custom tanks, and a wealth of knowledge to share with their customers.

Fresno, CA

Whitie’s Pets – Top Pick

Whitie's Pet Store

What we like: If you go to Whitie’s Pets, you’re sure to notice the ample supply of products for all types of pets, the cleanliness, and, most of all, the knowledgeable and caring staff. Several reviewers mentioned the fair prices, too.

Kelley’s Pets – Most Helpful Staff

What we like: The staff at Kelley’s Pets is very helpful and will assist customers in finding anything they need. In addition to carrying a good supply of food, treats, toys, and gear, they also host vaccination clinics to keep pets healthy at a low cost.

Regal Reptiles – Best for Exotics

What we like: Regal Reptiles has a great selection of reptiles and amphibians, and they’re sold at fair prices. In addition, they have the information you need to care for your new pet properly. They also carry feeder insects.

Houston, TX

The Pet Stop – Top Pick

The Pet Shop Pet Store

What we like: The owner of The Pet Stop, Angella, focuses on natural foods and high-quality products. She loves trying the newest and best products, so there are always new options to discover. She is also happy to put in special orders for customers who are looking for something they don’t have in stock.

Funny Fur – Best for Stylish Pets

What we like: Funny Fur specializes in the hottest styles for dogs (and a few for cats, too). They carry a wide variety of apparel and accessories, including carrier bags, dog backpacks, harnesses for dogs that escape and personalized leashes and collars. You can also find organic toys, grooming needs, and dog beds.

S & S Exotic Animals – Best for Exotics

What we like: S & S Exotics breeds and sells their own reptiles, birds, and small mammals like ferrets and hedgehogs. They also offer a lot of  help to their customers; if you have questions about your exotic pets, you’re welcome to contact them in person, by phone, or by email.

Indianapolis, IL

Speck’s Pet – Top Pick

Speck's Pet Store

What we like: Speck’s Pet is everything you’d want in a pet store, from a good selection of supplies to knowledgeable and friendly staff. They also partner with a local kitty rescue organization and often have cats available for adoption.

Bow Wow Meow Boutique – Best for Grooming

What we like: Bow Wow Meow Boutique is a pet store with natural and ecologically friendly treats, toys, and other items. They are also a full-service grooming facility, so take your pooch or kitty to be spiffed up while you enjoy the shopping selection.

CC’s Exotic Pets – Best for Exotics

What we like: CC’s Exotic Pets carries a variety of exotic reptiles, birds, and mammals, but their specialty is hedgehogs. They have them in many different colors and they offer a complete kit so you’ll have everything your new critter needs for a long and happy life.

Jacksonville, FL

Pet Creations – Top Pick

pet creations pet store

What we like: Pet Creations has a lot of different products for all types of animals, including fish. The owner, Kim, and the staff are knowledgeable and always willing to help. Several customers also commented on the low prices, as well.

Earth Pets – Best for Natural Foods

What we like: Earth Pets is a locally owned store that also has a location in Gainesville. They have food and supplies for dogs, cats, and small mammals, and they also offer nutritional counseling to help pet owners make the best choices for their pets’ diets.

Fish Galore Critters & More – Best for Fish

What we like: Fish Galore Critters & More carries not only lots of fish but also small mammals and supplies for various types of pets. The critters are all well cared for, and James, the owner, is very knowledgeable about the animals he sells.

Kansas City, MO

Tail Waggin’ Pet Stop – Top Pick

Tail Waggin Pet Store

What we like: Tail Waggin’ Pet Shop is a big place to take your pet to explore. They carry all different types of pet products, including some unique brands you won’t find in the big-box stores. Their customer service is top-notch, too.

Pet-Topia – Best for Fish

What we like: Whether you have (or want) freshwater or saltwater fish, Pet-Topia is the place to visit in Kansas City. The staff is extremely helpful and will help you get your tank started and also troubleshoot any issues that come up.

Miles of Exotics – Best for Exotics

What we like: You can get a variety of small animals such as fish, reptiles, amphibians, and small mammals here, along with feeders. Miles of Exotics also partners with local rescues and sometimes has kittens for adoption, as well.

Las Vegas, NV

Healthy Tails – Top Pick

Healthy Tails Pet Store

What we like: The great customer service and knowledgeable staff combine with the desire to focus on safe, environmentally friendly, and nutrition-packed supplies and products for your pet. Healthy Tails is a well-organized and clean place to bring your pets and make your purchases.

Dog Supplies Outlet – Best for Low Prices

What we like: Dog Supplies Outlet is an independently owned store with several locations in the Las Vegas area. The products are priced fairly, and their rewards program applies to each location, so you can take your savings with you to the different stores.

LLL Reptile – Best for Exotics

What we like: LLL Reptile has a few locations in Nevada and California. The one in Las Vegas is known for being helpful and their animals are well taken care of. You can actually order online and have reptiles or supplies shipped to your home, too.

Long Beach, CA

Centinela Feed & Pet Supplies – Top Pick

Centinela Pet Store

What we like: If you’re looking for a pet store to find all of the supplies you’ll need for your pet, you’ll want to check out Centinela Feed & Pet Supplies. They carry food, treats, and all types of gear. They also have a dog wash station for mess-free baths.

Animalia – Best for Grooming

What we like: At Animalia, your dog can be groomed by a pro while you shop for various supplies for your pets. There’s also the DIY dog wash option, which allows you to walk in and use their supplies to brush, wash, and dry your pup with no appointment needed.

Paramount Reptiles – Best for Exotics

What we like: The owners of Paramount Reptiles, Jesse and Holly, go above and beyond to welcome other reptile enthusiasts to come in and check out their collection. Their animals are well cared for, and they also carry the supplies you’ll need to keep your new critter happy and healthy.

Los Angeles, CA

Healthy Spot – Top Pick

Healthy Spot Pet Store

What we like: Healthy Spot has several locations in the L.A. area, and each store is staffed with knowledgeable employees. They offer online and phone-in ordering; you can pick up your items at curbside if you don’t want to go in. They also have a variety of services like grooming and dental care available in-house.

Pet Project LA – Best for Stylish Pets

What we like: Pet Project LA’s got it all, from food and toys to amazingly stylish looks for your pet. Leashes, hats, shirts, and other apparel are available to suit any style. And don’t worry: You’re covered, too, with plenty of human accessories, including masks, scrunchies, and buttons.

Exotic Life Fish & Reptiles – Best for Exotics

What we like: The staff at Exotic Life are friendly and knowledgeable about their reptiles and fish, and they happily share their know-how with their customers. Several reviewers mentioned that they are very patient with answering questions and helping people find the right pet for them.

Louisville, KY

Pet Wants on the Avenue – Top Pick

Pet Wants on the Avenue Pet Store

What we like: Pet Wants on the Avenue has a great supply of food, treats, toys, and more for dogs and cats. Their staff is friendly and helpful, and the store is kept clean. They also have a food delivery service.

Poe’s Pet Depot – Best for Grooming

What we like: Poe’s Pet Depot has a great selection of food and other products for your pets, and they also offer full grooming services. They can handle bathing and grooming dogs and also will clip kitty nails for those who need it.

Sandy’s Pet Shop – Best for Exotics

What we like: Sandy’s Pet Shop carries exotics, birds, and small mammals. Their pets are kept in large, clean cages, and they are healthy and well-cared-for. You can also get lots of information about the different types of animals available.

Memphis, TN

Woof Gang Bakery and Grooming – Top Pick

Woof Gang Bakery Pet Store

What we like: Woof Gang Bakery and Grooming has it all: high quality pet food, treats and toys, and an excellent grooming service. The owner and staff are knowledgeable and will work with you to help you find the right products for your pet.

Raleigh Feed Store – Best for Farm Animals

What we like: Having been serving the Memphis area for over 50 years, Raleigh Feed Store is the place to go if you need feed, pharmaceuticals, bridles, and other supplies for your livestock. They also carry supplies for dogs.

Main Drain Aquatics – Best for Fish

What we like: Main Drain Aquatics is a small store with a nice selection of both freshwater and saltwater fish. The staff is friendly and knowledgeable, too. In addition, they can service your pond, so if yours needs cleaning or you’d like a waterfall, give them a call.

Mesa, AZ

Pratt’s Pets  – Top Pick

Pratt's Pets

What we like: No matter what kind of pet you have, you’ll be able to find feed and other supplies for it at Pratt’s Pets. The customer service is excellent, and most reviewers say that the prices are fair. Check them out!

Bark Avenue Pets – Most Knowledgeable

What we like: The staff at Bark Avenue Pets are all animal lovers who know a lot about care and nutrition, and they are happy to share their knowledge and tips with their customers. The store also offers training classes, grooming, and doggie day care at their attached pet resort.

Wildside Pets – Best for Exotics

What we like: You’ll be able to find birds, fish, and reptiles at Wildside Pets. They also carry feeder insects to keep your hungry pets satisfied. The staff is helpful and friendly and will be able to answer your questions about the animals they carry.

Miami, FL

Animal Crackers Miami – Top Pick

Animal Crackers Pet Store

What we like: Animal Crackers carries a variety of products that are designed to keep your pet healthy. Their customer service is excellent and they go above and beyond for their customers. They also offer grooming.

The Dog Bar – Best for Grooming

What we like: The Dog Bar is a boutique-style store that carries a variety of food and gear for your pets. They also have a grooming spa, including anesthesia-free dental care, as well as a dog-training class. You can get almost all of your pet-related needs taken care of here.

Exotic Aquariums – Best for Fish

What we like: If you are looking for a custom-build aquarium, saltwater or freshwater fish, or even a koi pond, Exotic Aquariums is the shop you need to check out. The staff is friendly and knowledgeable, so they’ll be able to help you find what you need.

Milwaukee, WI

Skilos – Top Pick

Skilos Pet Store

What we like: Between excellent customer service, a wide variety of products, and good prices, Skilos made the very top of our list among the best pet stores in Milwaukee. The staff is knowledgeable and will order items that they don’t have in stock.

Bark N Scratch Outpost – Best for Raw Food

What we like: If you are looking for organic, holistic, natural, or raw food and treats for your pet, look no further than the Bark N Scratch Outpost. This small store is served by friendly staff who are knowledgeable about the products they carry and passionate about nutrition.

Marineland Pets – Best for Fish

What we like: Tom, the owner, is helpful and knowledgeable about the different fish that he sells. The staff will also help you if you need advice in setting up your tank. In addition to fish, they also carry some exotics and small mammals.

Minneapolis, MN

Urban Tails Pet Supply – Top Pick

Urban Tails Pet Shop

What we like: The high-quality food and products at Urban Tails Pet Supply is enough to get you in the door, but the friendly and highly knowledgeable staff is a reason to keep going back. They carry raw and holistic food and can advise you on the best ones.

Copilot Dog Outfitters – Best for Stylish Pets

What we like: Copilot Dog Outfitters provides Minneapolis pups with stylish accessories, including outdoor gear for the harsh winters. They carry the best brands, and they also have treats, supplements, and other trinkets for your pets.

Twin Cities Reptiles – Best for Exotics

What we like: Reasonable prices and a large variety of reptiles and reptile accessories are what put Twin Cities Reptiles at the top of our list. The staff is experienced and knowledgeable and they’re happy to share lots of information with their customers.

Nashville, TN

Nashville Pet Products – Top Pick

Nashville Pet Products Pet Store

What we like: Nashville Pet Products has a few locations in the Nashville area. It’s a well-stocked store with friendly staff; customers rave about the amazing customer service. They also have several resident kitties who roam and lounge around the store and greet guests.

Wags and Whiskers – Best for DIY Grooming

What we like: If you are looking for a one-stop pet shop that will also let you wash your dog while you’re there, then Wags and Whiskers is the place to be. You’ll find lots of holistic, healthy products for your pets and they have everything you need to get your dog squeaky clean.

Emerald Bay Fish & Reptiles – Best for Exotics

What we like: Shawn, the owner at Emerald Bay Fish & Reptiles, is friendly and knowledgeable. The store carries a large selection of saltwater fish and supplies; it also has reptiles. If there’s something you want, they can probably get it for you.

New Orleans, LA

Southern Paws – Top Pick

Southern Paws Pet Store

What we like: You’ll find lots of cool and unique items at Southern Paws. This is a boutique-style store with a substantial variety of items for small dogs; they have fewer items for larger dogs and cats, but still some good products to consider.

Jefferson Feed – Best for Natural Food

What we like: Whether you’re feeding dogs, chickens, or some other type of animal, you’ll find the high-quality food you need at Jefferson Feed. The customer service is excellent, and the staff is friendly and well-informed.

50 Fathoms Pet Shop – Best for Exotics

What we like: Reptiles, amphibians, and fish are the stars of the show at 50 Fathoms Pet Shop. The employees are extremely knowledgeable and willing to spend a lot of time helping customers pick out and learn about their perfect pet.

New York, NY

Petropolis – Top Pick

petropolis pet store

What we like: This small store in the financial district has a wide selection of products and it’s kept very clean and organized. It’s also very easy to place order and re-orders from Petropolis; one customer even said that they sent his order to his house via cab because he was unable to make it to the store.

Love Thy Pet – Best Customer Service

What we like: If you’re looking for helpful employees, you’ll want to check out Love Thy Pet in Brooklyn. They stock a lot of products, but if you need something they don’t carry, they’ll do their best to get it for you.

Nature’s Reef & Reptile – Best for Exotics

What we like: Nature’s Reef & Reptile is the place to go if you need supplies for your reptiles, corals, fish, and more. They also carry food, toys, and other products for cats and dogs. Reviewers find the employees to be helpful and knowledgeable.

Oakland, CA

Pet Club – Top Pick

Pet Club Pet Store

What we like: Pet Club is family-owned, and they have 11 stores all around the Bay area. The one in Oakland is clean and well-stocked with a variety of items for all different types of pets. They carry some lizards and other exotics, too.

Alameda See Spot Run – Best for Holistic Pet Supplies

What we like: Alameda See Spot Run is an excellent source for holistic pet supplies for not only dogs and cats but also birds, chickens, guinea pigs, and more. They offer free local delivery and they also have grooming services.

Bay Bridge Aquarium – Best for Fish

What we like: For the biggest variety of both common and rare fish in the Bay area, you’ll want to go to the Bay Bridge Aquarium. All fish are medicated and quarantined, so you will know that you’re bringing a healthy, disease-free creature into your aquarium.

Oklahoma City, OK

A1 Pet Emporium – Top Pick

A1 Pet Emporium Pet Store

What we like: A1 Pet Emporium has two missions: The first is to educate customers about good nutrition for their pets. The second is to help local rescue organizations find homes for their rescued pets. The friendly and helpful staff is committed to both of these.

EarthWise Pet – Best for Grooming

What we like: EarthWise Pet is a grooming salon with a well-stocked pet store attached. You’ll be able to find high-quality food and products for your cat or dog. They also have a DIY dog wash station for those who want to give their dog a bath without the mess at home.

Rudy’s Pet Shop & Feed Store – Best for Birds

What we like: Whether you have birds or you want a bird, you’ll want to stop into Rudy’s Pet Shop & Feed Store. You’ll be able to see the various birds available and the staff will help you pick out exactly the right pet for your circumstances.

Omaha, NE

The Green Spot – Top Pick

The Green Spot Pet Store

What we like: The Green Spot is a full-service pet store, but it’s also much more. They have a spa and a bakery, so your pet can get salon services as well as a savory treat. They also have a dog wash available for DIY baths.

Long Dog Fat Cat – Best for Natural Food

What we like: Long Dog Fat Cat has four locations in Omaha, and it caters to pets whose owners want them on a natural, raw, or organic diet. In addition to regular food, they also offer treats, including those from their in-house bakery.

Fish Freaks – Best for Fish

What we like: Whether you prefer a freshwater or saltwater tank, you will find everything you need for a colorful, roomy aquarium at Fish Freaks. The staff will take the time to talk to you about what you need to know to succeed with your fish-keeping.

Philadelphia, PA

Rittenhouse Pet Supply – Top Pick

Rittenhouse Pet Store

What we like: The owners of Rittenhouse Pet Supply are super friendly and helpful, and they’re always willing to order any items that they don’t have in stock. Monty, the shop cat, is also friendly. If you’re looking for a kitten, they sometimes have them for adoption, too.

Fairmount Pet Shoppe – Best for Adoptions

What we like: At Fairmount Pet Shoppe, cats are always available for adoption. These kitties come from local rescues. As a bonus, if you adopt a cat, you’ll get 15 percent off of your next order, which can make stocking up on supplies for your new pet a bit easier on your wallet.

Monster Pets – Best for Fish

What we like: Monster Pets has products for cats, dogs, and other pets, but their main specialty is their amazing fish section. You can get everything from goldfish to beautiful exotics, and they have all of the supplies you’ll need to keep your fish happy and healthy.

Phoenix, AZ

Noble Beast Pets – Top Pick

Noble Beast Pet Store

What we like: Noble Beast Pets is a large pet shop that has a wide variety of products for all different pets. The prices are reasonable and the owners and staff are friendly. Visitors have also mentioned that it is clean and quite organized.

Gordon’s Feed – Best for Farm Animals

What we like: Gordon’s Feed is perfect for people who have chickens, want chickens, or need supplies for their pets. They do carry items for dogs, cats, and other common household pets, but they also have various breeds of chickens and supplies for them, too.

Custom Creatures Pet Shop – Best for Exotics

What we like: In addition to getting supplies for your furry and feathered pets, you’ll also find a wide array of exotics to choose from. The staff can answer a lot of questions about various reptiles, and they have the supplies you’ll need, too.

Portland, OR

Pet Loft – Top Pick

Pet Loft Pet Store

What we like: Pet Loft is a great full-service pet store and they carry a lot of organic, natural products. They focus on locally manufactured pet supplies and they also partner with local rescue to help find families for homeless cats and dogs.

Western Pet Supply – Best for Raw and Natural Foods

What we like: If you’re looking for high-quality, natural, or raw foods for your pets, you’ll want to c heck out Western Pet Supply. They carry products not only for cats and dogs but also small mammals, reptiles, pet birds, chickens, fish, and more.

Tropical Hut – Best for Exotics

What we like: Tropical Hut carries a variety of amphibians, reptiles, and some tarantulas. The staff is very friendly and informative, and they’ll walk you through the process of choosing your ideal exotic pet as well as picking out the supplies you’ll need.

Raleigh, NC

Phydeaux – Top Pick

Phydeaux Pet Store

What we like: The owners of Phydeaux also have two other stores in the Triangle area. This is a large pet shop with a lot of variety, and the customer service is very good. They also partner with rescues to host adoptions.

Unleashed Mutt – Most Knowledgeable

What we like: The staff at Unleashed Mutt goes through many hours of training so they are well-equipped to advise pet owners on health and general wellness. You can even set up personal consultations if you need more help!

The Fish Room – Best for Fish

What we like: The Fish Room has everything you need if you keep fish. They have fish and supplies for both freshwater and saltwater tanks, and they also carry coral and can provide maintenance services. The staff is friendly and helpful, too.

Sacramento, CA

Incredible Pets – Top Pick

Incredible Pet Store

What we like: Incredible Pets is a pet store with three locations in the Sacramento area, so there’s probably one that is convenient to get to. The staff is friendly, the small animals are well taken care of, and they host pet vaccine clinics for convenient, low-cost care.

Western Feed & Pet Supply – Best for Pet Food

What we like: While Western Feed & Pet Supply has a variety of pet products available, their specialty is healthy, high-quality feed for different types of animals. They carry some brands you won’t find in the big box stores.

GX3 Reptiles and Exotic Pets – Best for Exotics

What we like: Grant, the owner of GX3 Reptiles and Exotic Pets, is known for being honest and experienced with various types of exotic pets. The reptiles are healthy and priced fairly, and the staff is knowledgeable and helpful.

San Antonio, TX

Mike’s Dog Store – Top Pick

Mike's Dog Store

What we like: You and your dog will both love Mike’s Dog Store. The resident shop dog, Trixie, will greet you both exuberantly, and your pooch might even get a complimentary treat just for visiting. They carry a lot of different products and the staff is friendly and knowledgeable.

Pet’s Barn – Best Prices

What we like: Pet’s Barn is a pet store that has several locations around the San Antonio area. It is known for having good prices, making pet ownership a bit more affordable. You can also take your pet to get his vaccinations; call ahead to confirm the hours of the vaccine clinics.

Southside Aquatics – Best for Exotics

What we like: Customers visiting Southside Aquatics for fish, reptiles, and small mammals have said that the store is very clean and smells good. The staff is also helpful and can advise customers on proper pet care, feeding, and more.

San Diego, CA

Earthwise Pet – Top Pick

Earthwise Pet

What we like: You’ll be able to find what you are looking for at Earthwise Pet, which carries many products and has a well-trained, knowledgeable staff. They also help out with animal adoptions and they have a doggie day care service that pup-owners love.

Howlistic – Best Natural

What we like: Howlistic has a variety of natural and organic foods for your dog or cat. The staff can help advise you on what might be best for your pet’s health. They also offer a grooming service that customers describe as good and fairly priced.

Doggie Style Pets – Best for Helping Pets

What we like: Located in Little Italy, Doggie Style Pets has everything you need to make sure your pets are well-fed and look great. What makes them stand out, however, is their commitment to rescuing animals and providing vet care to homeless pets. You can read more about their mission here.

San Francisco, CA

Village Pets and Supplies – Top Pick

village pets pet store

What we like: Village Pets and Supplies has it all when it comes to pet supplies. In addition to products for dogs, cats, small animals, and fish, they also offer a do-it-yourself dog wash station and an anesthesia-free teeth-cleaning service.

Bow Wow Meow – Best for Grooming

What we like: Bow Wow Meow carries a large variety of supplies and products for all types of pets. They also have a grooming service that’s open seven days a week, which is invaluable when pet parents work Monday through Friday!

East Bay Vivarium – Best for Exotics

What we like: East Bay Vivarium is the oldest and largest reptile store in the nation and has been in the Bay area since 1970. They offer boarding services for reptiles, which is a service that’s hard to find. They also attend reptile expos with their stock.

San Jose, CA

An-Jan Feed & Pet Supply – Top Pick

an-jan pet store

What we like: An-Jan Feed & Pet Supply is always well-stocked and has a great variety of supplies for all types of pets. The staff is also friendly and knowledgeable. As an added bonus, they have community veterinary days for people to have their pets vaccinated.

Sam’s Downtown Feed – Best for Farm Animals

What we like: This farm supply store has been in business for over 30 years and providing exceptional customer service along the way. They carry mainly feed for all types of animals, but they also stock a wide variety of products for companion animals as well as livestock.

Louis Birds Pets & Supplies – Best for Birds

What we like: Louis is the owner of this store, and he knows his stuff when it comes to birds. He sells top-quality birds and also helps owners with basic care like clipping wings and trimming nails. In addition, he carries a lot of products for feathered pets.

Seattle, WA

Wally Pets – Top Pick

Wally Pets Pet Store

What we like: Locals describe Wally Pets as clean, reasonably priced, and, most importantly, chock full of knowledgeable and helpful staff. They can advise you on how to best care for your pet and they have the supplies you need to keep them happy and healthy.

Mud Bay Pet Supplies – Most Knowledgeable

What we like: If you’re looking for advice on how to care for your pet, the employees at Mud Bay Pet Supplies have it. They caution that they’re not veterinarians, but they’re well-read and there is also a lot of information on their website. They even provide information packs to animals who are being adopted from local shelters.

Sierra Fish and Pets – Best for Fish

What we like: Sierra Fish and Pets carries supplies for all type of pets but they specialize in freshwater and saltwater aquariums. In fact, they got their start as solely a fish store and branched out from there. You’ll love the selection!

Tucson, AZ

Desert Pet – Top Pick

Desert Pet Store

What we like: Desert Pet is a clean, well-organized store with friendly staff and a great selection of products. They also carry small animals like fish and some reptiles, and they often have kitties for adoption. Their prices are fair and reasonable, too.

Arizona Feeds – Best for Farm Animals

What we like: You’ll be able to find feed and supplements for any kind of pet at Arizona Feeds. They also carry some farm supplies and hay bales. The staff is friendly and they have a lot of different products in stock.

Tropical Kingdom – Best for Exotics

What we like: Whether you’re shopping for a lizard, snake, tortoise, small mammal, or fish, Tropical Kingdom has the animals and the supplies you’ll need. Their staff is friendly and knowledgeable about various issues affecting these pets, too.

Tulsa, OK

Dog Dish – Top Pick

Dog Dish Pet Store

What we like: Dog Dish is a great resource for dog food, toys, treats, and various products. The owner, Emily, is helpful, as is the rest of the staff. They carry high-quality brands and will help customers find what will work best for their dogs.

Southern Agriculture – Best for Farm Animals

What we like: In addition to carrying a lot of items for dogs, cats, and small animals, Southern Agriculture also has products for livestock, poultry, horses, and even beekeepers. The staff is friendly, and they have a wide selection.

Grant Family Exotics and Reptiles – Best for Exotics

What we like: Grant Family Exotics and Reptiles has fair prices and a knowledgeable staff. They carry various types of reptiles and other exotics, along with the products you will need to keep them well-cared-for.

Virginia Beach, VA

Care-a-Lot Pet Supply – Top Pick

Care a Lot Pet Store

What we like: Care-a-Lot Pet Supply has all of the products you need for your pets, but even more importantly, they give back to disadvantaged animals. They are partnered with rescues for adoption events and also have their own charitable foundation.

Doggstuff – Best for Natural Foods

What we like: This family-owned company takes pride in providing local pets with natural, healthy food and other supplies. Doggstuff is staffed with knowledgeable people who will help you choose the right diet for your furry family member.

Pet Paradise – Best for Exotics

What we like: You’ll be able to find healthy, well-cared-for reptiles at Pet Paradise. The animals are in clean tanks, and the staff is well-versed on how to take care of them, so if you’re looking for a snake or lizard, be sure to stop in.

Washington, DC

Howl to the Chief – Top Pick

Howl to the Chief Pet Store

What we like: The staff at Howl to the Chief are knowledgeable and can tell you about the ethics of the various products they carry. This is a clean, spacious store with plenty of room, and they carry high-quality brands for both pets and people.

The Big Bad Woof – Best for Raw and Organic Pet Food

What we like: Everything that The Big Bad Woof carries is sustainable, local, or otherwise ethically procured. They go out of their way to ensure that the foods they stock for their customers support local business and support your pet’s health.

Tropical Lagoon Aquarium – Best for Fish

What we like: Tropical Lagoon Aquarium has a great selection of tropical fish. Their staff is friendly and knowledgeable, so you’ll be able to get the information you need to make your choices, and their prices are reasonable, making your new hobby affordable.

Wichita, KS

PawPrints Pet Supply – Top Pick

Paw Prints Pet Supply

What we like: Along with the typical pet supplies that you’d find at any pet store, PawPrints Pet Supply also carries a nice variety of homemade treats. They also have a DIY dog wash, so you can leave the mess at the store when you give your dog a bath.

Feline Groovy – Best for Cats

What we like: If you have a pampered kitty, you will want to check out Feline Groovy. They focus on supplying Wichita-area cats with local, sustainable foods and high-quality treats and toys. The staff is very knowledgeable and helpful.

Birds of Paradise – Best for Birds

What we like: When you purchase a bird from Birds of Paradise, there is a system in place to ensure that you get the bird that is right for you. You can visit your bird several times before bringing him home, allowing for excellent socialization.

If you live outside these metro areas, we urge you to use the veterinarians’ tips above to help you narrow down the choices available in your city or town. Once you find a great pet supply store near you, you’ll feel more comfortable with your pet-related purchases and will have someone to go to if you have non-urgent questions about pet care. We wish you well on your search!

If you’re interested in pet stores, you probably have a strong interest in dogs. If you’re a dog owner, we have a load of resources that can help you keep your pet healthy and happy.

One set of guides is our collection of buying guides which can help you find a great waterproof dog bed, an outdoor dog bed, an elevated dog bed, or a dog bed for the couch.

Beyond that, if you’re looking for additional resources to help keep your puppy healthy and looking good we also have a series of buying guides to help you select the best dog ear cleaner, the best professional dog clippers, the best dog clippers for poodle hair, and our guide to finding the best Australian Shepherd dog brushes.

]]>
Six Steps to Train Your Dog to Use a Treadmill https://petnewsdaily.com/train-your-dog-to-use-a-treadmill/ Wed, 21 Dec 2022 01:15:39 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=50 Training your dog to use a treadmill is an excellent way to ensure daily exercise for your dog, even when your regular outdoor walks aren’t an option. This post will describe the six key steps to train your dog to use a treadmill.

There are many benefits of exercise for dogs. Adequate exercise is one of the main factors in determining the health and longevity of our canine companions (our guide can help you answer the question how much exercise does a dog need?). It’s also true that getting your pup their daily exercise isn’t always an easy task. Time constraints, weather, and inadequate space are all issues that we’re up against, so sometimes you need to get creative to ensure your dog is getting enough daily exercise. Enter the world of treadmills for dogs.

Benefits of Using a Treadmill for Your Dog

Treadmills offer many benefits when it comes to getting your pup the exercise that they need. First, you won’t have to monitor the weather. If the snow is over your pup’s head, the rain is coming down in sheets, or the pavement is paw-toasting hot, your dog won’t have to go outside in those conditions.

Another benefit is that you no longer need to go out after dark. Worried about safety issues surrounding early morning or late-night walks? Not with a doggie treadmill. Your pup can get their exercise from the comfort and safety of your own home.

Finally, your dog will get their exercise even if you can’t. Whether you’re in the middle of cooking dinner, your video conference is lasting longer than you’d like, or your knee is bothering you from last weekend’s hike, your pup can still stretch their legs. Some dogs may also be looking for a more intense workout than what we can provide for them. A treadmill is a great way to allow your dog to run or walk at a speed and incline that you might not be able to handle yourself.

General Guidelines for Training Your Dog to Use a Treadmill

Person training dog to use a treadmill

Before we get into how to train your dog to use a treadmill, there are a few guidelines to go over.

  • Never leave your dog unsupervised. Treadmills aren’t a babysitter. You need to be around to ensure that your pup isn’t getting overworked or to intervene if he gets a toenail stuck or falls off and gets hurt.
  • Take it slow. Treadmills can be scary for dogs! Think about it. What dog would be okay with a noisy, moving floor right away? Make sure your pup is completely comfortable with the treadmill before you plan for daily workouts, and be sure to get them off of it promptly if they show any signs of apprehension or uneasiness.
  • Wait until your puppy is done growing (there are plenty of other items that can help make use of that puppy energy on our new puppy shopping checklist in the meantime).1This will help ensure that they are coordinated enough to use a treadmill safely. For small breeds that means 10-12 months. Medium breeds continue to grow until 12-15 months, large breeds until around 18 months, and giant breeds up to two years old. Our puppy to dog growth calculator helps with predicting dog size.
  • Make sure you have the proper treadmill. Be sure that you have an appropriately sized treadmill for your pup. It should go a speed that is suitable and safe. It should also not be so noisy that it scares the neighbor’s dog.

Six Steps to Train Your Dog to Use a Treadmill

Don’t expect your dog to jump on a treadmill and run with it straight out of the box. Rather, taking a step-by-step approach is the best way to train your dog to use a treadmill.

1. Let your pup get used to the treadmill.

Allow your dog to sniff the treadmill, get on it, and explore it without being expected to walk or run. Let them get completely comfortable with having it around and reward them with praise or treats when they get on it without apprehension.

If your pup simply isn’t interested in the treadmill, start by having them step onto it. Give them some basic commands like sit or stay and reward when they do it. This is all done with the power off.

2. Now, turn the power on.

Go through the previous step with the power on. Let your dog get used to the sound and watch the movement. Don’t ask your pup to get on a moving treadmill but just let them watch from the sidelines with encouragement. If your pup is at all uncomfortable with this step, repeat the first step until they’re ready to move on.

3. It’s time to get your dog moving.

With your pup standing on the treadmill, start it at its lowest speed. It’s best to have your pup on a leash for this step to prevent them from jumping off and hurting themselves. Keep it slow, keep the amount of time that they’re on it short, and give them pets and encouragement the entire time.

4. Gradually increase the speed.

Now that your dog has gained some confidence with the treadmill, it’s time to increase the speed. Do so in gradual intervals so that it’s not overtaxing or scary, and only for the length of time your dog is comfortable. Again, keep the length of time short until you know how much your dog can handle or wants to do, and remember to reward your pup.

5. Train for the dismount of the treadmill.

Don’t just let your dog jump off when they’re finished. Instead, make it a more controlled exit. Have them stand or sit, and then have them get off with a command. That way they’ll be less likely to jump off while the treadmill is moving and hurt themselves.

6. Keep it up!

If your dog doesn’t love it the first time, no big deal. Just keep trying over and over with lots of encouragement and patience. Go back to the previous step if your dog shows any apprehension with any of the training.

Even if your pup takes to the treadmill right away, it’s still important to increase speeds and time slowly so that they don’t overdo it.

Final Thoughts

A dog treadmill is a great way to get your dog the exercise that they need to stay happy and healthy. However, getting them to use a treadmill is going to take some time and patience that will be more than worth it in the end.

If the reason for a treadmill is that you’re particularly concerned about your dog’s weight, we have a series of resources on that topic as well that you might find helpful. Our puppy calculator can let you know how big your dog is likely to be, our list of foods dogs can and can not eat can help you figure out what’s safe to feed your dog, our dog size chart by weight can help you identify different inflection points in your dog’s growth, and our collection of breed-specific growth charts can help you get a better sense of the ideal weight for your full grown goldendoodle, full grown great dane, full grown golden retriever, full grown chihuahua, or full grown labrador.

]]>
The Best Waterproof Dog Bed https://petnewsdaily.com/best-waterproof-dog-beds/ Mon, 19 Dec 2022 01:45:01 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=201 Waterproof dog beds are perfect for senior dogs or puppies who experience an odd bathroom accident, as the waterproof layer protects the filling of the bed inside. They’re also ideal for dogs who drool excessively or those who often head to their beds with wet, muddy paws.

Our vet advisor, Dr. Amanda Jondle, reviewed dozens of waterproof dog beds, and she chose the PupLounge Memory Foam Bolster Bed and Topper as her top pick. With a waterproof liner around a memory foam base, along with a cozy faux fur topper, this bed is both comfortable and practical.

Our Vet’s Top Pick

PupLounge Memory Foam Bolster Bed and Topper

An extremely comfortable bed with a supportive bolster and a faux fur topper.

Check Price

While this was Dr. Jondle’s top choice, she also offers a series of her top tips for what to look for in choosing the best waterproof dog beds, a section on who should avoid purchasing them altogether, and she personally selected the best bed for a variety of specific use cases.

The 5 Best Waterproof Dog Beds

  1. Best OverallPupLounge Memory Foam Bolster Bed and Topper
  2. Best BudgetSport PET Designs Large Luxury Waterproof Pet Bed
  3. Best WashableYellow Links Large Round Indoor Outdoor Pet Dog Bed
  4. Best for Large DogsK9 Ballistics Tough Bolster Dog Bed
  5. Best for Small Dogs – K9 Ballistics Round Deep Den Dog Bed

Waterproof Dog Beds Compared

Here are the top picks from our veterinarian. Compare the ratings and features of different models.

Editor’s Picks Brand Rating Waterproof Machine washable Size
Best Overall PupLounge™ Memory Foam Bolster Bed & Topper 4.9 Small to giant
Best Budget Buy Sport PET Designs Large Luxury Waterproof Pet Bed 4.1 Large
Best Washable Yellow Links Large Round Indoor Outdoor Pet Dog Bed 4.4 Large
Best for Large Dogs K9 Ballistics Tough Bolster Dog Bed 4.4 Small to xx-large
Best for Small Dogs K9 Ballistics Round Deep Den Dog Bed 4.8 Small

*Ratings are on a scale of 1 to 5 and based on reviews, feedback, and opinions of actual customers

Who Should Buy a Waterproof Dog Bed

  • Owners of puppies and senior dogs – Both young dogs and old dogs are more likely to have accidents, which can ruin a bed if it seeps into the filling.1
  • Owners of frequent droolers – Like pee, excessive drool can work its way into the filling of a dog bed that isn’t waterproof, potentially leading to mold, mildew, and bad odors. If your dog tends to snore and drool while sleeping, a waterproof dog bed is a good choice. 2
  • If you want the option to use your dog’s bed outside – If you’d like to move your dog’s bed out to the patio or the lawn so your canine companion has a comfortable spot to rest while you eat al fresco or lounge outside with a book, a waterproof dog bed won’t get damp from absorbing moisture from the ground.

Who Shouldn’t Buy a Waterproof Dog Bed

  • If you’re satisfied with your current dog bed – If you’re satisfied with your dog’s current bed and haven’t had any issues with the fact that it’s not waterproof, you might as well wait until your pup’s current bed needs replacing before upgrading to a waterproof model.
  • If your dog might be scared by crinkling sounds – Sometimes the waterproof layer can make a crinkling sound when your dog gets on the bed or moves around. If you have a nervous canine companion who is likely to be bothered by this noise, it’s best to avoid waterproof dog beds.3

If a waterproof dog bed isn’t for you, you may want to check out one of our other guides to find the right bed for your dogs, such as our guide to buying the best-elevated dog bed, our outdoor dog bed buying guide, or our guide to selecting the best dog couch bed. You might also want to know how you can help your puppy to sleep better at night.

Buying Guide: Research Tips From a Veterinarian

As a veterinarian, I’m often asked how to choose a quality waterproof dog bed. The following tips will help you to pick the right waterproof bed for your dog. You should carefully research to identify the key features, plus you can ask your dog’s veterinarian or dog-owning friends and family members if they have any dog bed recommendations.

  1. Waterproof vs. water-resistant – Check whether a dog bed is waterproof or just water-resistant. Water-resistant dog beds are fine to protect against muddy paws or light splashes, but won’t hold up against a spill or incontinence.
  2. Choose a bed that’s comfortable while still being waterproof – Some waterproof dog beds can have a plastic-like exterior which isn’t all that comfortable for dogs to lie on.
  3. Machine washable – At a minimum, a bed should have a washable cover, but it’s a bonus if the whole thing is washable. Plus, it should be easy to spot clean when you don’t want to wash the whole thing.
  4. Lining of the inner filling to help with waterproofing the inside – The foam mattress or other padding inside should ideally have a waterproof lining, which helps ensure effective waterproofing.
  5. Good for large and small breed dogs – Beds should be available in a range of different size options to suit all kinds of dogs.
  6. Comfortable shape – All dogs seem to have their own preferences when it comes to bed shape, but bolsters are good for allowing dogs to snuggle and rest their heads.
  7. Overall comfort – Quality waterproof dog beds have thick, comfortable padding and are snuggly, soft, or plush.
  8. Durability – It’s a huge bonus if your chosen dog bed is durable, chew-proof, or has a guarantee against destruction.
  9. Good value – Look for expensive beds with guarantees or durable and easy to clean beds. These are worth it compared to cheap beds that you may have to buy every few months because they get torn up or destroyed.

How Much Do They Cost?

Between $30 and $200

You can find some small, basic waterproof dog beds starting at around $30, but these can offer poor value for money as cheap beds often don’t last long. We’d recommend spending at least $50 on a waterproof dog bed, but some extra-large, durable models with orthopedic mattresses can cost up to $200.

Our Methodology: Why Trust Pet News Daily

In my line of work, I speak with many pet owners and other veterinarians about the best waterproof dog beds available. I’ve chosen these products based on my professional experience as a veterinarian, along with considerations about the features of these beds. A combination of comfort and effective waterproofing is vital in a waterproof dog bed. – Dr. Amanda Jondle

The Best Waterproof Dog Bed Reviews

1. Best Overall – PupLounge Memory Foam Bolster Bed and Topper

Our Vet’s Top Pick

PupLounge Memory Foam Bolster Bed and Topper

An extremely comfortable bed with a supportive bolster and a faux fur topper.

Check Price

The PupLounge Memory Foam Bolster Bed and Topper consists of a comfortable waterproof memory foam bed with a removable faux fur topper. Not only is the topper extremely soft and cozy, but it’s also machine washable to easily keep the bed clean and fresh. The bolster around the edge of the bed offers support and a place for your dog to rest their head.

This top-notch waterproof dog bed comes in sizes from small to giant, which will fit the vast majority of dogs. It’s a highly durable option with a supportive, comfortable mattress that’s great for dogs with joint issues.4

Pros
  • Waterproof lining protects the mattress inside
  • Mattress guaranteed not to flatten for 10 years
  • Machine washable faux fur topper
Cons
  • The mattress is a little firm for some dogs
  • Topper looks worn after a few washes

2. Best Budget – Sport PET Designs Large Luxury Waterproof Pet Bed

Best Budget

Sport PET Designs Large Luxury Waterproof Pet Bed

A soft, plush waterproof dog bed at an affordable price.

We love that the interior of the Sport PET Designs Large Luxury Waterproof Pet Bed is filled with a shredded high-density foam, rather than a basic poly filling. Unlike a poly filling, shredded foam maintains its loft and will stay plush and supportive for years to come.

Not only is the interior of the bed comfortable, but the exterior is made from plush faux fur that’s wonderfully cozy for your dog. The cover is removable and machine washable, while the filling is protected by a waterproof lining.

Pros
  • Large size works for many dogs
  • Supportive yet soft
  • Wipe-clean waterproof liner
Cons
  • Can slide around on hard floors
  • Sheds fluff if cover is not washed before first use

3. Best Washable – Yellow Links Large Round Indoor Outdoor Pet Dog Bed

Best Washable

Yellow Links Large Round Indoor Outdoor Pet Dog Bed

We love that both the cover and the inner of this waterproof bed are washable.

The Yellow Links Large Round Indoor Outdoor Pet Dog Bed is a large round bed with a 42-inch diameter. Thanks to its impressive waterproofing, you can use this bed either indoors or outdoors, which is great if you have a dog who likes to spend lots of time in the yard when weather conditions allow.

The cushion is filled with high-loft polyester, which feels nice and plush, though it doesn’t offer as much support or relief for pressure points as foam does, so it isn’t the best choice for seniors or dogs with joint issues.5 While the whole bed is machine washable, only the outer is safe to tumble dry.

Pros
  • Machine-washable inner and outer portions
  • Attractive pattern and comes in 6 color options
  • Plenty of space for most dogs to stretch out
Cons
  • Inner can only be air-dried
  • The inner pad flattens and gets lumpy quickly

4. Best for Large Dogs – K9 Ballistics Tough Bolster Dog Bed

Best for Large Dogs

K9 Ballistics Tough Bolster Dog Bed

Thanks to its tough outer layer, this is an excellent choice for dogs who dig or scratch at their beds.

Check Price

The K9 Ballistics Tough Bolster Dog Bed is a great choice for large dogs as the rectangular shape gives them plenty of room to stretch out, while the high bolster sides offer support and a snuggly feeling. The ripstop outer cover is durable for dogs who dig at their beds, and also stands up beautifully to general wear and tear.

The inner mattress is made from supportive yet comfortable memory foam, which is a great option for large dogs as their weight tends to put more pressure on their joints.6 Memory foam beds reduce pressure points as dogs sleep, which can help reduce joint pain on waking.7 The inner is protected by a waterproof lining to keep all manner of fluids out.

Pros
  • XX-large size (40×68 inches) for giant breeds
  • The removable, machine-washable outer cover
  • The whole bed is washable
  • Highly durable cover
  • Dig and scratch-resistant
Cons
  • Not chew-proof
  • Some sizes are larger than expected

5. Best for Small Dogs – K9 Ballistics Round Deep Den Dog Bed

Best for Small Dogs

K9 Ballistics Round Deep Den Dog Bed

Small dogs love to cuddle inside this deep den bed.

Check Price

If your small dog loves to curl up in their sleep, the K9 Ballistics Round Deep Den Dog Bed is a perfect choice. The high sides are supportive and make dogs feel safe as they catch some Zs. Although not completely indestructible, this bed is durable and can stand up to light chewers and diggers.

The outer cover is made from a water-resistant material that’s easy to wipe clean. However, you can also wash either just the cover or the whole bed when you need to. The filling is soft and comfortable, but not as supportive as memory foam.

Pros
  • Perfect size for small dogs
  • Plenty of support from bolster edges
  • Comes with a 90-day chew-proof guarantee
Cons
  • Not ideal for dogs who like to stretch out
  • Water-resistant rather than waterproof

Frequently Asked Questions

Are dog beds waterproof?

No, not all dog beds are waterproof, which can lead to issues if your dog has an accident in bed or routinely runs to their bed with their paws still wet from outside. You can, however, find plenty of waterproof dog beds on the market, so you should look for dog beds specifically labeled “waterproof” if this is what you’re after.
How do you clean a waterproof dog bed?

This depends on which bed you opt for. Most have removable covers that are washable, while others can be washed in their entirety, though this can be an issue unless you have a large washer or a small bed. Check the manufacturer’s instructions to find out which parts of your chosen dog bed are washable and at what temperature, as well as the proper way to dry each portion.
Do dogs really need a dog bed?

If your dog is happy sleeping in your bed or on the couch, you might be wondering if you really need a dog bed. While some people manage without a dog bed, we think it’s best for dogs to have their own beds they can retreat to if they need some space. What’s more, if your dog makes enough of a mess to warrant a waterproof dog bed, you probably don’t want that mess in your bed or on your sofa.
What is the best waterproof dog bed?

There’s no single best waterproof dog bed. Of course, some waterproof dog beds are better than others, but most have a combination of good features and not-so-great features, so it’s all about finding a balance. Plus, each waterproof dog bed will suit some dogs’ needs better than others. For instance, a circular bed with high sides is great for dogs who curl up in their sleep but not suitable for dogs who sleep stretched out flat.
]]>
The Best Outdoor Dog Kennel https://petnewsdaily.com/best-outdoor-dog-kennels/ Mon, 19 Dec 2022 01:32:49 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=899 An outdoor dog kennel is perfect for dogs who like to spend plenty of time outdoors but can’t always have free reign of the yard due to safety concerns or other reasons. While keeping dogs outdoors full time isn’t recommended, especially in kennels that aren’t climate-controlled, they’re great for letting your dog stretch their legs in unfenced yards or chill outdoors unsupervised.

Our vet advisor, Dr. Jamie Whittenburg, selected these products. Her top pick is the Lucky Dog Uptown Welded Dog Kennel, thanks to its durability and ease of cleaning.

Our Vet’s Top Pick

Lucky Dog Uptown Welded Dog Kennel

This sturdy kennel is rust-resistant and free from sharp edges.

While this was Dr. Whittenburg’s top choice, she also offers a series of her top tips for what to look for in choosing the best outdoor dog kennels, a section on who should avoid purchasing them altogether, and she personally selected the best kennel for a variety of specific use cases.

The 5 Best Outdoor Dog Kennels

  1. Best OverallLucky Dog Uptown Welded Dog Kennel
  2. Best BudgetPawHut Heavy-Duty Kennel
  3. Best LargeChickenCoopOutlet Backyard Dog Kennel
  4. Best Heavy DutyPolar Aurora Outdoor Dog Kennel
  5. Best PlaypenBestPet Dog Pen

Outdoor Dog Kennels Compared

Editor’s Picks Brand Rating Covered Rust resistant Size
Best Overall Lucky Dog Uptown Welded Dog Kennel 4.6 8ft x 4ft x 6ft
Best Budget Buy PawHut Heavy Duty Outdoor Kennel 4.3 48in x 41in x 47in
Best Large Outdoor Kennel and Run ChickenCoopOutlet Backyard Dog Kennel 3.4 20ft x 10ft x 6ft
Best Heavy Duty Outdoor Kennel Polar Aurora Outdoor Dog Kennel 4.3 4ft x 4ft x 6ft or 4ft x 6ft x 8ft
Best Playpen BestPet Dog Pen 4.5 Various sizes/adjustable

*Ratings are on a scale of 1 to 5 and based on reviews, feedback, and opinions of actual customers

Who Should Buy an Outdoor Dog Kennel

  • Pet parents with unfenced yards – A large kennel, run, or playpen is ideal for letting dogs have some outdoor time when you don’t have a secure yard for them to play in.1
  • Owners of canine Houdinis – If your yard is fenced but your dog still manages to find a way to get out of it, a large kennel will give them more outdoor time without you needing to watch their every move.
  • Owners of dogs who spend a lot of time outdoors – Some dogs would happily spend most of the day outdoors, but this can be an issue if they get up to mischief when left outdoors unsupervised or if your yard lacks natural shelter from rain or sun.

Who Should Not Buy an Outdoor Dog Kennel

  • Anyone considering keeping their dog outdoors because of behavioral issues – You should never send your dog to live in the yard because they bark too much, chew up furniture, have accidents in the house, or due to any other behavioral issue. Dogs with behavioral issues need gentle training, not to be isolated from their human family.
  • People who want to keep their dogs outside all day, year-round – Outdoor kennels have their place but a standard kennel isn’t suitable for dogs to live outside in all year round. In some situations, dogs can live in kennels rather than in the home, but these kennels are climate-controlled outbuildings, rather than simple wire structures. Unless you’re willing to have an elaborate heated and air-conditioned kennel built, you can’t leave your dog out in a kennel all day.

Buying Guide: Research Tips From a Veterinarian

As a veterinarian, I’m often asked about what outdoor dog kennels are best for dogs. While keeping your canine in the yard full time isn’t best for most dogs, outdoor kennels have their place and can provide shelter for dogs while they spend time in the yard. Outdoor dog kennels are just that: made to be used outside. Because this is a relatively significant investment, it is important to pick a well-built kennel that will withstand outdoor conditions. The following tips will help you pick the right option for you and your dog.

  1. Consider the material that the kennel is made from – Heavy-duty metal kennels will last longer, and they should ideally be coated for protection.
  2. Pick carefully if you have a strong dog – If you have a strong dog or an escape artist, it is essential to consider the strength of the bars. Flimsy or small gauge wire kennels can be easily escaped by some dogs.
  3. Think about ease of cleaning – Many people spray their outdoor kennels out with a water hose. If you are planning this, I suggest a kennel with an elevated bottom. If the kennel will just set on the grass, this feature may not be as important.
  4. Carefully review the size of the kennel you’re considering – Larger dogs or multiple dogs will require larger kennels.2 But it is crucial to ensure that the kennel will fit into the space where you want to place it. Kennel size will be different than determining how big you’d want a dog crate to be.
  5. Think about covering – In most cases, you should choose a kennel that comes with a roof or covering to allow your dogs to get out of the sun and to offer protection from any bad weather. If you’re only going to use a kennel for short periods of time while you’re home and can bring your dog inside if it gets too hot or wet, a model without a cover is fine.

Dogs have physical and emotional needs that can’t necessarily be met when living outside. If you’re considering keeping your dog outdoors full-time, this article discusses whether it’s fair to keep dogs outdoors and how to do it right if you absolutely must.

How Much Does it Cost?

Between $150 and $5,000

Outdoor dog kennels aren’t cheap and cost anywhere from $150 to $5,000. You can find some small, basic outdoor kennels for around $150, but large, heavy-duty options cost more like $300-$800. Elaborate climate-controlled outdoor kennels can cost well into the thousands.

Our Methodology: Why Trust Pet News Daily

As a veterinarian, I have spoken with other veterinarians and dog owners to find the best outdoor dog kennels. I chose these products based on my professional experience, as well as customer reviews, and knowledge of what’s important in an outdoor kennel for dogs. I’ve considered factors such as the durability of the chosen kennels, how safe they are for your dog, and how easy they are to clean. – Dr. Jamie Whittenburg, DVM

The Best Outdoor Dog Kennel Reviews

1. Best Overall – Lucky Dog Uptown Welded Dog Kennel

Our Vet’s Top Pick

Lucky Dog Uptown Welded Dog Kennel

This sturdy kennel is rust-resistant and free from sharp edges.

The Lucky Dog Uptown Welded Dog Kennel is made of heavy-duty steel welded together for strength and then coated with a protective coating that protects your dog from any sharp points. The kennel has also been treated to prevent rust and corrosion, so the steel will last longer.

The slight elevation off of the ground enables you to spray the kennel out with a hose easily, and any feces, urine, and other debris will easily wash out. The water-resistant cover goes over the entire roof to protect your dog from inclement weather such as rain or snow, as well as protect them from the sun’s harmful UV rays.

Pros
  • Easy to assemble
  • Waterproof and UV-resistant cover
  • Fairly spacious at 8 by 4 feet
  • Latching gate
Cons
  • Could be sturdier
  • The cover isn’t especially thick

2. Best Budget – PawHut Heavy-Duty Kennel

Best Budget Buy

PawHut Heavy-Duty Kennel

An affordable kennel for small breed dogs.

Although affordable, the PawHut Heavy-Duty Kennel has all the basic features you’d expect from a kennel. However, ay 48 by 41.25 by 46.75 inches, it is small, so check that the size will work for your dog. It’s sturdily built with a heavy-duty metal frame and is coated with a treated material to make the kennel rust-resistant.

The door on this kennel is lockable to keep your dog in and others out. It comes with a polyester fabric cover that is both UV and water-resistant to protect your dog from rain and the sun.

Pros
  • Narrow bar spacing prevents escapes
  • The striped polyester cover provides shade
  • Simple assembly with no tools required
Cons
  • The cover isn’t fully waterproof
  • Only suitable for small dogs

3. Best Large – ChickenCoopOutlet Backyard Dog Kennel

Best Large Outdoor Kennel and Run

ChickenCoopOutlet Backyard Dog Kennel

This large run is great for giving dogs space to roam in unfenced yards.

The ChickenCoopOutlet Backyard Dog Kennel is half covered and half open, so it serves as a kennel and a playpen. The kennel portion allows dogs to have a place in the shade, while the playpen allows room for frolicking in the sun. This enclosure is large, measuring 20 feet long by 10 wide and 6 feet high, so it’s big enough for multiple dogs and gives your canine companion space to stretch their legs.

While the chain-link sides are relatively sturdy, it isn’t exactly heavy duty so it may not be ideal for very strong dogs or escape artists. While it uses a quick-connect system that should allow for easy assembly, some buyers found assembly frustrating. Still, it’s a good choice if a large size is important to you.

Pros
  • UV-resistant cover protects from rain and sun
  • This is a larger option than most
  • The wrench needed for assembly is included
Cons
  • Chain link can tangle during assembly
  • Not the heaviest-duty option

4. Best Heavy Duty – Polar Aurora Outdoor Dog Kennel

Best Heavy Duty Outdoor Kennel

Polar Aurora Outdoor Dog Kennel

A sturdy dog kennel that comes in two sizes.

Made of heavy-duty welded steel, the Polar Aurora Outdoor Dog Kennel is marketed for residential or professional use. The steel bars are welded to the wire mesh before coating for extra durability. Not only does the coating prevent any sharp points that could hurt your dog, but it also prevents rust and corrosion.

It features a heavy-duty waterproof cover that will do an excellent job of protecting your dog from the sun or rain. The kennel also has added UV protection that prevents ripping, cracking, fading, or peeling so that the kennel will last for years.

Pros
  • A pitched roof allows rain and debris to run off
  • It’s available in two sizes
  • Assembly is fairly straightforward
Cons
  • Smaller size; best for short-term use
  • The latch could be improved upon

5. Best Playpen – BestPet Dog Pen

Best Playpen

BestPet Dog Pen

A large playpen that’s easy to set up and can be used indoors or outdoors.

The BestPet Dog Pen is a spacious playpen for indoor or outdoor use. The roofless design of a playpen isn’t recommended for use for long periods of time. However, when used as a short-term area for play, these enclosures can keep your dog safe and contained. Assembly is simple, and the playpen comes with assembly instructions that will enable you to construct the structure in a matter of minutes.

This playpen is well-built and spacious enough to allow dogs to play safely while still being secure. That said, it isn’t very tall so dogs who jump are not good candidates for this type of structure as they may easily escape. If you need more area for your dog or dogs, this playpen is excellent because you can add extra panels to increase the space. The playpen can also be configured into multiple shapes configurations such as the shape of a rectangle, square, or octagon.

Pros
  • Easy to assemble
  • Great for unsecured yards or camping trips
  • 8 or 16 panels in a range of heights
Cons
  • 40-inch panels may allow dogs to escape
  • Dogs have to hop over the bottom to get inside

Frequently Asked Questions

What are outdoor dog kennels used for?

Outdoor kennels can offer shelter to your dog while they’re outside. You can even leave the door open if the rest of your yard is safe and secure, so your dog has access to shade and shelter when they need it. They can also help keep your dog safe in yards that are unfenced or aren’t fully secure when you can’t keep an eye on your dog.
Are outdoor kennels good for dogs?

This depends on a range of factors, including your dog’s preferences and how you use the kennel. When keeping a dog as a pet, it’s always preferable to keep them in your home with you than in a kennel, but kennels can provide shelter when your dog’s outside and keep them from getting into mischief. When it’s a choice between crating your dog indoors while you’re out of the house or letting them spend time in a spacious outdoor kennel, many dogs would prefer the outdoor kennel. Of course, this depends on the weather, as your dog won’t be safe or comfortable in an outdoor kennel on a hot or cold day unless the kennel is climate-controlled.3
Do dog kennels require planning permission?

Commercial dog kennels require planning permission in many areas, but a standard dog kennel for general use shouldn’t do so. That said, if you’re planning to erect a large, permanent dog kennel, you should check if it will require a planning permit before you get started.
How big should a dog run be?

If you’re looking for a dog run, it should be at least 3 feet wide (or 4 feet for dogs over 100 pounds) and 10 feet long. However, it doesn’t hurt to go bigger.
]]>
The Best Toys for German Shepherds https://petnewsdaily.com/best-toys-for-german-shepherds/ Mon, 19 Dec 2022 01:06:57 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=1010 Choosing the best toys for German Shepherds might feel tricky. Maybe you’re worried about buying a toy that won’t be rugged enough to stand up to your dog. Perhaps you’ve already purchased a few toys that came highly recommended for dogs … but it seems like they’re sized for a miniature poodle.

Our vet advisor, Dr. Danielle Morosco, DVM, reviewed dozens of dog toys to pick out the very best toys for German Shepherds. Her top pick, the KONG Classic Durable Natural Rubber, is sure to delight your German Shepherd. It comes in multiple sizes and colors and can be filled with treats or peanut butter for enrichment activities.

Our Vet’s Top Pick

KONG Classic Durable Natural Rubber

This hugely popular classic dog toy is a fantastic buy. It’ll provide hours of entertainment for your German Shepherd, especially if you stuff it with treats or peanut butter.

While this was Dr. Morosco’s top choice, she also offers a series of her top tips for what to look for in choosing the best toys for German Shepherds, a section on who should avoid purchasing them altogether, and she personally selected the best toy for a variety of specific use cases.

The 5 Best German Shepherd Toys

  1. Best OverallKONG Classic Durable Natural Rubber
  2. Best BudgetKONG Rubber Flyer Large
  3. Best Chew ToyLewondr Dog Toys for Aggressive Chewers
  4. Best IndestructibleFeeko Aggressive Chewers Interactive Indestructible Toy
  5. Best PuzzleDogs Food Puzzle Feeder for IQ Training

German Shepherd Toys Compared

Here are the top picks from our veterinarian. Compare the ratings and features of different models.

Editor’s Picks Model Rating Size Material Add treats? Satisfaction guarantee?
Best Overall KONG Classic Durable Natural Rubber 4.6 4” x 2.75” x 2.75” Rubber
Best Budget Buy KONG Rubber Flyer Large 4.5 9” diameter Rubber
Best Chew Toy Lewondr Dog Toys for Aggressive Chewers 4.6 5.39” diameter Rubber
Best Indestructible Feeko Aggressive Chewers Interactive Indestructible Toy 4.6 14.17” x 5.12” x 1.57” Rubber
Best Puzzle Toy Dogs Food Puzzle Feeder for IQ Training 4.1 16.26” x 6.5” x 4.0” Bamboo base, plastic bottles

*Ratings are on a scale of 1 to 5 and based on reviews, feedback, and opinions of actual customers

Who Should Buy Toys for German Shepherds

  • Anyone who cares about the health of their pets – We hope that’s you! Dog toys provide mental and physical stimulation for your pet, bringing a whole host of benefits, like reduced stress.
  • Owners of bored or destructive dogs – Does your German Shepherd keep chewing things they shouldn’t? Durable toys for German Shepherds specifically designed for play will help prevent destructive chewing of your shoes or other household items.
  • Pet owners who want some time to focus on work or household chores – A fun dog toy or puzzle can keep your German Shepherd occupied while you’re busy.

Who Should Not Buy Toys for  German Shepherds

  • Pet owners who won’t or can’t supervise their pet – It’s really important to supervise your German Shepherd: their aggressive chewing could destroy the toy. If that starts to happen, you need to throw it away. Broken toys aren’t safe.
  • Proud doggy parents who already have every toy on the market – You don’t need to constantly buy new toys for your German Shepherd. Instead, pack away most of the toys and rotate them, so your pooch always has a fresh selection. That way, they won’t get bored.

Buying Guide: Research Tips From a Veterinarian

As a veterinarian, I often get asked how to choose the best toys for different types of dogs, including German Shepherds. Here are some tips and best practices to consider when purchasing a toy. Make sure you do your research and talk to friends and family who own German Shepherds: ask what they would recommend. You could also consult your veterinarian, especially if your dog has specific medical or behavioral issues that you’re hoping the toys will help with.

  1. Be sure you choose toys made from non-toxic material – Toxic materials to stay away from include Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), Phthalates, Bisphenol A (BPA), Lead, Chromium, Formaldehyde, Cadmium, and Bromine.[efm_note]Cali Raw Nutrition. Toxic Dog Toys. Caliraw.com. Published January 18, 2021. Accessed January 13, 2022.[/efn_note] If the toy is rubber, make sure it’s non-toxic rubber.1
  2. Avoid very hard bones and toys – These could hurt your German Shepherd’s teeth and gums since they are notoriously aggressive chewers.2
  3. Be cautious with rope toys as they are prone to being shredded and frayed – If these are ingested, your German Shepherd is at risk for an intestinal blockage, which could result in a trip to the emergency room.3
  4. Avoid real bones, or be very careful if using them – They could shatter or splinter and your German Shepherd might ingest sharp pieces of the broken bone. This could lead to stomach upset, intestinal perforation or blockage, and might cause an emergency trip to the vet.4 Also be cautious of hollow bones as they can become lodged around your German Shepherd’s lower jaw, resulting in a veterinary emergency.5
  5. Think carefully about toys containing stuffing or squeakers – These can be easily destroyed and if stuffing or squeakers are accidentally ingested, you may be headed for an emergency trip to the vet.6

You might also want to take a look at our list of ways to keep dogs entertained.

How Much Do They Cost?

Between $10 and $40

Most robust toys for German Shepherds will cost between $10 and $40. Toys at the lower end of the range will be smaller and simpler and ones at the higher end will be larger and more complex. Be wary of very cheap toys as they may not be as durable or safe for your German Shepherd.

Our Methodology: Why Trust Pet News Daily

As a veterinarian, I’ve talked to lots of pet owners about their favorite toys for their dogs. I’ve also sadly seen a number of dogs with injuries relating to accidents while playing. I’ve chosen these products based on their safety for your German Shepherd, as well as with their features in mind. I also took into account value for money, durability, and ease of cleaning. – Dr. Danielle Morosco, DVM

The Best German Shepherd Toy Reviews

1. Best Overall – KONG Classic Durable Natural Rubber

Our Vet’s Top Pick

KONG Classic Durable Natural Rubber

This hugely popular classic dog toy is a fantastic buy. It’ll provide hours of entertainment for your German Shepherd, especially if you stuff it with treats or peanut butter.

The KONG Classic Durable Natural Rubber is a great, durable choice of toy for your German Shepherd. It comes in a range of different sizes: get at least a large. You may want to size up to an XL or XXL. The classic Kong color is red, but you can also buy it in a range of different colors if you prefer. It’s made of a strong rubber that’s gentler on the teeth and gums than bones or plastic toys.

Your German Shepherd will love chasing the KONG as it bounces around. Even better, you can use it for enrichment activities by filling it with treats or peanut butter. It’s dishwasher-safe, making it super easy to clean. There’s also a satisfaction guarantee.

Pros
  • Great-value classic dog toy
  • Strong enough to stand up to robust chewing
  • Dishwasher-safe for easy cleanup
  • Full satisfaction guarantee
Cons
  • Sizes may be smaller than expected
  • Not all dogs will take an interest in the KONG

2. Best Budget – KONG Rubber Flyer Large

Best Budget Buy

KONG Rubber Flyer Large

Want to play frisbee with your German Shepherd? The KONG Flyer is perfect for games of fetch as its soft, durable rubber is safe for your pet’s teeth and gums.

The KONG Rubber Flyer Large is a fantastic choice of toy for German Shepherds if you’re on a budget. It’s made out of the same KONG Classic rubber as our top pick, meaning it’s comfortable and safe for your German Shepherd to catch in their jaws. If they miss your initial throw, it’ll bounce dynamically for them to catch.

Like other KONG products, the Flyer is made in the USA and comes with a satisfaction guarantee. The large size is suitable for dogs of 30-65 lbs (13-30 kg) so it’s best for female German Shepherds or males who are on the smaller side.

Pros
  • Budget-friendly toy
  • Provides hours of fun for you and your pet
  • Soft and safe but also strong and durable
  • Full satisfaction guarantee
Cons
  • Not designed for larger German Shepherds
  • Not ideal for independent play

3. Best Chew Toy – Lewondr Dog Toys for Aggressive Chewers

Best Chew Toy

Lewondr Dog Toys for Aggressive Chewers

Want a toy that will withstand aggressive chewing? This is the perfect option for your German Shepherd, as it promotes good oral health too.

Got a German Shepherd who loves to chew? The Lewondr Dog Toys for Aggressive Chewers should stand up to a lot of chewing, plus it’s a great option for games of fetch. It’s designed with special grooves and ridges to help keep your dog’s teeth clean and to strengthen their jaw too.

You can add treats to this toy for your dog to shake out … or you can even smear it with peanut butter, which should stick to the textured surface. Just keep in mind that you’ll need to clean it by hand, as the manufacturer states it can’t go in the dishwasher. There’s a lifetime warranty, though (understandably) this won’t cover normal wear and tear after long-term use.

Pros
  • Helps keep your dog’s teeth and gums healthy and strong
  • Can contain treats for added fun for your dog
  • Tested and approved by German Shepherd dogs
  • Not easily destroyed
Cons
  • Center treat area is softer and less durable
  • Not dishwasher-safe
  • Grooves and ridges can be difficult to clean

4. Best Indestructible – Feeko Aggressive Chewers Interactive Indestructible Toy

Best Indestructible

Feeko Aggressive Chewers Interactive Indestructible Toy

Need a truly indestructible toy? Go for this Feeko dog toy: it comes in a range of colors and it’s been rigorously tested by German Shepherds.

If your dog seems to destroy every toy, then give the Feeko Aggressive Chewers Interactive Indestructible Toy a try. The bone design makes it great for games of tug-of-war and the ridges will help clean your dog’s teeth as they chew, too.

It’s a large toy, so it’s suitable for large German Shepherds. The natural rubber composition makes it sturdy but flexible and safe for your dog to chew.

Pros
  • Cleans your dog’s teeth as they chew
  • Tested by German Shepherds
  • Can be used for games of tug-of-war
  • Suitable for large dog breeds
Cons
  • Large and heavy; not easy to transport around
  • May not stand up to very aggressive chewing

5. Best Puzzle – Dogs Food Puzzle Feeder for IQ Training

Best Puzzle Toy

Dogs Food Puzzle Feeder for IQ Training

Want to give your dog a great mental workout? This puzzle feeder should keep them occupied for ages.

With a sturdy wooden base, the Dogs Food Puzzle Feeder for IQ Training has three bottles for your pet to tip up so they can get the treats out. It should keep them busy for a while, keeping their focus on the food and helping to relieve anxiety, stress, and boredom.

It has an H-shaped design so that it can’t be knocked over easily. Unlike the other toys listed, it does require assembly, but this should only take a few minutes. Keep in mind that you’ll need to take it apart again to remove and clean the bottles.

Pros
  • Keeps dogs’ attention for a long time
  • Slows down feeding for fast eaters
  • Strong, stable base prevents it from tipping over
Cons
  • Disassembly required for cleaning
  • Parts missing for some customers

Frequently Asked Questions

What toys should I get my German Shepherd?

If your German Shepherd is new to your family, or if you’re thinking about getting a pet, there are lots of great choices of toys. The KONG Classic is a fantastic all-rounder that your dog is sure to love, whatever their age. You might also want to consider a toy that’s designed for you to play with your dog outside – something that’s suitable for games of fetch, frisbee, or tug-of-war. If you have a German Shepherd puppy, durable teething toys are a great addition too (along with other key puppy products outlined in our puppy supply checklist).
What is the best chew toy for a German Shepherd?

German Shepherds are strong and aggressive chewers, so you want a toy that can withstand a lot of chomping.7 Make sure you’re buying toys that are durable but that are made of a material that won’t hurt your dog’s jaws or break his teeth.8 Rubber is usually a great choice. There are lots of different chew toys available: ideally, you want one that has rubber ridges to help keep your dog’s teeth clean as they chew.9
How do I keep my German Shepherd entertained?

German Shepherds are intelligent, active, and curious dogs that need to be kept busy – learning, playing games, or even working. Your dog will need plenty of positive interaction with you, so make time to play: you’ll both enjoy it! Robust dog toys are a great way to keep your German Shepherd entertained when you’re busy with chores (or when you just need a break). Just make sure you’re around to supervise young German Shepherd puppies, who might accidentally swallow any parts that they chew off the toy.
Can German Shepherds be left alone for 8 hours?

Most pet owners need to go out to work – and you can rest assured that it’s fine to leave your pet alone while you’re out of the house. They’ll probably nap for a large part of the day. With German Shepherds puppies, though, who can’t go 8 hours without relieving themselves, you could arrange for a dog walking service (or friendly neighbor) to take your pooch out for a walk in the middle of the day, so that they have a chance to empty their bladder and get some exercise and company.
What’s the best harness for a German Shepherd?

Our veterinary advisor Dr. Morosco selected the ICEFANG Tactical Dog Harness as the best harness for German Shepherds.

]]>
The Best Elevated Dog Beds https://petnewsdaily.com/best-elevated-dog-beds/ Sat, 17 Dec 2022 12:55:56 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=882 Elevated dog beds are great for managing orthopedic problems and improving your pet’s overall comfort. They can be ideal for dogs with hip and joint issues and help keep your furry friend cool and comfortable during the warm summer months.

Of course, if your pet already has issues sleeping comfortably you don’t want to pick the wrong bed for your furry friend.

Fortunately our vet advisor, Dr. Jennifer Coates, DVM, reviewed dozens of elevated dog beds to find the best of the best.

After careful research, she chose the K&H Pet Products Original Pet Cot Elevated Dog Bed as her pick of the bunch. With over 12,000 overwhelmingly positive ratings on Amazon, this functional raised dog bed is trusted by dog owners everywhere. Standout features of the sturdy bed include a lightweight metal frame, breathable mesh center, and removable, machine washable cover. Read how she chose the top 5.

Best Elevated Dog Bed

K&H Pet Products Original Pet Cot Elevated Dog Bed

For the best in elevated dog beds, look no further than the K&H Pet Products Original Pet Cot Elevated Dog Bed.

While this was Dr. Coates’s top choice, she also offers a series of her top tips for what to look for in choosing the best elevated dog bed, a section on who should avoid purchasing them altogether, and she personally selected the best elevated bed for a variety of specific use cases.

The 5 Best Elevated Dog Beds

  1. Best OverallK&H Pet Products Original Pet Cot Elevated Dog Bed
  2. Best BudgetAmazon Basics Cooling Elevated Pet Bed
  3. Best with CanopyBest Choice Products Elevated Cooling Dog Bed
  4. Best Folding/PortableKingCamp Elevated Dog Bed
  5. Best Chew ProofVeehoo Chew Proof Elevated Dog Bed

Elevated Dog Beds Compared

Here are the top picks from our veterinarian. Compare the ratings and features of different models.

Editor’s Picks Brand Rating Frame Material Removable Cover? Non-slip feet?
Best Overall K&H Pet Products Original Pet Cot Elevated Dog Bed 4.7 Alloy Steel
Best Budget Buy Amazon Basics Cooling Elevated Pet Bed 4.6 Iron
Best Elevated Dog Bed With Canopy Best Choice Products Elevated Cooling Dog Bed 4.5 Alloy Steel
Best Folding or Portable Elevated Dog Bed KingCamp Elevated Dog Bed 4.4 Alloy Steel
Best Chew Proof Elevated Dog Bed Veehoo Chew Proof Elevated Dog Bed 4.4 Aluminum

*Ratings are on a scale of 1 to 5 and based on reviews, feedback, and opinions of actual customers

Who Should Buy an Elevated Dog Bed

  • Pet owners with dogs that suffer from joint issues – Thanks to their raised structure, elevated dog beds can make it easier for dogs to get in and out and sleep more comfortably.
  • Anyone who wants to keep their dog cool in warm weather – Raised dog beds help keep dogs cooler by providing airflow underneath them. If your pup tends to overheat, an elevated bed can make a big difference.1
  • Pet owners who are looking for an easy-to-clean dog bed – Elevated dog beds are great because they’re so easy to clean. The raised structure keeps the bed off the floor, which helps to prevent dirt buildup. Most elevated dog beds can also be easily hosed down, making clean-up a breeze.

Who Should Not Buy an Elevated Dog Bed

  • Pet owners that live in cold climates – Elevated dog beds work best in warm weather because they can help dogs stay cool. If you live in a cold climate, an elevated bed may not be the best option for your pup.
  • Anyone who’s happy with their dog’s current sleeping arrangements – If your dog is comfortable and happy sleeping on the floor or in a traditional bed, there’s no need to buy a raised dog bed. Elevated beds are not necessary for all dogs, just those with specific needs.

If an elevated dog bed isn’t for you, you may want to check out one of our other guides to find the right bed for your dog, such as our guide to buying the best waterproof dog bed, our outdoor dog bed buying guide, or our guide to selecting the best dog couch bed.

Buying Guide: Research Tips From a Veterinarian

As a veterinarian, I often get asked how to choose a good elevated dog bed. Here are some tips and best practices to consider when purchasing a raised dog bed that will suit your dog’s individual needs. Be sure to do adequate research on the product you’re considering purchasing to look for key features and talk to friends and family who are dog owners to learn what types of elevated dog beds have worked well for them.

Your veterinarian can point to any features that might be ideal based on your dog’s age, breed, size, and health status. It’s also important to read product descriptions closely to avoid unpleasant surprises. Looking at customer reviews posted on trusted sources can give you an idea of how satisfied pet owners are with their purchase.

  1. Choose an elevated dog bed that’s appropriate for your dog’s size and weight – check the manufacturer’s product information before making a purchase. Elevated dog beds need to be sturdy enough to support your dog’s weight without collapsing but still easy to get in and out of. Your pup should also be able to lie down comfortably without feeling like they’re going to roll off of the bed.
  2. Select a mesh bed if you want to keep your dog cool – mesh beds are ideal for keeping dogs cool. If you place a dog bed or mat on top, make sure it has a non-slip backing and, ideally, can be affixed directly to the bed to prevent it (and your dog) from sliding off.
  3. Consider a raised bed with a canopy if you plan to use it outside a canopy can help block direct sunlight and keep your dog cool. It’s also a good idea to place the bed in a shady area to provide extra protection.
  4. Non-slip feet are a useful feature – rubber feet can help prevent the bed from sliding around or marring your floors.

How Much Do They Cost?

Between $20 and $100

For most elevated dog beds, you can expect to pay between $20-$100 and still get a high-quality product. The price you’ll pay will depend on several factors, including the materials used, the size of the bed, and the overall design. Raised dog beds at the lower end of this price range will have a basic design, while those at the upper end will have premium materials and additional features.

Our Methodology: Why Trust Pet News Daily

I’ve evaluated these elevated dog beds based on my professional experience as a veterinarian combined with product feature considerations. I judged the elevated dog beds on a variety of criteria, including the materials used, the functionality of the design, customer feedback, and affordability, as well as how safe and easy to use they would be for dogs. – Dr. Jennifer Coates, DVM

The Best Elevated Dog Bed Reviews

1. Best Overall – K&H Pet Products Original Pet Cot Elevated Dog Bed

Best Elevated Dog Bed

K&H Pet Products Original Pet Cot Elevated Dog Bed

For the best in elevated dog beds, look no further than the K&H Pet Products Original Pet Cot Elevated Dog Bed.

The K&H Pet Products Original Pet Cot Elevated Dog Bed is fully customizable and has a range of great features, making it an unbeatable choice for any pet owner who’s looking for a versatile, high-quality raised dog bed. The bed is breathable for hot weather but has the option to add a microfleece pad that has elastic straps to hold it in place (sold separately or in combination with the bed). You can also purchase a self-warming bed cover (sold separately) for colder weather. In addition, a canopy is available and can be bought in combination with the bed or separately.

Other key features of this well-designed elevated dog bed include anti-scratch rubber feet that protect your floors and stop the bed from sliding around, and a removable cover that can be machine washed or even hosed down outside. The raised dog bed is available in 4 sizes and multiple colors. Overall, it’s a well-priced, adaptable bed that will suit even the pickiest of pups.

Pros
  • Versatile and well-built
  • Great for hot or cold weather
  • Removable, machine washable cover
  • Accessories and replacement parts available
Cons
  • Some reviewers report that the bed rusts if left outside
  • Not durable enough to be completely chew proof

2. Best Budget – Amazon Basics Cooling Elevated Pet Bed

Best Budget Buy

Amazon Basics Cooling Elevated Pet Bed

This simple elevated dog bed is functional and affordable.

If you’re looking for a basic elevated dog bed on a budget, check out the Amazon Basics Cooling Elevated Pet Bed. The affordable bed features a lightweight metal frame and a breathable mesh surface that keeps your pet cool by allowing air to circulate freely.

The raised dog bed is available in a range of sizes and colors, so you’re sure to find the perfect option for your pup. It’s also easy to assemble, and a handy instructional video is available online. Reviewers say the dog bed is durable, easy to clean, and great value for money.

Pros
  • Functional and inexpensive
  • Easy to assemble
  • Range of sizes and colors available
Cons
  • Does not have non-slip feet
  • Not ideal for cold weather

3. Best with Canopy – Best Choice Products Elevated Cooling Dog Bed

Best Elevated Dog Bed With Canopy

Best Choice Products Elevated Cooling Dog Bed

This elevated dog bed with a removable canopy is great for the summer months.

The Best Choice Products Elevated Cooling Dog Bed is a durable, weather-resistant raised dog bed that features a removable canopy to shield your pet from the sun. The dog bed raises your pet 8 inches off the ground to promote good airflow, disperse heat, and prevent odor buildup.

This elevated dog bed is ideal for both indoor and outdoor use. It features non-slip rubber foot caps to protect your floors and can be assembled in minutes. The bed comes complete with a storage bag for easy transport and travel. Choose from 3 sizes and 2 colors to find the perfect fit for both you and your dog.

Pros
  • Removable canopy for shade when using outdoors
  • Rubber foot caps protect your floors
  • Breathable for hot weather
  • Available in 3 sizes and 2 colors
Cons
  • No removable cover
  • Canopy is low for large dogs

4. Best Folding/Portable – KingCamp Elevated Dog Bed

Best Folding or Portable Elevated Dog Bed

KingCamp Elevated Dog Bed

A truly portable elevated dog bed that folds up in seconds.

The KingCamp Elevated Dog Bed is the perfect choice for any pet owner who’s looking for a truly portable elevated dog bed that can be folded up and easily stored when not in use. It’s breathable for hot weather but comes with a nonslip, attachable sleeping mat for comfort in cooler weather.

The practical raised dog bed includes a carrying bag and is available in 3 sizes to fit most dogs. The elevated design helps keep your pet cool and comfortable, and the bed is easy to clean – just throw the removable sleeping mat in the washing machine and wipe the bed down with a damp cloth.

Pros
  • Portable design is ideal for camping or travel
  • Can be folded up easily when not in use
  • Removable sleeping mat
Cons
  • Not as sturdy as non-folding beds
  • Only available in black

5. Best Chew Proof – Veehoo Chew Proof Elevated Dog Bed

Best Chew Proof Elevated Dog Bed

Veehoo Chew Proof Elevated Dog Bed

A durable and well-built chew proof elevated dog bed.

If your dog has an annoying habit of chewing through its bed, the Veehoo Chew Proof Elevated Dog Bed could be the answer to your problems. The durable bed features a tough reinforced aluminum alloy frame and a breathable, scratch-resistant cover. All edges are inserted into and completely covered by the frame to protect against chewing and digging.

Other standout features of this chew-proof elevated dog bed include large rubber feet to protect your floors and an airy, off-the-ground design. The bed is easy to assemble and can be disassembled quickly for storage. Reviewers say this raised dog bed is a great option for large and powerful dog breeds.

Pros
  • Reinforced aluminum alloy frame
  • Large rubber feet to protect floors
  • Breathable, scratch-resistant cover
  • Available in 4 sizes and several colors
Cons
  • Not machine washable
  • A handful of reviewers mention quality control issues

Frequently Asked Questions

Do raised beds keep dogs cool?

Yes. Elevated dog beds help to keep dogs cool in the summer months. Raised beds provide a place for dogs to rest off of the ground, which helps to keep them cooler than if they were lying on hot surfaces. The raised structure also promotes airflow around the dog, which helps to cool them down.
Are elevated dog beds good for big dogs?

This really depends on the size of the elevated dog bed. There are some beds that are designed specifically for large dogs, while others may be too small. It’s important to measure your dog before purchasing an elevated bed to ensure it will have enough room to sleep comfortably.2
How do I get my dog to use his elevated bed?

There are a few different ways to get your dog to use his elevated bed. One way is to place the bed in an area where the dog usually rests. You can also put a favorite blanket or some other type of bedding on the elevated bed to make it more appealing as your dog gets used to it. Finally, you can train your dog to use the bed by rewarding them with treats when they lay down on it.
How do I choose an elevated dog bed?

There are a few things to consider when choosing an elevated dog bed. First, consider the size of your dog to ensure they will have enough room on the bed. You’ll also want to think about the materials the bed is made from, as some are more durable and offer better ventilation than others. Finally, consider other important features like whether the bed has a removable cover or sun canopy.

Beyond that, if you’re looking for additional products to help keep your puppy healthy and happy, we also have a series of buying guides to help you select the best vet-recommended dog ear cleaner, the dog grooming cutters, the best dog shears for poodle hair, the best hair dryer for dogs, and our guide to finding the brushes for Australian Shepherds.

]]>
The Best Dog Stairs and Steps https://petnewsdaily.com/best-dog-stairs-and-steps/ Sat, 17 Dec 2022 09:44:24 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=1369 Dog stairs and steps may just be the thing you need to keep your pup’s life happy and fulfilled – and if you could ask them what they need to be happy, they’d probably say all they need is you. Unfortunately, just because our dog wants to be everywhere we are doesn’t necessarily mean the world is designed for their 4-legged body. With a good set of dog steps and stairs, though, you can let them hang with you even more.

Our vet advisor, Dr. Chyrle Bonk, looked at all types of dog steps and stairs to determine which is the best option for you and your dog, looking at factors like size, weight capacity, ease of use, and more. She chose the Pet Studio Pine Frame Dog RampSteps for their robust design, ability to convert from ramp to stairs, and more. Read how she chose the top 5.

Best Overall

Pet Studio Pine Frame Dog RampSteps

For the best in dog stairs, look no further than the Pet Studio Pine Frame Dog RampSteps.

While this was Dr. Bonk’s top choice, she also offers a series of her top tips for what to look for in choosing the best dog stairs and steps, a section on who should avoid purchasing them altogether, and she personally selected the best stairs and steps for a variety of specific use cases.

The 5 Best Dog Stairs & Dog Steps

  1. Best OverallPet Studio Pine Frame Dog RampSteps
  2. Best BudgetBest Choice Products Foldable Adjustable, Non-Slip Wide Wooden Pet Stairs
  3. Best for BedPet Gear Chocolate Easy Step III
  4. Best for CarSilly Millie Folding Portable Dog Steps
  5. Best RampPawnotch Adjustable Pet Ramp

Dog Stairs / Steps Compared

Here are our top picks. Compare the ratings and features of different models to find the right one for you.

Editor’s Picks Model Rating Material How Many Steps Weight Capacity
Best Overall Pet Studio Pine Frame Dog RampSteps 4.5 Wood 2 or 3 130 lbs
Best Budget Best Choice Products Foldable Adjustable, Non-Slip Wide Wooden Pet Stairs 4.4 Wood 4 85 lbs
Best for Bed Pet Gear Chocolate Easy Step III 4.4 HDPE Plastic 3 150 lbs
Best for Car Silly Millie Folding Portable Dog Steps 4.4 Plastic 2 300 lbs
Best Ramp Pawnotch Adjustable Pet Ramp 4.6 Wood 0 200 lbs

*Ratings are on a scale of 1 to 5 and based on reviews, feedback, and opinions of actual customers

Who Should Buy Dog Stairs and Steps

  • Small dog parents – When your little one wants to be everywhere you are, it’s hard for him to get left behind so often. When you don’t mind (and encourage) him trailing you everywhere you go, then having a well-placed set of stairs or two in your home just makes sense. This is helpful when he wants to get up in the middle of the night to get a drink and you don’t have to help him in and out of bed with you (you can get an elevated dog bed with stairs to help with this as well), or even if he likes sitting in a higher place so he can see better. You don’t want to have to carry him everywhere and the steps can help you both.
  • Large dog parents – Just because you have a dog who can reach great heights doesn’t mean you will want them to strain themselves doing so. Large breed dogs are more prone to hip dysplasia than smaller dogs due to their hereditary.1 Excessive growth rate may contribute to the problem but even before you see the signs of struggle, giving them an opportunity to climb a ramp or stairs rather than jump and risk injury
  • Aging or arthritic dogs – If you struggle to jump as you get older, just imagine your dog’s poor aching joints as he has to leap more than his own height to get in and out of a car or your orthopedic waterproof dog bed. He wants to be with you and by making accommodations, you’ll allow him to do so for longer.
  • Frequent travelers – If you don’t let your dog on the furniture, but still drive with them often, then you’ll still benefit from the steps that are compatible with your vehicle.

Who Should Not Buy Dog Stairs and Steps

  • Dogs with stricter jumping rules – If your dog isn’t allowed on the furniture, then you won’t need any special equipment to help him get there, of course! When you’re strict with the new couch or covet your bed space, there’s no reason you have to encourage bad behavior by purchasing a set of steps.
  • In-town dogs – When you (and therefore your dog) walk everywhere, there’s no point in a car-assist for your dog, like steps. Bear in mind, you may benefit from one for occasional use if you need to take them further away and that you’ll be able to find compact designs, as well. But some centrally-located pups just won’t need to ever use extra stairs.

Buying Guide: Research Tips From a Veterinarian

Whether you have an elderly or small pup or just want to prevent injuries from jumping, the right set of dog stairs is the way to go. Stairs are great to help dogs that need a little help get up to heights like the bed, couch, or car safely. But before you go stacking up some books, look at what a good set of stairs can do for your dog and consider the following: 

  1. How high you need to go – The height that you’re trying to reach will determine the number of stairs, the height of the stairs, and the incline. Higher heights are going to require more stairs, taller stairs, or a steeper incline. Higher stairs tend to be more unstable as well. So, you’ll want to choose a set of stairs that will safely reach the height you’re reaching without risking toppling over.
  2. Height of stairs and incline – The height of each stair is going to determine how easy the stairs are to use. Taller stairs are going to require a higher step up which may be difficult for older or smaller dogs. A steeper incline may also cause some difficulty and may border on unsafe for some dogs. Select a stair height that your dog can easily manage with an incline that isn’t too steep yet not so low that it takes up too much space in your home.
  3. Hard or soft – Wooden or metal stairs are very durable and sturdy, but they can also be very heavy. Foam stairs, on the other hand, are very easily moved around but they may be too squishy for larger dogs to use. If you’re looking for a portable option, foam stairs may be easier to move around, but if you have a larger dog, wooden or metal stairs are going to hold up better.
  4. Grip – There’s nothing worse than slippery steps, so choose a set of stairs with some traction. Carpet or other fabric is commonly used. Slick wooden surfaces should be avoided to prevent injury. Give bonus points to any set of stairs with removable and washable carpet or fabric coverings.
  5. Stairs vs. ramps – A common question you may run into is whether stairs or a ramp are better for your dog. The simple answer is it depends. Some dogs may be afraid of stairs, so of course, a ramp will work better for them. Ramps will also work better for arthritic dogs that have trouble lifting their legs high enough to use stairs. On the other hand, steps can often be folded down and ramps can take up a lot of space or be hard to maneuver. If you don’t have a lot of room or don’t want to lug a long ramp out of the car each time, stairs may be a better option if your dog can safely use them.
  6. Your space – Measure how high you need the stairs to be. Measure from the floor to the top of your bed, couch, car, etc, to determine how tall the stairs need to be. Then look at the size and health condition of your dog. Larger dogs should have a heavier weight stair and arthritic dogs will need a shorter stair height or ramp. You’ll also want to look at the space you have to put the stairs in. Some stairs are wider to make them more stable, but that means they’ll take up more room. If you have a small space, you may consider a lightweight, portable set of stairs that you can move out of the way when not in use.
  7. Your dog’s ability – Talk to your veterinarian to determine if your dog is healthy enough and has the mobility for stairs first. If your pup has arthritis or other orthopedic issues, they may suggest a ramp instead. Your vet may also recommend a safe and proper stair height for smaller dogs.
  8. Your friends and family – You may also consult friends or family that have used dog stairs and even test out their models if possible. Otherwise, online reviews will tell you a lot about the durability, weight, and ease of use of a particular dog stair product. 

When you’re making sure you how much exercise my dog needs that may involve little road trips –  and that means you’ll also want to make sure he’s secure while you’re out, too. For the Houdini pups who love to run off, you’ll want to make sure you’re also investing in a harness for dogs that escape.

How Much Do They Cost?

Between $80-200

Dog stairs are similar to any other furniture in your home – they have a wide range of costs based on size, material, design, and durability. If your bullmastiff needs robust steps that will get him into your large truck, that’ll naturally be a vastly different cost than a Yorkie that needs assistance to get into bed with you. However, when you take out the outliers of extremes, the chances are you can expect to spend between $80-200 on a good set of steps.

Our Methodology: Why Trust Pet News Daily

As a veterinarian, I’ve seen a lot of problems with dogs’ hips that can be mitigated or helped by having a robust set of steps or stairs. Between my discussions with other veterinarians and pet owners, I’ve seen plenty of evidence to support this, and combined with my own experience, I know just what features you’ll need and which you’ll love. – Dr. Chyrle Bonk, DVM

The Best Dog Stairs and Steps Reviews

1. Best Overall – Pet Studio Pine Frame Dog RampSteps

Best Overall

Pet Studio Pine Frame Dog RampSteps

For the best in dog stairs, look no further than the Pet Studio Pine Frame Dog RampSteps.

The Pet Studio Pine Frame Dog RampSteps features all the best features in dog stairs. The solid wood design and 130-pound weight capacity means that, unless you have a giant breed your dog can use this ramp. (And really, if your giant breed dog wants on the couch, he simply needs to sit.) This folds compactly and is easily stored under your bed or in a closet and the carpet prevents any slipping.

And as if the steps themselves weren’t a solid enough investment, the risk of your dog not trusting steps is all the more mitigated by their ability to convert into a ramp. That way your pup won’t need to worry about his step at all and you’ll appreciate that you can offer your pup options based on his comfort.

Pros
  • Convertible to ramp
  • 2 or 3 stair option
  • Solid and beautiful wood design
Cons
  • Carpet isn’t removable
  • Does not fold flat

2. Best Budget – Best Choice Products Foldable Adjustable, Non-Slip Wide Wooden Pet Stairs

Best Budget

Best Choice Products Foldable Adjustable, Non-Slip Wide Wooden Pet Stairs

The Best Choice Products Wooden Pet Stairs will give your dog the convenience of portability without the big expense.

Your favorite thing about the Best Choice Products Foldable Adjustable, Non-Slip Wide Wooden Pet Stairs may be its low cost, but that’s far from the only thing worth praise. The carpet flows from one step to the next so that your dog won’t slip on his up-and-down jaunt and the sticky leg pads will prevent slipping and scuffing on even the most slippery floors. You can adjust the height from 16.1″ to 19.1″ so you can use it for anything from an outdoor dog bed to a dog couch or even a car.

The MDF and solid wood design ensure there is no give on these steps and that means even your big dog will appreciate them, but the weight capacity is only 85 pounds, so bear that in mind. You’ll also have the option for a taller set of stairs that feature four steps rather than three.

Pros
  • Foldable for storage
  • Adjustable height
  • 3 or 4 step options
Cons
  • Carpet isn’t removable
  • 85lb weight limit

3. Best for Bed – Pet Gear Chocolate Easy Step III

Best for Bed

Pet Gear Chocolate Easy Step III

The Pet Gear Chocolate Easy Step III is ideal for your dog to have easy access to your bed.

The Pet Gear Chocolate Easy Step III is a perfect option if you’re looking for a way to help your dog get in and out of bed each night. The normal bed height is around 25 inches and these stairs top out at that exact measurement. You’ll be able to slide them up against the foot of your bed, or along the side and access suddenly becomes a worry-free occurrence. Even clean-up is a cinch with these; the nonslip carpet on each step is removable and can be simply tossed into the washer.

These stairs also include rubber grips on the bottom to prevent them from sliding across your hardwood floors as your pet uses them and each step is six inches, making them the ideal step for your dog. Assembly is just a few snaps of putting the sides together and in less than 5 minutes, they’re ready to use.

Pros
  • Perfect bed height
  • 2 color options
  • Removable tread is machine washable
Cons
  • 16″ may be too narrow for large dogs
  • Does not fold or flatten

4. Best for Car – Silly Millie Folding Portable Dog Steps

Best for Car

Silly Millie Folding Portable Dog Steps

For a set of pet stairs that will help your dog get in and out of your car with ease, check out the Silly Millie Folding Portable Dog Steps.

The beauty of the Silly Millie Folding Portable Dog Steps is multifaceted. Not only will you be able to use these steps for your dog to gain easy access to your car, but you’ll also be able to use this step stool just about anywhere. It folds so compactly, though, that you may just leave it under the seat, stored completely out of the way. It holds up to 300-lbs so you won’t have any trouble standing on it yourself to reach the top of your car to load your cargo carrier.

At over 21″ wide, even your large breed dog will be comfortable climbing up it, and with the convenient carrying handle, it’s the epitome of portability. Take it with you as you travel and your pup will appreciate those bye-byes even better.

Pros
  • One hand open and close design
  • Lightweight design, 5.75 lbs
  • Waterproof; easy to clean
Cons
  • Lightweight means dogs may not like the give
  • Handle sometimes sticks with folding/unfolding

5. Best Ramp – Pawnotch Adjustable Pet Ramp

Best Ramp

Pawnotch Adjustable Pet Ramp

If you’re looking for a ramp rather than steps and stairs, then you’ll want to check out the Pawnotch Adjustable Pet Ramp.

The Pawnotch Adjustable Pet Ramp is a sturdy ramp that will give your pup an alternative to steps or stairs that he may appreciate. If he’s getting older and it’s time to make some accommodations for his sore joints, this ramp can certainly help him maintain his independence and mobility. And anything that prolongs your dog’s quality of life is a big win. The nonslip carpet will make sure that as he uses it he is safe.

It won’t slip on hardwood or tile, either – its feet feature nonskid rubber pads that also prevent any scratching should it get scooted. – Not that it will move much, the durable and hearty design of solid wood leaves this ramp weighing in at 18 pounds. You can store it flat when it’s not in use, but because of the heft, you probably won’t transport it too regularly.

Pros
  • 14″ – 24″ Adjustable
  • Non-slip carpet
  • 6 height adjustments
Cons
  • Paw traction is not removable
  • Heavy – 18 lbs

Frequently Asked Questions

Is a ramp or stairs better for dogs?

Though we touched a bit on this above, it’s important to remember there’s no right or wrong answer. Anything that helps your dog maintain his mobility and stay active will help him and if he’s scared of the steps, a ramp may be better. If the ramp encourages him to jump, as it does some dogs, then the steps will work better. Ramps may be safer for the dogs that use them, but you can’t always guarantee that your dog will. And the space is no exaggeration; because of the gradual incline, you’ll want, ramps just take up a lot more room than the steps.
Are foam stairs good for dogs?

For some dogs, foam stairs are an excellent option. Your dog may benefit from the soft give for aching joints that foam can provide and you’ll love the ability to pull the cover off these stairs and machine wash. You will want to consider the durability of foam, though, if your dog is a large one. It may break down over time and the give may be a bit too much than the weight capacity of a standard model.
What size dog steps do I need?

You’ll want the steps to match the dog, so measure your pup’s legs when you’re shopping for steps. You should try to find steps that are no more than a couple of inches higher than the length of his legs. Bear in mind that for toy breeds, this may get a bit difficult to find, so you may be better off with a ramp in that case.
What angle should a dog ramp be?

If you do opt for a dog ramp, then you’ll want to make sure it’s gradual enough to prevent any danger. However, you may not need it to be as gradual as you’re expecting. Because dogs walk on four legs rather than two, their center of gravity is far lower and their ramps can be at a steeper angle than a human’s ramp. So the 12″ for every inch in height required for humans is a far longer ramp than your pup needs.2 That means you can keep your pup safe with far less space requirement. For toy breeds, you should allow an incline of about 18-20 degrees, and medium-sized dogs will best handle 22-25 degrees. Just make sure you’re using a ramp that has a non-skid surface to prevent any slips and stumbles.

If the reason for dog stairs and steps is exercise-related and you’re particularly concerned about your dog’s weight, we have a series of resources on that topic as well that you might find helpful. Our puppy size calculator can let you know how big your dog is likely to be, our list of human foods dogs can’t eat can help you figure out what’s safe to feed your dog, our dog sizes by weight chart can help you identify different inflection points in your dog’s growth, and our collection of breed-specific growth charts can help you get a better sense of the average Goldendoodle weight, average great dane weight, average golden retriever weight, average chihuahua weight, or average labrador weight.

]]>
The Best Dog Cooling Mats https://petnewsdaily.com/best-dog-cooling-mats/ Sat, 17 Dec 2022 01:37:00 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=845 When the temperature starts to rise, it’s easy for your beloved pup to get overheated. Puppies, older dogs, and certain breeds may have trouble keeping themselves cool in the heat. The best dog cooling mats help your dog stay comfortable and safe when it’s hot outside.

There are many dog cooling mats available on the market today, and choosing the right product for your pet can be difficult. Because of this, we asked our veterinarian, Dr. Jamie Whittenburg, to help us identify the top choices and she selected the Arf Pets Pet Dog Self Cooling Mat as her top pick.

Our Vet’s Top Pick

Arf Pets Pet Dog Self Cooling Mat

An interior with pressure-activated cooling gel helps this mat pull away body heat for a solid three hours without the use of electricity or water.

While this was Dr. Whittenburg’s top choice, she also offers a series of her top tips for what to look for in choosing the best dog cooling mats, a section on who should avoid purchasing them altogether, and she personally selected the best cooling at for a variety of specific use cases.

The 5 Best Dog Cooling Mats

  1. Best Overall Arf Pets Pet Dog Self-Cooling Mat
  2. Best BudgetPawple Dog Cooling Mat
  3. Best for Large DogsThe Green Pet Shop Dog Cooling Mat’s
  4. Best OutdoorColeman Pet Indoor/Outdoor Cooling Mat
  5. Best Water CoolingSCENEREAL Dog Cooling Mat

Cooling Mats Compared

Here are the top picks from our veterinarian. Compare the ratings and features of different models.

Editor’s Picks Brand Rating Dimensions Material Cooling Method
Best Overall Arf Pets Pet Dog Self Cooling Mat 4.3 27 x 43 nylon gel
Best Budget Buy Pawple Dog Cooling Mat 4.0 32 x 22 vinyl, nylon, foam water
Best Large Dog Cooling Mat The Green Pet Shop Dog Cooling Mat 4.3 43.3 x 27.5 vinyl, plastic gel
Best Outdoor Cooling Mat Coleman Pet Indoor/Outdoor Cooling Mat 4.2 20 x 36 vinyl, plastic gel
Best Water Cooling Mat SCENEREAL Dog Cooling Mat 3.4 35.4 x 23.6 polyvinyl chloride water

*Ratings are on a scale of 1 to 5 and based on reviews, feedback, and opinions of actual customers

Who Should Buy a Dog Cooling Mat

  • Owners of short-nosed breeds — Breeds like bulldogs and pugs that have flattened snouts cannot cool themselves as efficiently as other breeds. Consequently, they can easily overheat.1
  • Owners of dogs with thick or double coats — Huskies, chow chows, and Akitas are only a few of the dog breeds bred for cold weather that could have trouble staying cool in hot temperatures. Breeds with double coats have two layers of fur and can get too warm as well. Breeds designed to live in cold weather may have a double coat, as do some working dogs like Australian shepherds, golden retrievers, and Labrador retrievers. Double coats have twice the fur, leading to twice the insulation and heat.2
  • Owners of a puppy or senior dog — Puppies and senior dogs cannot control their body temperature as well as dogs in their prime. The young and old may need extra help staying comfortable and safe.3
  • Owners of an overweight dog or one with a dark coat — Excess weight makes a dog work harder to move, leading to excessive panting. In the heat, that puts them in danger of heat stroke.4 Dogs with dark coats can also get warmer than average, putting them at risk for heart problems too.
  • Hot climates — If you live where the temperatures get into the upper digits, your dog might need extra help staying cool, no matter his breed.

Who Should Not Buy a Dog Cooling Mat

  • Mild climate — If you live in a mild or moderate climate, you probably don’t need a dog cooling mat unless you own a breed that’s prone to overheating.
  • Owners of dogs who are primarily indoors — A dog who lives primarily in an indoor, climate-controlled environment may rarely be in an environment over 75-degrees Fahrenheit.

If a cooling dog mat isn’t right for your dog, you can you may want to check out one of our other guides to find the right bed for your dog, such as our guide to comparing the best waterproof dog beds, our breakdown of the best outdoor dog beds buying guide, our list of elevated dog beds, or our guide to evaluating the best dog couches.

Buying Guide: Research Tips from a Veterinarian

To assist a dog that will be staying outside during hot weather, cooling mats wick heat away or apply a cool substance like water to cool the dog. There are many options available, so it is important to evaluate your pet’s unique situation and needs before you purchase a dog cooling mat. Consider the following when making your decision.

  1. Cooling method —My favorite (and the most common) type of dog cooling mat is the gel variety. These mats contain a special type of pressure-sensing gel that absorbs your dog’s body heat. Gel mats do not require refrigeration, batteries, or electricity. Water mats cool the dog using cold water. They’re not as convenient as gel mats and are more likely to burst. After the dog uses the pad for some time, it will need to be refilled with cold water, too. Ice cooling mats must be placed in the refrigerator or freezer prior to use. These mats will also need to be re-refrigerated or refrozen after one use. It may be necessary to place a blanket or towel over an ice mat to prevent a mat that’s too cold from damaging your dog’s skin. Care should be taken, especially with small or thin-coated dogs.
  2.  Size — Before purchasing a dog cooling mat, you will need to consider your dog’s size and their typical body position when they lay down. If a cooling mat is sold by the weight of the dog only, it is essential to obtain actual measurements and compare them with your dog. A slim dog may require a much larger pad than the one that correlates with their weight.
  3. Cleaning requirements — Some dog mats quickly accumulate hair and unpleasant odors, and it is vital to be able to clean them. Mats made of nonporous materials are easier to clean because they can simply be wiped down. These materials do not absorb odors as readily as cloth-like materials. However, mats with a washable cover tend to be the easiest to clean because the cover can be removed and cleaned in the washing machine.
  4. Durability — Cooling mats are only designed to withstand a dog lying on them. While some brands are more durable than others, cooling mats are not a good option for destructive chewers.
  5. Additional features — Cooling mats with a nonslip base offer a safe, sturdy surface when on a hard surface, including tile, hardwood, or linoleum floors. The nonslip base keeps the mat in place when your dog is getting comfortable or getting up from the mat. Also, take note of the mat’s cooling time. Most dog cooling mats claim to cool for two to four hours. However, the exact length of time the mat stays cool depends on the ambient temperature, the mat’s material, and the dog.

It’s vital to remember that dogs cannot control their body temperature by sweating the way humans do. Dogs have a very small number of sweat glands located in their footpads, but these are not effective for body cooling. When hot, a dog will pant in order to dissipate heat.

Please note that if your dog is showing signs of hyperthermia (0verheating) or heat stroke, a cooling pad is not sufficient. Heat stroke in dogs is very serious and often fatal. Take your dog to the nearest veterinarian if he has been in the heat and:

  • is breathing rapidly or heavily
  • has dry, tacky gums or pale gums
  • is very tired or disoriented
  • has a seizure

Cooling mats can be used in an indoor dog house, back porch, or wherever your dog likes to relax when he gets warm.

How Much Do They Cost?

Between $20 and $75

Most dog cooling mats cost between $35 and $70. The price typically reflects the materials used and the mat’s size. Large gels mats are at the mid to top of the price range, depending on their size. Water mats tend to be less expensive, especially if they’re made for small dogs. The mat’s size plays an important factor in the price—the bigger the mat, the higher the price.

Our Methodology: Why Trust Pet News Daily

As a veterinarian, I’ve seen the dangers of overheated dogs. Many of these products were chosen based on the features I know to make a difference in a dog’s comfort and temperature control. High-quality gels that absorb body heat and durable materials that can withstand the wear and tear of an active dog both factored into the decision-making process. I also looked for mats that came in several sizes to fit dogs of different breeds. — Dr. Jamie Whittenburg

The Best Dog Cooling Mat Reviews

1. Best Overall – Arf Pets Pet Dog Self Cooling Mat

Our Vet’s Top Pick

Arf Pets Pet Dog Self Cooling Mat

An interior with pressure-activated cooling gel helps this mat pull away body heat for a solid three hours without the use of electricity or water.

The Arf Pets Pet Dog Self Cooling Mat caught Dr. Whittenburg’s attention for the combination of cooling materials, quality, and durability. This particular model is ideal for dogs weighing less than 80 pounds. However, it comes in five sizes, recommended by weight (so make sure to get the measurements before committing). The model designed for 50 to 80-pound dogs measures 27 by 43 inches.

The cooling gel center is activated by your dog’s body weight, cooling him as soon as he lies down. It keeps pups cool for three hours and only needs 15 minutes to “recharge.” The nylon exterior and gel interior are both made of non-toxic materials. Should your dog chew or damage it, no toxins will enter your dog’s system. The nylon resists moisture and easily wipes clean, too.

Pros
  • Weight-activated, cooling gel center
  • Cools for three hours
  • Non-toxic materials on the interior and exterior
  • Recharges in only 15 minutes
Cons
  • Some dogs repelled by the gel’s odor
  • Fabric can rip from scratching

2. Best Budget – Pawple Dog Cooling Mat

Best Budget Buy

Pawple Dog Cooling Mat

This mat offers a cushy bottom layer for extra comfort while cooling.

The Pawple Dog Cooling Mat provides both cooling and cushioning at an affordable price. This water mat comes in three sizes to help you get the right fit for your dog. Water goes in through an adjustable air valve. A foam interior helps extend the cooling power of the water while adding cushioning for older or arthritic dogs.

The tear-resistant fabric wipes clean, but it’s non-toxic, too. Everything from the foam on the inside to the sturdy exterior are safe should your dog ingest them. The Pawple is also approved for indoor or outdoor use.

Pros
  • Foam center adds cushioning
  • Water cooling lets you adjust the temperature
  • Non-toxic materials on the interior and exterior
Cons
  • Must refill through a small valve
  • Time-consuming to empty and fill

3. Best for Large Dogs – The Green Pet Shop Dog Cooling Mat’s

Best Large Dog Cooling Mat

The Green Pet Shop Dog Cooling Mat

Simple gel cooling and a size that fits large breeds make this a mat for the over-sized pup in your life.

The Green Pet Shop Dog Cooling Mat’s XL mat can cool the large breeds that struggle in the heat. The XL size measures 27.5 x 43 inches. However, it comes in five sizes, so small dogs can get the same benefits in a mat that fits their body. This self-cooling mat doesn’t require water, refrigeration, or electricity. The pressure-activated gel naturally absorbs body heat, pulling it away from the dog for up to three hours. It recharges in 15 to 20 minutes, so your dog doesn’t have to go long before he’s comfortable again.

This particular mat isn’t designed for extra cushioning, as it’s only 0.2 inches thick. If your dog needs some cushioning, it can go on top of a dog bed, sofa, or another soft surface. The mat is also made of non-toxic materials.

Pros
  • Pressure-activated gel absorbs body heat
  • XL size accommodates dogs weighing 80+ pounds
  • Lasts 3 hours and recharges in 15 to 20 minutes
Cons
  • May shrink over time
  • The surface may be too slippery for older dogs

4, Best Outdoor – Coleman Pet Indoor/Outdoor Cooling Mat

Best Outdoor Cooling Mat

Coleman Pet Indoor/Outdoor Cooling Mat

This mat lets dogs stay cool while camping, at the beach, or on a trip to the park.

Coleman is a well-known brand in the outdoor/camping industry. The Coleman Pet Indoor/Outdoor Cooling Mat meets the brand’s reputation for durable outdoor gear. This model comes in four colors and two sizes with a vinyl-like exterior material. Each mat has chambers filled with cooling gel. The gel maintains a temperature that’s five to ten degrees cooler than room temperature.

The chambered design creates seams that make the mat easier to fold, transport, and store. It doesn’t offer extra cushioning, so you may need a dog bed or another soft surface underneath it for older or arthritic dogs.

Pros
  • Cooling gel-filled chambers
  • 4 colors
  • Durable, vinyl-like exterior
  • Easy to fold for transport and storage
Cons
  • Narrow widths
  • Sharp claws may puncture the exterior material

5. Best Water Cooling – SCENEREAL Dog Cooling Mat

Best Water Cooling Mat

SCENEREAL Dog Cooling Mat

This mat’s durable PVC exterior lets dogs chill and relax.

The SCENEREAL Dog Cooling Mat comes in two sizes and two exterior design patterns. Both sizes have a small valve through which cool water can enter and fill the mat. Once full, the PVC exterior material cools your dog. You can adjust the fill level to add some extra cushioning or keep the water level low to reduce the risk of a puncture.

A chambered design folds easily when in storage or for travel. Keep in mind that the water stays cooler if kept in the shade and laid on a cool surface like shaded grass or an indoor location. Placing the mat on hot cement quickly heats the water and makes the mat more at risk for puncture due to the rough surface.

Pros
  • Chambered design is easy to store
  • Adjustable fill level
  • Durable, PVC exterior
Cons
  • Can puncture if placed on a hard surface
  • Dogs may require time to get used to it

Frequently Asked Questions

Are cooling mats for dogs effective?

Dog cooling mats are effective when used correctly. For example, a mat will stay cooler longer when placed in the shade or a cool area. Gel models are effective as long as they’re given enough time to recharge after becoming warm. The key is to use the mat as directed.
How long do dog cooling mats work?

The cooling time depends on a number of factors, including the dog’s size and weight, the mat type, and the room or outdoor temperature. Gel mats offer the most consistent cooling. Water and refrigerated mats will get warm faster when used in hotter temperatures. They could last anywhere from 30 minutes to two hours or more, depending on the temperature and where they’re used (indoors or out).
What is the best cooling mat for dogs?

The Arf Pets Pet Dog Self Cooling Mat is one of the best on the market. Its pressure-activated cooling gel works within a comfortable design and durable construction.
Can my dog sleep on a cooling mat?

Your dog can sleep on a cooling mat. However, most mats get warm after three or four hours. Your dog may wake up in the middle of the night restless and hot. You can refresh the mat or offer some other type of cooling option at that point.
]]>
The Best Dog Car Seat Covers https://petnewsdaily.com/best-dog-car-seat-covers/ Sat, 17 Dec 2022 01:33:11 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=923 Dog car seat covers are a great way to protect your car’s interior from damage and messes that can result from transporting your dog in your car. Taking your dog on adventures is so much fun and sometimes we have to transport our dog places, like to the vet. Unfortunately, between mud, claws, hair, and bathroom accidents, our canine friends can be rough on the inside of our cars. Car seat covers are made from heavy-duty, easy-to-clean materials that protect your car from damage.

Our vet advisor, Dr. Danielle Morosco, looked over dozens of dog car seat covers and narrowed the options down to only the best of the best, which we’ve listed here. Dr. Morosco’s top pick is the Meadowlark Dog Seat Cover. Standout features include the seat cover’s complete protection of the backseat, including headrests and door protection, and the fact that the seat cover is machine washable.

Our Vet’s Top Pick

Meadowlark Dog Seat Covers

For the best in dog seat covers, look no further than the Meadowlark Dog Seat Cover.

While this was Dr. Morosco’s top choice, she also offers a series of her top tips for what to look for in choosing the best dog car seat cover, a section on who should avoid purchasing them altogether, and she personally selected the best covers for a variety of specific use cases.

The 5 Best Dog Car Seat Covers

Car Seat Covers Compared

Editor’s Picks Model Rating Waterproof Machine Washable Non-Slip Fit
Best Overall Meadowlark Dog Seat Covers 4.6 Universal
Best Budget Buy URPOWER 4-in-1 Convertible Dog Car Seat Cover 4.5 Universal
Best Dog Car Hammock Plush Paws Pet Car Seat Protector 4.7 Bench Seat
Best for Leather Seats iBuddy Dog Car Seat Covers 4.8 Bench Seat
Best for Front Seats Active Pets Front Seat Dog Cover 4.7 Front Seat

*Ratings are on a scale of 1 to 5 and based on reviews, feedback, and opinions of actual customers

Who Should Buy a Dog Car Seat Cover

  • Owners who love to take their dog on adventures – Taking dogs places where they can get wet or messy, like to the beach or on trails is a lot of fun, but it gets dirty. A dog car seat cover is a great way to protect your car from dirt and water, especially if you opt for a waterproof option. The dog seat cover gets messy instead of your car, but it can be cleaned with a vacuum and damp cloth, or even by just throwing it in the washer.
  • Owners of dogs that shed a lot – All dogs can shed quite a bit, but if you have a long-haired or double-coated breed, you know that they shed on a whole different level.1 You also know the frustration associated with trying to make sure that everything you own isn’t covered in dog hair. A dog seat cover can help with that, at least on the inside of your car. Let the inevitable hair cover the seat cover instead, then wipe or vacuum it clean.
  • Owners of dogs that like to scratch at the seat – Dog nails can be rough on car upholstery, especially if your dog likes to scratch to get comfortable.2  A soft, comfortable dog car seat cover may prevent scratching in the first place. Even if it doesn’t, though, seat covers are made from heavy-duty fabric that can stand up to your dog’s claws.

Who Should Not Buy a Dog Car Seat Cover

  • Owners who crate their dogs in the car – If your dog is in a crate or carrier when he or she is in the car anyway, then there’s really no point in having a seat cover.
  • Owners of dogs who use booster seats in the car – If your dog uses a booster seat in the car, that limits the spread of mess and keeps them off the seat, so you probably don’t need a seat cover.

Buying Guide: Research Tips from a Veterinarian

As a veterinarian, I’m frequently asked about how to choose a high-quality car seat cover for dogs. I always recommend that people check out the reviews and ask friends and family about the best dog car seat covers. Beyond that, however, there are a few other things to keep in mind:

  1. Measure your seats – Although most covers advertise a universal fit, be sure to measure your seats before purchasing dog car seat covers.
  2. Consider ease of cleaning – Look for covers that are waterproof and washable to ensure easy clean-up. Ideally, you should be able to throw your dog seat cover in the washing machine (though don’t anticipate being able to machine dry). At a minimum, though, you should be able to clean off any messes by vacuuming the seat cover or wiping it down with a damp cloth.
  3. Remember safety features – Choose a cover with a nonslip backing to keep your dog safe during transport. Also, make sure you choose a dog seat cover that allows you to clip into the seat belt so that you can use a car harness for your dog. Many dog car seat covers even come with tethers that attach to your dog’s harness and clip into the seat belt, so you don’t have to buy a separate tether.
  4. Select the right material – Choose a cover with synthetic material as these are going to be the most durable fabric type. It will stand up to liquid messes, doggy nails, and more.
  5. Remember your pup’s nose – Avoid covers where reviewers mention a strong chemical smell. If it seems strong to people, it will be positively overwhelming for your poor dog, thanks to dogs’ powerful noses.

Having waterproof, easy-to-clean gear is great for all aspects of your dog’s life, both at home and away. And don’t forget that you may want an inescapable dog harness to go with these seat covers to make sure that your dog, as well as your interior, stays safe during car rides.

How Much Do They Cost?

Between $20 and $70

Generally, you can expect to pay between about $20 and $70 for a quality dog car seat cover. The main factor that affects the price is size. For example, single-seat covers are less expensive than covers designed to protect bench seats. For a bench seat cover, I would expect to pay $35 at the absolute minimum for a quality seat cover. If you have an especially large vehicle, you should expect to pay $60 to $70 for a quality seat cover that will go over your entire bench seat.

Our Methodology: Why Trust Pet News Daily

As a veterinarian, I see a lot of different car setups for my patients, including a wide variety of seat covers. The products I’ve recommended here were chosen based on not just my experience as a veterinarian and the conversations I’ve had with my patients, but also on my own experience as a dog owner. To choose my recommendations, I considered waterproofness, ease of cleaning, scratch resistance, and more. All of the dog car seat covers listed here should be able to stand up to all kinds of damage to keep your car seats safe, clean, and dry. – Dr. Danielle Morosco, DVM

The Best Dog Car Seat Cover Reviews

1. Best Overall – Meadowlark Dog Seat Cover

Our Vet’s Top Pick

Meadowlark Dog Seat Covers

For the best in dog seat covers, look no further than the Meadowlark Dog Seat Cover.

The Meadowlark Dog Seat Cover is an excellent all-in-one dog seat cover that provides complete protection for your backseat. It even has side panels that protect your car doors and comes with slipcovers to protect your headrests. The design is also multi-functional, so you can use it in different configurations as needed. You can use it hammock style or let the front panels down so the cover hugs the shape of the seat. You can even put just one panel down, which allows a passenger to sit on the seat while leaving the other side hammock style for your pup. Finally, you can hook the dog seat cover over the rear of the seat and use the seat cover to protect your trunk/cargo space.

Whichever configuration you go with, the non-slip bottom, seat anchors, and adjustable straps keep the seat cover in place. It comes in X-Large and Standard sizes to fit a variety of car sizes and Black and Beige colors to match your car’s upholstery.

The Meadowlark Dog Seat Cover is waterproof and machine washable, so it contains messes well and is easy to clean when dirty. It has four layers and double stitching for maximum durability. It’s padded for your dog’s comfort and comes with a seat belt for your dog’s safety.

Pros
  • Multiple configurations
  • Headrests and door protection
  • Waterproof and nonslip
  • Machine washable
Cons
  • Unrestrained dogs may be able to step over door protectors
  • Can be more complicated to set up than others

2. Best Budget – URPOWER 4-in-1 Convertible Dog Car Seat Cover

Best Budget Buy

URPOWER 4-in-1 Convertible Dog Car Seat Cover

The URPOWER 4-in-1 Convertible Dog Car Seat Cover will keep your car clean without cleaning out your wallet.

Like the Meadowlark Dog Seat Cover, the URPOWER 4-in-1 Convertible Dog Car Seat Cover features a convertible design, though the possible configurations look a little different. Similar to the top pick, it can be used in hammock and cargo liner configurations. However, it can also be used as a front seat cover or, by detaching the entire front panel, in a bench-style configuration. (That last configuration is also great if you have kids that like to put their dirty shoes on the back  of your car seats.)

Also like the Meadowlark Dog Seat Cover, this dog car seat cover features door protection, though it doesn’t come with headrest covers. It does have a couple of neat features that the Meadowlark does not though. For one, there’s a mesh panel that lines up between your car’s front two seats for ventilation and so you and your dog can see each other during your rides. Second, there are a couple of built-in storage pockets where you can keep small items that you might need for your dog, like their leash, clean-up bags, or a water bottle and collapsible bowl.

The URPOWER 4-in-1 Convertible Dog Car Seat Cover comes in X-Large and Standard sizes to suit cars, trucks, and SUVs. It also comes in four different colors, so there’s sure to be one to suit your tastes. The 600D Oxford fabric is 100% waterproof, though the cover is not machine washable. Seat anchors, adjustable straps, and the non-slip backing keep the cover in place. Padding keeps your dog comfortable.

Pros
  • 100% waterproof
  • Converts to front seat cover or trunk cover
  • Good for trucks and SUVs
  • Comes with a seatbelt
Cons
  • Not machine washable
  • May not stand up to chewers and large, rambunctious dogs

3. Best Hammock – Plush Paws Pet Car Seat Protector

Best Dog Car Hammock

Plush Paws Pet Car Seat Protector

If you’re looking for a simple, hammock-style dog seat cover, look no further than the Plush Paws Pet Car Seat Protector.

The Plush Paws Pet Car Seat Protector doesn’t have a bunch of different configurations like our last two recommendations, but if you only want and need a hammock-style seat cover, that’s just fine. It still has all the essential features that you need, like padding, non-slip backing, and seat anchors. This car seat protector doesn’t offer any kind of door protection, but it does have adjustable side flaps that protect the sides of your seats. It’s also waterproof and machine washable, and it’s even chemical-free.

The Plush Paws Pet Car Seat Protector comes in Small, Regular, and Extra Large sizes, as well as Black, Grey, and Tan color options. It comes with two car harnesses to keep your dog safe while you travel. Plush Paws even provides a lifetime warranty.

Pros
  • Tear-resistant and waterproof
  • Machine washable
  • Includes 2 harnesses for added safety and support
Cons
  • Not as versatile as other options
  • No door protection

4. Best for Leather Seats – iBuddy Dog Car Seat Cover

Best for Leather Seats

iBuddy Dog Car Seat Covers

To protect your car’s leather seats, you’ve got to have the iBuddy Dog Car Seat Cover.

To protect your leather seats, you need a full-coverage dog car seat cover like the iBuddy Dog Car Seat Cover. The hammock-style design allows for full coverage to protect your leather seats and door panels. You can also leave the side panels down for the hammock configuration to protect your seats while also giving easy access to the sides of the seat cover. To further help prevent messes, this seat cover is waterproof and made by hot pressing instead of sewing to prevent seepage of liquids through needle holes.

Other handy features include the front mesh window that allows you to see your dog and your dog to see you. This can be great for dogs with car anxiety, as they can look to you for reassurance. The mesh window unzips on one side to allow you to reach back to your dog without having to reach over the seat cover. Another great feature is the two pockets which can be used to store small items that your dog needs. Seat anchors, headrest straps, and non-slip backing ensure that the cover stays in place without damaging your leather seats. It has no chemical smell and stands up to claws, even at the mesh window.

The seat cover is available in Standard and Truck sizes to work with whatever size car you have. It comes in Gray, Brown, and Blue color options.

Pros
  • Mesh window for ventilation and pockets for storage
  • Waterproof and machine washable
  • Superior protection for leather seats
Cons
  • The window is a weak point in the construction
  • Headrest straps may be too long for smaller vehicles

5. Best for Front Seats – Active Pets Front Seat Dog Cover

Best for Front Seats

Active Pets Front Seat Dog Cover

If you like your dog up front with you, the Active Pets Front Seat Dog Cover is a must-have.

Finally, if you have a two-seater or just prefer having your dog in the passenger seat, you need the Active Pets Front Seat Dog Cover. While all the other seat covers we’ve recommended here are for bench seats (though the URPOWER 4-in-1 Convertible Dog Car Seat Cover has a front seat configuration), the Active Pets Front Seat Dog Cover is specifically designed for front seats. It has a top strap that wraps around the headrest and a second strap that wraps around the back of the seat to secure the cover in place. The cover also extends down the sides and front of the seat for extra protection. It’s designed to fit seats in any car, truck, or SUV.

This seat cover is not machine washable, but it is waterproof and easy to clean. Simply wipe or vacuum up any messes that occur. In fact, this seat cover has a four-layer design. Those layers include a nonslip rubber backing, cotton padding, and not one, but two waterproof barriers. As far as appearance, the main color is black, but you can choose between Orange, Pink, Black, and Blue trim options.

Pros
  • Nonslip rubber backing, cotton padding & 2 waterproof barriers
  • Easy to wipe clean or vacuum
  • Covers extend down the sides of front seats
Cons
  • No door protection
  • Only covers the front seat
  • Not machine washable

Frequently Asked Questions

Do dog car seat covers work?

Dog car seat covers are an effective way for keeping hair off your car. To prevent damage, however, you need to make sure you’re buying a dog car seat cover made from the right material. Waterproof options, like the ones we’ve recommended here, are great for preventing stains from mud, drool, urine, and more. Car seat covers made from thick, heavy-duty fabric will protect from damage from claws or even teeth.

Are car hammocks safe for dogs?

Car hammocks are no more dangerous for dogs than the seat alone. In fact, between blocking the floor gap and non-slip materials, car hammocks can help prevent your dog from falls that can hurt them. However, a car hammock alone is not sufficient protection for your dog when riding in the car. To do that, you’ll need a way to keep your dog tethered in the car, like a seatbelt car harness.3 Fortunately, most car hammocks have slots in them that allow you to access the seatbelt for safe harnessing. Many even come with a tether to attach your dog’s car harness to the seatbelt.

How do I keep my car dog hair free?

A seat cover is the best way to keep dog hair off of your car. Instead of all over your seats, the hair ends up on the cover, which can then be wiped off or, in some cases, machine washed. To cut down on the amount of hair on the cover, give your dog a thorough brushing before you put them in the car. If any hair manages to find its way on your seats or car floor anyway, you can use a vacuum to remove loose hairs. For any stubborn hairs that still cling, you can use a lint roller or a special rubber brush designed for hair removal.

How can I protect my car from my dog?

A waterproof, scratch-proof seat cover is the single best way to protect your car from your dog. It creates a barrier between your dog and your car so the cover takes the messes rather than your seats. It also limits the spread of drool or urine that might otherwise spill or drip off the seat, as well as pet hair by blocking its ability to be blown around the car by your AC. For the most protection, make sure you choose a dog seat cover that also protects your car’s doors.

[/FAQ]

]]>
The Best Dog Blankets https://petnewsdaily.com/best-dog-blankets/ Sat, 17 Dec 2022 01:20:57 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=1012 Are you looking for the best dog blankets? Whether you want a spare blanket to keep in the car, a blanket for your sofa, or simply an extra blanket for your dog’s bed, there are loads of different options available.

Our vet advisor, Dr. Danielle Morosco, has selected the very best dog blankets out there for you to choose from. Her top pick, the PupProtector Waterpoof Blanket, comes in a range of styles to match your home decor … plus it’s machine-washable for easy cleaning.

Our Vet’s Top Pick

PupProtector Waterproof Blanket

Looking for a durable, waterproof blanket that looks and feels great too? This soft blanket is made from plush faux fur and microsuede, so it’s super-soft.

While this was Dr. Morosco’s top choice, she also offers a series of her top tips for what to look for in choosing the best dog blankets, a section on who should avoid purchasing them altogether, and she personally selected the best blankets for a variety of specific use cases.

The 5 Best Dog Blankets

  1. Best OverallPupProtector Waterproof Blanket
  2. Best BudgetWaterproof Blanket Furniture Protector Pawsse
  3. Best Chew ProofMax and Neo Waterproof Dog Blanket
  4. Best WaterproofMambe Silky Waterproof Blanket
  5. Best WeightedPawfect Blanket Weighted Premium Hypoallergenic

Dog Blankets Compared

Here are the top picks from our veterinarian. Compare the ratings and features of different models.

Editor’s Picks Model Rating Size Material Weight Machine washable?
Best Overall PupProtector Waterproof Blanket 4.5 60″ x 50″ Plush faux fur and microsuede 3.85lbs
Best Budget Buy Waterproof Blanket Furniture Protector Pawsse 4.6 50″ x 30″ Plush micro fleece and Sherpa fleece 0.99lbs
Best Chew Proof Max and Neo Waterproof Dog Blanket 4.6 58″ x 50″ Soft fleece and waterproof nylon 1.81lbs
Best Waterproof Mambe Silky Waterproof Blanket 4.6 60″ x 60″ Long-fiber fleece and waterproof backing 3lbs
Best Puzzle Toy Pawfect Blanket Weighted Premium Hypoallergenic 4.8 40″ x 47″ Minky fleece 6lbs

*Ratings are on a scale of 1 to 5 and based on reviews, feedback, and opinions of actual customers

Who Should Buy a Dog Blanket

  • New dog parents who are just getting set up – Even if you have a nice plush dog bed, a blanket gives your pooch extra comfort.
  • Anyone who wants to protect their sofa and/or bed – A dog blanket is a great way to avoid mud (and puppy pee) from getting on your furniture (if you are having issues with accidents check out the best products for dealing with it in our puppy supply checklist).
  • Owners of anxious dogs – Heavier blankets (or even weighted ones) can be very calming for an anxious pet.1

Who Should Not Buy a Dog Blanket

  • Pet parents who can’t easily keep clean the blanket – If you don’t have easy access to a washing machine, opt for a small dog blanket that you can take to the laundry mat or wash by hand.
  • Dog owners who already have blankets galore – If you already have blankets on the sofa, in the car, and so on, and they’re still in good condition, you may not need another.

Buying Guide: Research Tips From a Veterinarian

As a veterinarian, I often get asked for recommendations about the best dog blankets. While most dog blankets will be fine to use, it’s a good idea to do your research before buying, as some blankets can be quite expensive. Ask family and friends for their recommendations, as well as checking out reviews.

  1. Consider opting for a waterproof blanket – Many dog blankets are waterproof, and even if you don’t expect accidents, a waterproof blanket can be very handy. For instance, you could use it to protect your car seats if your dog’s been for a swim.
  2. Look carefully at the blanket’s material – Fabrics like silk and microsuede won’t pick up as much pet hair as fabrics like corduroy or velour.2 You’ll also want to pick a blanket that’s machine-washable for easy cleaning.
  3. Think about the size and color of blanket you want – Many blankets are versatile and suitable for use on your bed, couch, or car. Think about where you’ll normally want to keep the blanket and whether it’ll look good there.
  4. If your dog is a keen chewer, get a chew-proof blanket – Also, make sure the blanket doesn’t have stuffing or beads that he could ingest.3

If you’re thinking about your dog’s comfort in bed, you may also want to check out our dog bed buying guides, including our list of the best waterproof beds for your dog, list of the best outdoor beds for your dog, list of the best-elevated beds for your dog, and our list of the best sofa couch beds for your dog.

How Much Do They Cost?

Between $20 and $120

Most dog blankets will cost somewhere between $20 and $120. As you might expect, the bigger the blanket, the more expensive it will be. Blankets at the higher end of this range will normally be more durable or have special features, like being weighted. However, keep in mind that sometimes you’re paying more for design or a brand name, so do shop around if you’re looking for a good bargain. Very cheap blankets are unlikely to be waterproof and might well be too small to be useful, so think carefully about opting for a dog blanket that costs significantly under $20.

Our Methodology: Why Trust Pet News Daily

As a veterinarian, I have seen a very wide range of dog blankets in use and talked to many pet owners about their pets’ favorites. I’ve chosen these products based on my professional experience as a veterinarian, while also keeping in mind the material and value for money. While a dog blanket might seem like a simple purchase, if you want a waterproof or chew-proof blanket, you need to make sure the material is suitable. As well as considering the material, I’ve picked products that are machine-washable so they’re easy to keep clean. – Dr. Danielle Morosco, DVM

The Best Dog Blanket Reviews

1. Best Overall – PupProtector Waterproof Blanket

Our Vet’s Top Pick

PupProtector Waterproof Blanket

Looking for a durable, waterproof blanket that looks and feels great too? This soft blanket is made from plush faux fur and microsuede, so it’s super-soft.

The PupProtector Waterproof Blanket is a fantastic choice for any dog and home. It comes in a range of styles to suit your home, and is double-sided, with plush faux fur on one side and ultra-soft microsuede on the other. It’s a nice large blanket, at 60″ by 50″, that would look great on any sofa or bed.

Although it looks rather more fashionable than many waterproof blankets, the PupProtector is indeed waterproof. It has an internal lining to prevent liquid from getting through from one side to the other. If it does get wet or grubby, you can easily machine wash it on a cold cycle.

Pros
  • Several stylish designs available
  • Cozy, plush blanket
  • Double-sided with plush faux fur and ultra-soft microsuede
  • Many reviewers said their dogs loved this blanket
Cons
  • Needs to be air-dried; can’t go in the tumble dryer
  • Pricier than many other blankets

2. Best Budget – Waterproof Blanket Furniture Protector Pawsse

Best Budget Buy

Waterproof Blanket Furniture Protector Pawsse

This budget-friendly blanket is lovely and soft, with thick fleece on one side and plush sherpa on the other. It’s sure to be comfy and warm for your dog.

The Waterproof Blanket Furniture Protector Pawsse is a great blanket that definitely won’t break the bank. It’s available in a range of colors and is double-sided, with a waterproof layer in the middle so that moisture can’t get through from one side to the other.

It’s available in four different sizes: obviously, the larger the size you want, the more it’ll cost, so opt for a small size if you’re on a very tight budget. The blanket can be machine washed on a gentle cycle.

Pros
  • Multiple sizes and colors available
  • Thick fleece on the top, plush sherpa backing on the bottom
  • Double-sided
  • Budget-friendly
Cons
  • Might shed quite a bit of fuzz the first few uses
  • Won’t dry well in a tumble dryer

3. Best Chew Proof – Max and Neo Waterproof Dog Blanket

Best Chew Proof

Max and Neo Waterproof Dog Blanket

When you buy this soft, multi-use blanket, the manufacturers give another blanket to a dog shelter in the USA.

The Max and Neo Waterproof Dog Blanket is a great all-around option that you can use all year long. The fleece side is warm and comfortable, and the waterproof nylon side will help keep your dog cool in summer. It also works well as a car seat cover.

For each blanket purchased, the Max and Neo company donates a dog blanket to a dog rescue in the USA, so you’ll not only be treating your pooch, you’ll be helping out a dog in real need of some extra comfort.

Pros
  • 2 sizes available
  • Soft sherpa fleece on top, waterproof nylon underneath
  • Blanket donated for each blanket sold
  • Soft and durable, even after multiple washes
  • Can also be tumble dryed
Cons
  • Nylon backing may make the blanket slide
  • May not stand up to aggressive chewing

4. Best Waterproof – Mambe Silky Waterproof Blanket

Best Waterproof

Mambe Silky Waterproof Blanket

This stylish blanket makes a great waterproof throw for your sofa. It comes in a range of colors and sizes and even has a lifetime guarantee.

Check Price

The Mambe Silky Waterproof Blanket is a high-quality waterproof blanket that’s available in a range of different colors and sizes. It’s made in the USA and has a lifetime guarantee. It’ll protect against any spills and moisture, including puppy pee, due to its internal waterproof membrane.

It’s a comfy, soft, thick throw that humans and dogs alike will enjoy. Because it comes in a range of sizes and colors, you could get several to cover different pieces of furniture or areas in your home and car. All the blankets are sewn in the USA and are machine-washable and machine-dryable.

Pros
  • Great range of colors and sizes
  • Waterproof even for large volumes of liquid
  • Made in the USA
  • Lifetime guarantee
Cons
  • Take a while to dry after washing
  • Makes a slight crinkly noise when it moves

5. Best Weighted – Pawfect Blanket Weighted Premium Hypoallergenic

Best Weighted Blanket

Pawfect Blanket Weighted Premium Hypoallergenic

Looking for a blanket that will help comfort your pet if they’re anxious? This is a great choice.

The Pawfect Blanket Weighted Premium Hypoallergenic is a weighted blanket for dogs that uses soft minky fleece. It’ll help your dog to feel safe and secure, as though you’re hugging them. Just like humans, dogs can be deeply comforted by the gentle pressure of a weighted blanket.4

To make it heavy, the blanket contains tiny glass beads. Obviously, it’s important your dog doesn’t ingest these, so do make sure you supervise your pet while they’re using the blanket. Unlike others, this blanket isn’t fully waterproof, but it is water-resistant against small amounts of moisture.

Pros
  • Comforts anxious dogs
  • Range of colors and sizes available
  • Soft minky fleece is comfortable and snuggly
Cons
  • Water-resistant but not fully waterproof
  • Some pets may tear and ingest the filling

Frequently Asked Questions

What type of blanket is best for dogs?

There are loads of different blankets available for dogs. Ideally, you want to pick a blanket that’s waterproof to help protect your furniture or carpet from any accidents. You’ll also want a strong, durable blanket that can withstand being chewed a bit.
Should dogs have blankets?

Yes. Although your dog is protected by their fur, they’ll still likely need some extra warmth in the winter. Plus, a blanket is a great way to protect your furniture or car seats from your dog. It also gives them something comfier to lie on than the floor or ground.
Do dogs get cold at night in the house?

Even if dogs are kept indoors, they can still get cold at night. If you’re snuggled up under multiple blankets to stay warm, there’s a good chance your pooch is chilly, too. Your dog will usually seek out a warmer place if necessary, but you can pop a blanket in your dog’s bed for extra snuggly warmth. If your dog sleeps outside during colder weather, it’s very important to make sure they have a comfortable and warm shelter.
Should you put a blanket on a dog?

You can cover your dog with a blanket if you want. However, so long as you have the blankets easily accessible, your dog will probably manage to snuggle down under one if they get cold at night. You won’t usually need to worry about physically putting the blanket over them.
]]>
The Best Dog Couch Beds and Dog Sofa Beds https://petnewsdaily.com/best-dog-couches-and-sofa-beds/ Sat, 17 Dec 2022 01:01:20 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=702 Dog sofas and couches are beds for dogs that look like mini couches. They’re ideal if you want a dog bed that will look stylish in a main living area or if your dog prefers to sleep on slightly elevated beds.

These products have been selected by our vet advisor, Dr. Amanda Jondle. Her top choice is the Keet Westerhill Pet Sofa Bed due to its range of sizes and comfortable memory foam cushion. Read how she chose the top 5.

Our Vet’s Top Pick

Keet Westerhill Pet Sofa Bed

With a comfortable and supportive memory foam cushion, this is an excellent choice.

While this was Dr. Jondle’s top choice, she also offers a series of her top tips for what to look for in choosing the best dog couch and sofa beds, a section on who should avoid purchasing them altogether, and she personally selected the best pick for a variety of specific use cases.

The 5 Best Dog Couch Beds (or Dog Sofa Beds)

  1. Best OverallKeet Westerhill Pet Sofa Bed
  2. Best BudgetEnchanted Home Pet Ultra Plush Snuggle Pet Bed
  3. Best for Large DogsMoots Premium Leatherette Pet Sofa
  4. Best for Small DogsEnchanted Home Pet Sailor Sofa
  5. Best OutdoorPastrana Rattan Dog Sofa

Couch / Sofa Beds Compared

Editor’s Picks Brand Rating Memory foam Washable cover Size
Best Overall Keet Westerhill Pet Sofa Bed
4.6 Small to large
Best Budget Buy Enchanted Home Pet Ultra Plush Snuggle Pet Bed 4.7 Small
Best Extra-Large Dog Couch Moots Premium Leatherette Pet Sofa 4.6 Medium to extra-large
Best Small Dog Couch Enchanted Home Pet Sailor Sofa 3.7 Medium
Best Outdoor Dog Sofa Pastrana Rattan Dog Sofa
4.5 One-size

*Ratings are on a scale of 1 to 5 and based on reviews, feedback, and opinions of actual customers

Who Should Buy a Dog Sofa Bed or Couch

  • Style-conscious dog owners – Dog couches and sofa-style dog beds tend to be more stylish than standard dog beds, which is ideal if you want a bed for your dog to go in a high-traffic part of the house.
  • People who want to keep their dog off the couch – Trying to keep your dog off your the human couch? You might be able to tempt them onto their own dog sofa.
  • New dog owners – If you’re bringing home a dog, they’ll need a comfortable bed to lounge on.

Who Should Not Buy a Dog Couch or Sofa Bed

  • Owners of old dogs – As they’re slightly raised off the ground, old dogs with arthritis or mobility issues may struggle to get on and off them.1
  • Pet parents looking for a budget dog bed – Dog couches and sofa beds are more expensive than standard dog beds of comparable quality, so they aren’t the best budget option.

If a dog couch bed isn’t for you, you may want to check out one of our other guides to find the right bed for your dogs, such as our guide to buying the best waterproof dog bed, our outdoor dog bed buying guide, or our guide to selecting the best elevated dog bed.

Buying Guide: Research Tips From a Veterinarian

As a veterinarian, I’m often asked how to choose the best pet products. Here are some tips and pieces of advice to consider when buying a dog couch or sofa bed. Always do your research on the product you’re considering buying and look at the features it offers.

  1. Choose a comfortable dog couch. Look for options that have thick padding with a snuggly, soft cushion – even better if the cushion is made from memory foam.
  2. Consider ease of cleaning. Ideally, the outer cover or the whole cushion should be machine washable and easy to clean.
  3. Pick an option that’s good for a variety of dog sizes. If you have more than one dog, buy a bed that will fit the biggest of them, then the smaller dogs and the largest dogs will fit on it.
  4. Don’t be afraid to think about style. Of course, your dog’s comfort is the most important factor, but it’s fine to pick something that looks good in the home too.
  5. Look for waterproof options. While it isn’t essential, dog couches with a waterproof layer prevent the cushion from getting ruined if your dog has an accident.2

If you’re looking for other sleeping options for your canine companion, you may want to consider dog beds with waterproof properties.

How Much Do They Cost?

Between $80 and $300

Dog sofa beds and couches can cost anywhere between $80 and $300. While you can find some excellent options for less than $150, expect to pay $150 to $300 for the biggest and most luxurious options.

Our Methodology: Why Trust Pet News Daily

As a veterinarian, I’m well-versed in all things dog-related and have spoken to many pet owners and my colleagues in the veterinary industry about dog beds, including dog couches and sofa beds. Based on my professional experience, I know how important it is that your dog has a comfortable and supportive place to sleep.  For the sake of the buyer, a dog couch should offer good value for money and be easy to clean. I’ve chosen my recommended products accordingly. – Dr. Amanda Jondle

The Best Dog Sofa Beds and Couch Reviews

1. Best Overall – Keet Westerhill Pet Sofa Bed

Our Vet’s Top Pick

Keet Westerhill Pet Sofa Bed

With a comfortable and supportive memory foam cushion, this is an excellent choice.

The Keet Westerhill Pet Sofa Bed is a versatile choice that comes in small, medium, and large sizes and can fit a variety of dog sizes. It has short wooden legs to raise it off the ground slightly and comes in a choice of two colors. The cushion is made of memory foam, which is great for comfort and support, especially in older dogs.

It’s a durable choice thanks to the sturdy wooden frame. The cushion cover is washable, so it’s easy to clean, which is always important with pets. It also includes two matching pillows that some dogs like to snuggle up with.

Pros
  • The memory foam cushion offers support and comfort for more restful sleep
  • It looks stylish with piping to match the cushion color
  • The fabric is extremely soft and cozy
Cons
  • The pillows aren’t completely essential and can end up getting in the way
  • The sizes run slightly small so you may need to size up

2. Best Budget – Enchanted Home Pet Ultra Plush Snuggle Pet Bed

Best Budget

Enchanted Home Pet Ultra Plush Snuggle Pet Bed

An affordable yet solid option that offers great value for money.

If you have a toy or small breed dog, up to around 10 pounds, the Enchanted Home Pet Ultra Plush Snuggle Pet Bed offers incredible value for money. Although it’s reasonably priced, it’s durably constructed with a solid wood frame. It looks attractive and has curved raised edges that are perfect for dogs who like to cuddle up in bed.

The cover is removable and washable and it features a toy pocket, which is a nice touch for pets who are always leaving their toys around the house.

Pros
  • You can remove and machine wash the cushion cover
  • This is an attractive dog couch that won’t look out of place in a stylish room
  • It has legs to raise it slightly off the floor
Cons
  • It’s only suitable for small dogs
  • Some pet parents find the cushion a little firm

3. Best Extra-Large – Moots Premium Leatherette Pet Sofa

Best Extra-Large

Moots Premium Leatherette Pet Sofa

Huge and comfy, this is a great option for big dogs

Although it’s available in three sizes, the extra-large version of the Moots Premium Leatherette Pet Sofa is one of the biggest options on the market. It measures a whopping 40 by 42 inches, though the sleeping surface is a little smaller when you factor in the size of the back and arms.

The cushion contains shredded memory foam, which is comfortable and provides joint support, something that’s important for big dogs. The cover is washable for easy cleaning and has a waterproof liner to keep the cushion dry.

Pros
  • Holds dogs up to 95 pounds
  • Waterproof layer beneath the cushion cover protects the filling
  • Contains comfortable, supportive memory foam
Cons
  • The dog sofa is fairly pricey
  • The listed measurements are for the full sofa, including the back and arms, so the sleeping surface is smaller

4. Best for Small Dogs – Enchanted Home Pet Sailor Sofa

Best Small

Enchanted Home Pet Sailor Sofa

This compact pet sofa is great for small dogs.

The stylish Enchanted Home Pet Sailor Sofa features bolster pillows on each end and a raised back, making it ideal for a range of sleeping positions, whether your dog likes to stretch out, curl up or sleep with their head rested on a pillow. It’s a great choice for small dogs, giving them room to stretch out, but also finds some dogs on the smaller end of the medium range, up to a maximum of 30 pounds.

The material on the cushion and pillows is extremely soft and there’s a removable and washable cover on the cushion. A little pocket on the back of the sofa can hold toys for convenient access for your canine companion.

Pros
  • Ideal for smaller dogs, up to a maximum of 30 pounds
  • The cushion has a machine washable cover
  • The faux leather material on the frame is easy to wipe clean
Cons
  • Could be more durable
  • Although it can fit dogs up to 30 pounds, it’s better suited to smaller breeds

5. Best Outdoor – Pastrana Rattan Dog Sofa

Best Outdoor

Pastrana Rattan Dog Sofa

A stunning outdoor dog sofa with a weather resistant frame.

Check Price

Made from faux rattan material, the Pastrana Rattan Dog Sofa is suited for outdoor use. The frame is UV resistant and won’t be damaged by rain or frost, but the cushion will get damaged by the elements so it’s best to take that inside when the bed isn’t in use. Although great for outdoor use, it’s stylish enough that it could be used indoors too.

It comes in one size that holds dogs of up to 80 pounds, so it’s suitable for a range of breeds. The cushion has a washable cover and a soft, comfortable filling.

Pros
  • Suitable for all dogs up to 80 pounds
  • The rattan material is weather-resistant
  • Comfortable cushion with a machine washable cover
Cons
  • The fact that the cushion isn’t waterproof is somewhat frustrating
  • Slightly smaller than expected so large dogs may feel cramped

Frequently Asked Questions

Are dog sofas good for dogs?

Dog couches are great for most dogs. They’re essentially slightly raised beds, so if your dog doesn’t have any trouble climbing steps or other mobility issues, then a sofa bed is perfectly suitable. The raised nature of dog couches can help reduce the chill from the floor.3
How many dog beds should a dog have?

Your dog should have at least one bed, though you may find you need one bed in the main living area of your home and one bed in your bedroom if you let your dog sleep in there on their own bed. If you have more than one dog, make sure there’s at least one bed per dog to avoid fighting over them.
Where should my dog sleep at nighttime?

This really depends on your preferences and the temperament of your dog. Some dogs are happy to sleep in the living room or kitchen while their humans sleep in the bedroom. However, dogs are pack animals and can feel unsafe sleeping alone at night. If your dog seems to struggle with this, consider allowing them to sleep in the bedroom on their own bed, couch, or sofa bed.
Do dogs sleep better in the dark?

Yes, like all mammals, dogs have inner body clocks, or circadian rhythms, that are influenced by light. Dogs are diurnal, meaning they do most of their activity during daylight hours and sleep at night, so they’ll get better sleep if it’s dark or at least dim in the room where they sleep.

[/FAQ]

]]>
Cat Foaming at the Mouth: Reasons & What to Do https://petnewsdaily.com/cat-foaming-at-the-mouth/ Fri, 28 Oct 2022 04:20:16 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2943 Seeing your cat foaming at the mouth or throwing up white foam can be horrifying. We all love our furry felines, so it’s terrible to see them ill. So, why is your cat foaming at the mouth?

Cats can foam at the mouth for various reasons, including rabies, dental disease, nausea, and poisoning. If it seems like your cat is foaming at the mouth, it could signify a severe health problem. Therefore, it’s essential to take them to the vet immediately to get a diagnosis and treatment.

It’s essential that know why your cat is foaming at the mouth and take quick action to ensure your feline does not get any worse.

Why Do Cats Foam At The Mouth?

Your cat can be foaming at the mouth for many reasons. It could be due to anxiety, poisoning, nausea, dental issues, seizures, or rabies.

1. Your Cat Is Anxious

Anxiety may be the cause of your cat foaming at the mouth. Emotional distress can cause hypersalivation, leading to white foam in your cat’s mouth. You need to determine the reason for your cat’s anxiety. Did you move to a new place? Is it possible your cat has separation anxiety? Your cat may have had a scary experience with another animal or a human.

2. Your Cat Was Poisoned

A cat may start foaming at the mouth if he has been poisoned. If you have given your cat medication lately, perhaps you administered it incorrectly. For example, flea drops – your cat may have licked it off. Your cat may also have ingested harmful household substances such as bleach or soap.

3. Your Cat Is Nauseous

The reason for your cat foaming at the mouth may be nausea, which could be the symptom of an underlying condition. Pregnancy, motion sickness, gastritis, or diabetes could also be the reason.

4. Your Cat Has Dental Issues

A dental problem, like an infection, could be causing your cat to foam at the mouth. Gingivitis or a broken tooth could be the cause of the infection. Foaming at the mouth is usually accompanied by pain, appetite loss, and bad breath.

5. Your Cat Is Having A Seizure

Seizures caused by a neurological disorder could cause foaming of the mouth. For example, if your cat has a seizure, foaming at the mouth will usually be accompanied by loss of consciousness, shaking, and collapsing on the floor.

6. Your Cat Has Rabies

The thought of your cat having rabies is a terrifying experience. But unfortunately, foaming at the mouth can be a symptom of rabies. Rabies is a viral disease that affects the brain and the nervous system. It is usually accompanied by muscle control loss, aggression, and drooling.

Sadly, foaming at the mouth is often the last stage of rabies, and your vet may need to euthanize your cat. However, vaccinating your cat yearly against rabies can prevent it from getting that bad.

What Should You Do If Your Cat Is Foaming At The Mouth?

If it seems like your cat is foaming at the mouth, you must take him to the vet. The reason is to rule out any serious issues like seizures or rabies. Likewise, if your cat has anxiety, you should investigate the trigger. There are also some medications that a vet can prescribe for anxiety.

If you suspect your cat has been poisoned, take your cat to the vet as soon as possible. Luckily, your vet can help if you take your cat promptly. If your cat is nauseous, there may be an underlying condition, and you must take your cat to the vet to investigate the cause.

As mentioned before, dental issues can cause foaming at the mouth. To minimize the risk of dental issues, brush your cat’s teeth to prevent oral infections. Alternatively, you can visit a vet. If it seems your cat is having a seizure, you should need immediate vet care. Luckily, some medications can treat seizures in cats.

If you suspect your cat has rabies, foaming at the mouth is usually the last symptom, and there will be nothing you can do to treat this disease. Sadly, your cat may need to be euthanized at the vet. However, vaccines are crucial and can severely prevent your cat from getting this disease.

It’s essential to see the vet if your cat is foaming at the mouth and you have no idea what is causing it.

Is Your Cat Vomiting White Foam?

What to do if your cat is throwing up white foam

If it seems like your cat is coughing up white foam, there may be many reasons for this, which includes:

  • You can address this by feeding your cat small, frequent meals. An inconsistent feeding schedule usually causes indigestion.
  • Irritable Bowel Syndrome. IBS is usually accompanied by diarrhea. Your vet will do some tests to determine a treatment plan.
  • Because cats groom themselves, they are prone to getting hairballs. To address this issue, you can get dietary supplements for your cat and brush your cat regularly.
  • Your cat may have eaten something that they shouldn’t have. Other symptoms include vomiting bile or blood and lethargy. Your vet will prescribe the appropriate medication.
  • Pancreatitis can be acute or chronic; a vet treats it through fluid therapy and medication. Other symptoms include fever, appetite loss, dehydration, weight loss, and pain in the belly area.
  • If you have not dewormed your kitten, he might have parasites. For example, vomiting white foam is usually accompanied by diarrhea.
  • Hyperthyroidism is common in older cats, and other symptoms include weight loss, diarrhea, and an increase in urination. Your vet will run tests and prescribe daily medication.
  • Chronic kidney disease. Renal insufficiency is common in older cats. Vets cannot cure it, but A vet can treat the symptoms. Other symptoms include dehydration, weakness, increased drinking, loss of appetite, and change in urine.
  • Your vet will start your cat on insulin therapy or similar treatment if diagnosed with diabetes. Other symptoms include increased urination and excessive drinking.

Your veterinarian can determine what is ailing your cat. If your cat is regularly coughing up or vomiting white foam, it’s best to take her to the vet to ensure your feline friend has no illnesses.

Final Verdict

Don’t expect the worst if your cat is foaming at the mouth. If you have vaccinated your cat against rabies, there may be another reason for your cat doing this. Taking your cat to the veterinarian immediately is essential to rule out any serious illnesses. Likewise, if your cat frequently vomits white foam, take him to the vet.

Frequently Asked Questions

Additional Sources & Resources

1) “Foaming at the Mouth in Cats.” VCA Hospitals, www.vcahospitals.com/main/pet-health-information/article/animal-health/foaming-at-the-mouth-in-cats/.

2) Goldstein, Rebecca L., et al. “Mouth Foaming in Cats.” Just Right Pet RX, 25 Apr. 2016, justrightpetrx.com/mouth-foaming-cats/.

3) Sansone, Sharon A., and Nancy L. Downing. “Cat Drooling.” The Merck Veterinary Manual, Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp, 1 Aug. 2017, www.merckvetmanual.com/generalized-conditions/symptoms-and-signs/drooling-in-cats.

4) “Why Is My Cat Drooling?” American Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals, www.aspca.org/pet-care/cat-care/common-cat-behavior-issues/why-my-cat-drooling.

5) “Foaming at the Mouth.” WebMD, www.webmd.com/first-aid/tc/foaming-at-the-mouth-topic-overview.

And finally we’ve created a series of posts here on Pet News Daily related to gastro intestinal issues for cats and cat health in general, including:

]]>
Dog (or Puppy) Growth Chart: How Big Will Your Puppy Get? https://petnewsdaily.com/dog-growth-chart/ Wed, 26 Oct 2022 05:16:15 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2141 Though every breed (and mix of breeds) is different, some general guidelines can help you track your puppy’s growth. We consulted with our veterinarian, Dr. Jennifer Coates, who reviewed and approved data about puppy weights and sizes, which we then used to create a convenient puppy (or dog) growth chart.

Puppy Growth Chart

Dog growth chart

Fully Grown: 21-50 pounds, Height 22-42 inches

Text Transcript of the Puppy Growth Chart

Dog – Age Small Weight Medium Weight Large Weight Extra Large Weight
6 months
9 months
12 months
15 months
18 months

Fully Grown

15 pounds
18 pounds
20 pounds
20 pounds
20 pounds

Fully Grown 2-20 pounds, Height 6-18 inches

13-33 pounds
18-43 pounds
20-48 pounds
21-50 pounds
21-50 pounds

21-50 pounds, Height 10-25 inches

30-60 pounds
38-75 pounds
43-85 pounds
48-95 pounds
51-100 pounds

21-50 pounds, Height 20-30 inches

15 pounds
18 pounds
20 pounds
20 pounds
20 pounds

21-50 pounds, Height 22-42 inches

The chart shows you a puppy’s monthly average weight range during the growing phase. You can also refer to the puppy weight calculator to get an idea of how big your puppy is likely to get.

There are few things more exciting than bringing a new puppy home. Those little squirming bundles of fur have a way of stealing into our hearts and we want to do everything we can to help them live long healthy lives.

If you have a new puppy, you may have some questions about his growth. A baby dog, much like a baby person, grows and develops in stages, experiencing exciting changes and transitions at certain times in his life.

You, as the owner, can be sure you’re giving your pup every advantage if you know more about his stages of growth, things that can affect his growth, when he’s likely to stop growing, and how big he’s going to get.

Basic Stages of Puppy Growth

No matter which breed of puppy you have—or even if you don’t know the breed—you can count on some basic stages of puppy growth. The rate of growth, however, will depend on your puppy’s breed type(s), sex (male or female), birth weight, diet, and exercise.1

It’s also important to keep in mind that different dogs pass through development stages at different rates. There are differences between breeds, but also between individuals of each breed. Use the growth chart as a reference, but also speak to your veterinarian if you have any questions about how your puppy is doing.

The most rapid growth in puppies occurs within the first few weeks. From birth to eight weeks old, the puppy will grow faster than at any other point in her life. After that, puppies will experience the fastest growth rate in their first six months.2 Most pups will have reached about 60 percent of their adult height by the time they’re four months old.

Your pup may experience additional growth spurts at any time during her first year or so. Most breeds will become fully grown in 12-18 months, though large breeds can take up to two years or more.

In general, you want to be sure your puppy has the nutrition needed for growth without going overboard. Overweight and obesity in puppies can lead to health problems later in life. A good rule of thumb is to feed puppy-specific foods until your pup reaches full growth, which is usually around 11-14 months of age.

How Big Will a Puppy Get?

You may have heard that a puppy’s paw size can give you an idea of how big your puppy will get. This may help to some extent, but it’s not always accurate. Some breeds—like Bulldogs—naturally have big paws for their size, while others—like Collies—naturally have small paws for their size.

The breed of your dog plays an important role in determining how big she will become. Toy-sized dogs, like Chihuahuas and Pomeranians, normally weigh less than 12 pounds when they’re fully grown. Small dogs like Jack Russell terriers will grow to between 12 and 25 pounds, whereas large dogs like German Shepherds will grow to between 50 and 100 pounds.

Consider too your dog’s gender. As with many other animals, males are typically larger than females.3 The size of the puppy’s parents and other hereditary factors can also come into play. If you got your puppy from a breeder, ask them for information on the puppy’s parents.

If you’re not sure which breed your pup is or if you know they’re a mix of several, you can try this simple formula:4

(Current weight/Age in weeks) x 52.

For example, if your pup is 25 pounds at 16 weeks of age, the formula would look like this:

  • (25/16) = 1.57 (rounded up)
  • 1.57 x 52 = 82 pounds (rounded up) adult size

This is only a starting point, though. Your puppy’s weight may vary. The best time to use the formula is when your pup is between 12 weeks (for small breeds) and 20 weeks (for large breeds).

You can also use our puppy size predictor to find out how big your puppy might get as an adult. Or, if you want to see the growth rates of other dogs, we’ve also created a Golden Retriever size chartGreat Dane growth chartChihuahua size chart, and Labrador growth chart.

How Tall Will My Puppy Get?

Veterinarians don’t often measure height in puppies, so we have an absence of data to accurately determine the stages of height as your puppy advances into adulthood. But the American Kennel Association (AKA) does have height charts for each breed of dog, so you can refer to that if you have a purebred dog, or use it to get a general idea if you have a mixed-breed dog.5

When Will My Puppy Stop Growing?

The amount of time it takes for your puppy to reach full growth depends greatly on his breed. Smaller dogs can reach maturity between six and eight months, and certainly will be full grown by 12 months. Larger dogs can take anywhere from 12 to 24 months to reach their full size, whereas giant breeds like the Great Dane can take up to two-to-three years.

As a general rule, small and medium puppies will finish growing at around half the age of their larger counterparts.6

Things That Affect Growth

The most important factors that will affect how your puppy grows are diet and exercise. With the proper nutrition, puppies are more likely to develop as they should, growing strong teeth and bones, a healthy coat, good vision, sturdy muscles, and lots of energy. Exercise also helps them burn calories and develop their muscles and bones.

Choose a balanced, nutritional puppy food for your best friend, as a deficiency in any essential nutrient can compromise a puppy’s health. Next, make sure your puppy is getting the right number of calories. Underfeeding can compromise growth while overfeeding can lead to excessive weight gain.

Monitor your puppy’s weight and body condition score (the dog equivalent of body mass index or BMI), and then adjust your puppy’s food intake as needed.7

You can check your puppy’s progress by feeling its ribs. If you can feel them but not see them, you’re probably in good shape. The ribs should be covered with minimal fat and you should be able to see the dog’s waist curve when you look at him from above. Giving your dog daily exercise will help him maintain a healthy weight.

If your dog is not gaining weight like you think he should check with your veterinarian. Some health problems, congenital defects, and other issues could be affecting his growth.

Puppy Weight Calculator

PUPPY WEIGHT CALCULATOR
What’s your puppy’s breed

What’s your puppy’s weight

What’s your puppy’s birth date?

What’s your puppy’s gender


Frequently Asked Questions

How can you tell how big a puppy will get?

To determine how big your puppy will be when she is fully grown, consult our puppy weight calculator above. You can also use this formula when your pup is between 12 and 20 weeks to get a general idea.

(Current weight/Age in weeks) x 52.

Your dog’s breed, parents, and gender also play a role in how big he will get. Use this information to estimate your dog’s final size.

What months do puppies grow the most?

Puppies experience the fastest growth between birth and 8 weeks old. After that, they continue to grow quickly until they reach six months of age. Growth slows down then, but depending on the breed, may continue for up to two-to-three years.

What age are puppy growth spurts?

Small breeds will experience growth spurts sooner than larger breeds. Their weight at two months may double at four months. After that, their growth will slow. Larger breeds tend to experience more steady, faster growth during the first 5-6 months, after which the rate of growth will taper off.

Does paw size determine dog size?

Though paw size can give you some indication of how large your dog will be, it’s not always an accurate measurement. Some breeds (like Collies) have small paws for their size, while others (like Bulldogs) have large paws for their size. So use this measurement only as a general indicator.

Paw size is also more likely to help you determine the adult size in purebred dogs. Mixed breeds can be trickier. Wait until the dog reaches around three months of age. At that point, the paw size will be pretty proportionate to their overall size.

Do puppies get their size from mom or dad?

If the size of the parents is about the same, the female pups will grow to the size of their mothers, while male pups will more closely resemble the size of their fathers. If the parents are of different sizes, though, the puppy will likely end up somewhere between the two.

How can I tell if my dog will be big?

In addition to looking at the puppy’s parents, her breed, and her paw size, you can also use a formula that Wisdom Panel veterinarians recommend: Multiply your pup’s weight at four months by two to get an estimate of their adult weight. If your dog’s weight at four months is 20 pounds, her adult weight may be around 40 pounds. (https://www.wisdompanel.com/en-us/blog/predicting-puppy-size-potential)

Do dogs double their size at six months?

This depends on what you’re figuring as the start weight. A small dog can weigh twice as much at four months as he did at two months. Most small dogs reach their adult weight between 6-8 months. Larger dogs take longer to grow. For them, their six-month weight is typically about two-thirds of their adult weight.

Additional Resources

If you’re looking for more information about dog growth in general, we’ve created a puppy weight calculator, an in-depth guide to how heavy your dog should be, and a series of growth charts for different breeds (and dogs and mixed breeds in general):

]]>
Kitten and Cat Growth Chart https://petnewsdaily.com/kitten-and-cat-growth-chart/ Wed, 26 Oct 2022 01:14:49 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2522 A kitten growth chart can help you decide if you would like to add a furry feline to your family. Though most cats average somewhere between 10 pounds and 18 pounds, one pound on a cat can make a major difference in their health. From the short-haired Abyssinian to the long-haired Maine Coon, cats range in size from under 10 pounds to just over 20 pounds, depending on the breed, age, and sex of the cat.

1

So what is a typical growth rate of a kitten? And how do you know if your cat is her optimal size? We put together a cat growth chart for you to better understand how your kitten will age.

Our kitten to cat growth chart is a guide. Your kitten will grow at a different rate than other kittens due to genetics, breed, and other factors, such as health at the time of birth or abnormalities in growth. The best way to tell if your cat is at an ideal weight, and therefore size, is to use the Body Condition System, developed by Purina and used by veterinarians everywhere.

2

Always consult with your veterinarian when it comes to the health of your kitty.

Kitten (or Cat) Growth Chart

Kitten growth chart

Stages of Kitten Growth

The stages of kitten growth range from birth to adulthood and include multiple phases, from opening their eyes to socializing. Kittens begin their life deaf and blind but are able to make small sounds to alert their mother. The majority of growing happens in the first two months.

3

In the first month, your kitty will:

  • Open their eyes at about two weeks. During the third week, a kitten’s eyes may change color.
  • Become more vocal and begin to purr during the third week of their life. This is also about the time they try to walk, and their teeth come in.
  • Begin to play and explore somewhere around the third and fourth week. Kittens will interact with litter mates, other animals, and humans.
  • Eat solid food and use the litter box. At about three to four weeks old, kittens can be introduced to wet food and be trained to use the litter box.

In the second month, your kitty will:

  • Be full of energy and mischief. Around the fifth week your kitty will start to show some spunk and personality as he grows into his full cat self.
  • Need as much socializing as possible. The second month is critical to your kitty’s socialization skills.
  • Be more stable on their feet. Your kitty will be less wobbly in the second month as she explores, plays, and socializes. This is also a good time to take to her your veterinarian for her first checkup.
  • Begin to exhibit prey behavior. As your kitten explores and plays, he’ll start to stalk, hide, and pounce, as though hunting prey.

When Is a Cat Fully Grown

So at what age is a cat fully grown? At 8 weeks old, or 2 months, your kitten is ready to be fully weaned from mom. Two-month-old kittens weigh roughly 2 pounds and can be neutered or spayed. After two months, your kitten will begin to look more like an adult cat. By the third month, they’re showing behavior similar to adult cats, having learned adult cat skills from socialization with litter mates and mom.

Most cats are fully grown around 1 year old. But like most stages of growth development, cats also go through what is considered adolescence. This phase lasts roughly up to 18 months old.

4

How Can You Tell How Big a Cat Will Get?

While different breeds of cats grow at different rates, your cat’s breed and sex will be the best determining factors as to how big your cat will get. Some breeds, like the Maine Coon or Ragdoll can weigh 15 pounds or more when they’re adults. Other breeds, like the LaPerm or Singapura, weigh about 4 to 8 pounds. Monitor your kitten’s growth with the help of your veterinarian.

Cat Growth Chart Weight

Text Transcript of Cat or Kitten Growth Chart

Age Weight
Newborn Kitten
1-Week-Old Kitten
2-Week-Old Kitten
3-Week-Old Kitten
4 to 8 Week Old Kitten
9 to 12 Weeks Old Kitten
12 to 16 Weeks old kitten
16 to 20 Weeks Old Kitten
6 Months to Adulthood

1.8 to 5.3 ounces
5.3 to 8.8 ounces
8.8 to 12.3 ounces
12.3 to 15.9 ounces
1.4 to 2 pounds
Around 3 pounds
Around 4 pounds
5 to 6 pounds
6 to 8 pounds

Kittens grow and mature according to their own timeline. Though there are averages to help guide you along the way, always consult with your veterinarian to know whether or not your kitten is growing at a healthy rate. We put together a cat growth chart by weight for you to understand the natural development of your kitten.

Most newborn kittens weigh roughly 2 to 6 ounces. Kittens gain about 2 to 4 ounces per week. So your 3-week-old kitten will probably weigh about a pound. At two months old, your kitten should be about 2 to 3 pounds. And when she reaches six months old, she’ll be close to her adult size at about 6 to 10 pounds.

Frequently Asked Questions

Additional Sources & Resources

  • American Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals. “Kitten Development Stages with Growth Charts and Week by Week Guide.” (n.d.). Retrieved from https://www.aspca.org/pet-care/animal-health/kitten-development-stages-growth-charts-week-week-guide
  • The Humane Society of the United States. “Growth and Development of Kittens.” (2017). Retrieved from https://www.humanesociety.org/resources/growth-and-development-kittens
  • PetMD. “Kitten Development.” (2018). Retrieved from https://www.petmd.com/cat/centers/kitten/evr_ct_kitten_developmentWebMD. “Kitten Development Calendar.” (2011). Retrieved from https://pets.webmd.com/cats/kitten-development-calendar#1

We also have a series of dog growth charts if you’re interested in how K9s are likely to grow:

]]>
Mixed Breed Growth Chart: How Big Will Your Mixed Breed Dog Get? https://petnewsdaily.com/mixed-breed-growth-chart-how-big-will-your-mixed-breed-dog-get/ Wed, 26 Oct 2022 00:50:32 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2542 Though every mixed-breed dog is different, some general guidelines can help you track your puppy’s growth. We consulted with our veterinarian, Dr. Jennifer Coates, who reviewed and approved data about mixed-breed weights and sizes, which we then used to create a convenient mixed-breed dog growth chart.

The chart shows you a mixed-breed puppy’s monthly average weight range during the growing phase. You can also refer to the puppy weight calculator to get an idea of how big your puppy is likely to get.

Mixed-Breed Growth Chart

Mixed breed growth chart

Fully Grown: 21-50 pounds, Height 22-42 inches

Text Transcript of the Mixed Breed Growth Chart

Mixed Breed Age Small Dog (0-20 Pounds) Chihuahuas, French bulldogs, Pomeranians, Daschunds Medium Dog (21-50 Pounds)
Beagles, Border Collies, Poodles
Large Dog (51-100 Pounds)
Golden Retrievers, Labrador Retrievers, Huskies, Pitbulls, German Shepherds
Extra Large Dog (100+ Pounds)
Great Danes, Mastiffs, Saint Bernard
6 months old
9 months old
12 months old
15 months old
18 months old
15 lbs
18 lbs
20 lbs
20 lbs
20 lbs

Fully Grown: 2-20 pounds, Height 6-18 inches

13-33 pounds
18-43 pounds
20-48 pounds
21-50 pounds
21-50 pounds

Fully Grown: 21-50 pounds, Height 10-25 inches

30-60 pounds
38-75 pounds
43-85 pounds
48-95 pounds
51-100 pounds

Fully Grown: 21-50 pounds, Height 20-30 inches

15 pounds
18 pounds
20 pounds
20 pounds
20 pounds

Fully Grown: 21-50 pounds, Height 22-42 inches

About Mixed Breeds

You know your new puppy isn’t a purebred. A purebred dog comes from parents of the same breed that are typically registered with the American Kennel Club (AKC) and conform to certain breed standards. A true purebred dog will have a pedigree that traces back to its ancestors.

A dog that isn’t purebred is typically considered to be a mixed breed dog. The term indicates nothing about the quality of the dog—only that the dog’s parents weren’t registered and both parents weren’t of the same breed. Mixed breed dogs have no pedigree and usually aren’t registered, though some mixed-breed registries will offer documentation.

The AKC Canine Partners Program, for instance, welcomes all mixed-breed dogs of any age to the AKC family. If you enroll your mixed-breed pup in the program, you can then enter your dog in AKC sports and events, like Agility, AKC Rally, Obedience, and more.1

Some mixed breed dogs are called “designer dogs” because the breeders intentionally mixed the breeds. Sometimes called a “hybrid dog,” these dogs are the result of combining existing breeds to form a new one. An example is the Labradoodle, which is a combination of the Poodle and the Labrador.

A rarer type of hybrid dog is the result of breeding a dog with a wild animal like a wolf or coyote. Sometimes these are intentional pairings made by breeders, while other times they are accidental. These animals aren’t usually recommended as pets because they can retain their wild-animal traits.

Basic Stages of Mixed Breed Dog Growth

Mixed breed dogs can vary greatly in size, but you can count on some basic stages of puppy growth. Keep in mind that your puppy’s breed types, sex (male or female), birth weight, diet, and exercise will all play a role in her final adult weight.2

If you know your mixed-breed dog’s heritage—which two breeds she comes from—you can check the AKC’s breed weight chart and compare the two breeds to get a general idea of how big your puppy will get.

Use the mixed-breed growth chart only to determine a general estimate. Dogs pass through development stages at different rates. There are differences between breeds, but also between individuals of each breed. Talk to your veterinarian if you have any questions about how your puppy is doing.

The most rapid growth in most dogs, including mixed-breed dogs, occurs within the first few weeks. From birth to eight weeks old, your pup will grow faster than at any other point in her life.

After that, puppies will experience the fastest growth rate in their first six months.3 Your dog will likely reach about 60 percent of her adult height by the time she’s four months old.

You may notice additional growth spurts at any time after that up to a year old. Small-breed dogs will achieve their adult height and weight faster than medium- or large-breed dogs. Most dogs will become fully grown in 12-18 months, though large breeds can take up to two years or more.

As your mixed-breed puppy grows, make sure he has the nutrition needed for growth without going overboard. Overweight and obesity in puppies can lead to health problems later in life. A good rule of thumb is to feed puppy-specific foods until your pup reaches full growth, which is usually around 11-14 months of age.

How Big Do Mixed Breed Dogs Get?

When estimating how big your mixed-breed dog will get, start with his ancestry if you can. If you know the puppy’s parents and what breed(s) they were, you can get a general idea of how big your dog will get.

The larger the breeds of your dog’s parents, for instance, the larger your dog is likely to be as an adult, and vice versa. Some mixed breeds take after one breed in their background more than the other, however. In that case, examine your dog’s physical characteristics. Check the muzzle, tail, ears, coat, and body type. Then compare your dog to the breeds in his background.

Once you find the breed that your dog seems to be most like, you can use that breed’s weight chart to get an estimate of how big your dog will get.

You may have heard that you can examine your puppy’s paw size and estimate his adult weight from that. This works for many breeds. Some breeds, however—like Bulldogs—naturally have big paws for their size, while others—like Collies—naturally have small paws for their size. So keep that in mind as you’re checking your dog.

Consider too your dog’s gender. As with many other animals, males are typically larger than females.4

If you’re not sure which breed your pup is or if you know they’re a mix of several, you can try this simple formula:5

(Current weight/Age in weeks) x 52.

For example, if your pup is 25 pounds at 16 weeks of age, the formula would look like this:

  • (25/16) = 1.57 (rounded up)
  • 1.57 x 52 = 82 pounds (rounded up) adult size

This is only a starting point, though. Your puppy’s weight may vary. The best time to use the formula is when your pup is between 12 weeks (for small breeds) and 20 weeks (for large breeds).

How Tall Do Mixed-Breed Dogs Get?

Though veterinarians often measure a dog’s weight, they don’t measure height as often. As a result, we have an absence of data to accurately determine the stages of height as your puppy advances into adulthood.

The American Kennel Association (AKA) does have height charts for each breed of dog. If you know the breeds in your dog’s background, you can use these charts to get a general idea if you have a mixed-breed dog.6

You can also measure your dog’s height at six months of age and estimate their final adult height (and weight) that way. Follow these guidelines:

  • Small dogs (up to 20 pounds): At six months, these dogs are 75 percent grown.
  • Medium dogs (21-50 pounds): At six months, these dogs are about 66 percent grown.
  • Large dogs (51-100 pounds): At six months, these dogs are 60 percent grown.
  • Extra-large dogs (>100 pounds): At six months, these dogs are only 50 percent grown.

When Do Mixed Breeds Stop Growing?

As mentioned above, smaller dogs reach their full size faster than larger dogs. A small dog will reach maturity between six and eight months. Larger dogs can take anywhere from 12 to 24 months, whereas giant breeds like the Great Dane can take up to two-to-three years.

As a general rule, small and medium puppies will finish growing at around half the age of their larger counterparts.7 Take a look at your dog’s bone structure, particularly in the legs. Longer, thicker bones indicate a larger dog. Short, thin legs more commonly belong to a smaller dog.

Things That Affect Growth

The proper diet is key if you want your mixed-breed dog to achieve optimal health and growth. Choose a balanced, nutritional puppy food, as a deficiency in any essential nutrient can compromise a dog’s health. Since puppy foods come in a variety of sizes (small breed, large breed), try to find out what breeds are in your pup’s background so you can make the right choice. If you’re not sure, ask your veterinarian.

Next, make sure your mixed-breed pup is getting the right number of calories. Underfeeding can compromise growth while overfeeding can lead to excessive weight gain. You can monitor your puppy’s weight and body condition score (the dog equivalent of body mass index or BMI), and then adjust your puppy’s food intake as needed.8

One way to see how your pup is doing in terms of growth is to check his ribs. If you can feel them but not see them, you’re probably in good shape. You should also be able to see the dog’s waist curve when you look at him from above. Giving your dog daily exercise will help him maintain a healthy weight.

If your dog is not gaining weight like you think he should check with your veterinarian. Some health issues like the following can affect the growth rate:

  • Improper nutrition
  • Over-feeding (overfeeding can cause joint problems and chronic diseases later in life)
  • Worm infection (hookworms or roundworms)
  • Spaying/neutering (this will not stunt growth, but can affect the joints of large-breed dogs—the recommendation is to wait until your female reaches her first heat cycle, and until your male is around two years old)
  • Excessive running (when your dog is still growing, excessive impact from running can predispose them to joint issues later in life—more a problem with large-breed dogs; wait until 15 months to allow bones to grow properly)

Mixed Breed Weight Calculator

PUPPY WEIGHT CALCULATOR
What’s your puppy’s breed

What’s your puppy’s weight

What’s your puppy’s birth date?

What’s your puppy’s gender


Frequently Asked Questions

How big will my mixed-breed puppy get?

To estimate your mixed-breed puppy’s adult weight, use our puppy weight calculator above. Or try this formula when your pup is between 12 and 20 weeks to get a general idea.

(Current weight/Age in weeks) x 52.

Your dog’s parents and gender also play a role in how big he will get. Use this information to estimate your dog’s final size.

Do mixed-breed dogs grow slower?

A mixed-breed dog will grow at a similar rate to other dogs his size. A small dog, for instance, even though he is small, will grow at a similar rate to a purebred small dog. That means that he’ll grow quickly, reaching near adult size at four months old. Medium-sized dogs will grow quickly until about 4-6 months, after which growth will slow down. Large dogs will grow quickly until 6-8 months, then slow down after that, though they will continue to grow until 18 months to 2-3 years.

Do puppies regress at 5 months?

You may have heard that when puppies reach around five months of age, they can appear to be going backward. Usually, this refers to behavior rather than growth. Your puppy may have more accidents in the house than before, for example, or may ignore your commands more often.

This type of behavior is normal at this age. You can think of your five-month-old mixed-breed dog as a toddler testing the limits and discovering his place in the family pack.

Growth at this stage depends on the dog’s breed(s) and final size. Small dogs will be at about their full growth at 5 months, as will medium dogs. Large dogs will still be growing.

What age are puppies half their height?

Again, this depends on the size of the dog. Most small dogs are considered about half their height and weight at around two-to-three months of age. Medium dogs reach that point around four months of age. Larger dogs take longer to grow. For them, their six-month weight is typically about one-half to two-thirds of their adult weight.

Do puppies double their weight at 6 months?

For an extra-large dog like a Great Dane, you can weigh him at six months, then double that to get a rough idea of how much he may weigh as an adult. Smaller dogs, however, will reach half their weight sooner than that.

A small dog can weigh twice as much at four months as he did at two months, for example. A medium-to-large breed may reach about two-thirds of his adult weight at six months old.

Additional Resources

If you’re looking for more information about dog growth in general, we’ve created a puppy weight calculator, an in-depth guide to how heavy your dog should be, and a series of growth charts for different breeds (and dogs and mixed breeds in general):

]]>
Rottweiler Growth Chart: How Big Will Your Rottweiler Get? https://petnewsdaily.com/rottweiler-growth-chart-how-big-will-your-rottweiler-get/ Wed, 26 Oct 2022 00:45:01 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2543 If you recently brought home a Rottweiler puppy, there’s one thing you know: It’s going to get big! Just how big will your puppy be when he’s full-grown? We consulted with our veterinarian, Dr. Jennifer Coates, who reviewed and approved data about puppy weights and sizes, which we then used to create a convenient Rottweiler growth chart. You can use this as a reference to see how your puppy compares to the average.

The chart shows you a Rottweiler’s monthly average weight range during the growing phase. You can also refer to the puppy weight calculator to get an idea of how big your puppy is likely to get.

Rottweiler Growth Chart

Rottweiler growth chart

  • 1 year: 80-125 pounds
  • Fully grown males: 95-135 pounds, 24-27 inches
  • Fully grown females: 80-100 pounds, 22-25 inches

Text Transcript of the Rottweiler Growth Chart

Rottweiler – Age Weight Weight
2 months
3 months
4 months
5 months
6 months
7 months
8 months
9 months
10 months
11 months

1 year
Fully grown males
Fully grown females

10-16 pounds
25-39 pounds
36-52 pounds
45-61 pounds
59-71 pounds
65-80 pounds
70-85 pounds
70-105 pounds
75-110 pounds
75-115 pounds

80-125 pounds
95-135 pounds
80-100 pounds

12-14”
16-18”
18-21”
19-23”
21-24”
23-25”
24-26”
24-26”
24-26”
25-26”

24-27 inches
22-25 inches

Also known affectionately as Rotties, the Rottweiler is one of the most popular dogs in the United States. Powerful, protective, and loyal, they’re famous for their guarding instincts, but they can also be fun and gentle playmates.1

Descended from ancient Roman dogs, Rottweilers have been used throughout history to perform many different jobs. Initially herding animals, they also guarded cattlemen’s money by carrying it around their necks in a pouch. Today they are highly versatile and can be trained as service dogs, therapy dogs, obedience competitors, police dogs, guide dogs, customs inspectors, carting dogs, and devoted companions.2

What Are the Growth Stages of a Rottweiler?

As your Rottweiler puppy grows, she will go through several stages that mark milestones for her development and behavior.

Birth to 10 Weeks

She’ll experience the most growth during her first week of life when she doubles in size from her birth weight. She’ll continue to grow at a rapid rate until around 6-8 weeks of age. At that point, she’s usually ready to be weaned off her mother’s milk and taken home with you.

Up through about 10 weeks, her growth plates (soft area of cartilage from which bones grow and extend) and joints will still be soft as they haven’t completely developed yet. She will weigh between 22-26 pounds and reach up to about 15 inches tall at the shoulder.

10 Weeks to 3 Months

From that point on, your puppy will continue to grow, gaining a little over two pounds per week until she reaches 8-9 months of age. By three months, she should have gained another about 10-11 pounds, and her growth rate will begin to slow a little, though she will continue to grow through 18 months and sometimes up to two-to-three years.

3 Months to 7 Months

Between three-to-four months, she will have reached about 60 percent of her adult height, but only about 30 percent of her adult weight.

When your pup turns seven months old, he will have gained about 65 percent of his adult weight and will leave his most rapid growth behind. He will weigh between 79-99 pounds with a height of 24-26 inches.

7 Months to 12 Months

Between 7 and 12 months, he’ll enter his teen years, and may display some typical teenager-type behavior where he ignores commands or gets into things he shouldn’t! Consistent positive reinforcement will get you through this period. You’ll also notice that he’s still growing and that he has all his adult, permanent teeth.

At 12 months, most Rotties are considered close to full-grown. The growth plates harden and fully close, and their bodies will look mature. Keep in mind, however, that your pal can still put on weight, with some growing until they are near three years old. This is because they have big muscles, broad chests, and big heads that take time to develop fully.

Tips on Rottweiler Nutrition for Optimal Growth

Picture of a Rottweiler with a food bowl

To make sure your Rottie reaches her growth milestones, feed a high-quality large-breed food.3 These foods provide the proper nutrition for a big dog like a Rottweiler but slow the growth rate to decrease the risk of joint problems.

Make sure the food is high in protein (real meat should be the first ingredient) to support those large, strong muscles. Do be cautious about fat content. Rottweilers are prone to obesity, and a high-fat diet can cause problems in the future. A healthy amount of fat content is around 12-16 percent.

Choose treats that are high in protein, not fat. Good options include freeze-dried liver, tendons, and other meats that don’t have a lot of sugar or fat in them. Feed these treats only occasionally and refrain from giving your dog people food.

You may be tempted to feed more food to help your dog grow bigger, but this can lead to over-conditioning and future joint problems, so stick with the recommended amount of food. It’s also best to feed at least two smaller meals a day. Feeding too much at once can overfill your dog’s stomach and deep chest area with food which can lead to bloat.

As your Rottie grows, you can also check for ideal weight by examining the ribs and waist. You should be able to easily feel but not see the ribs and note a well-proportioned waist when looking at your dog from the top.

How Big Do Rottweilers Get?

There are a few ways to estimate how big your Rottweiler will grow.

First, consider your dog’s genetics. American lines are often smaller than European lines, and dogs bred as pets may be smaller than those bred to be show or working dogs. Ask the breeder for information on your dog’s parents. Their size and weight will greatly influence your dog’s adult size.

Next, check your dog’s features. If your Rottweiler has a longer, narrower snout and narrow chest, she will likely weigh less than one that has a shorter, blunter snout and broad chest. Check the dog’s paws as well. If they look too big when compared to the rest of the dog’s body, this is a classic sign that your dog is still growing.

Another indicator of your Rottweiler’s final size is its gender. As with many other animals, males are typically larger than females.4 Whereas females can weigh between 80-100 pounds, a male can weigh between 95-135 pounds.

Another way to estimate your puppy’s final growth weight is to use this simple formula:5

(Current weight/Age in weeks) x 52.

For example, if your pup is 25 pounds at 16 weeks of age, the formula would look like this:

  • (25/16) = 1.57 (rounded up)
  • 1.57 x 52 = 82 (rounded up)

The best time to check your Rottweiler with this formula is when they reach about 16 weeks of age.

You can also use our puppy size predictor to find out how big your puppy might get as an adult. Or, if you want to see the growth rates of other dogs, we’ve also created a Golden Retriever size chartGreat Dane growth chartChihuahua size chart, and Labrador growth chart.

When Do Rottweilers Stop Growing?

As a large-sized dog breed, Rottweilers will take longer than many other dogs to reach their full size. By the time your dog is one year old, he will be near his full height and weight, but he is likely to keep growing for at least another year. Very large, typically male Rottweilers may need up to three years to finish filling out.

If you have any concerns about how your puppy is doing in terms of growth, be sure to check with your veterinarian.

Things That Affect Growth

Do be careful not to overexercise your Rottweiler puppy while she’s still growing. Their large bones take time to develop, and if you run long distances, you could be setting your dog up for joint problems later in life.

Exercise is important, though, so play games like swimming, tug of war, fetch, and other gentle forms of exercise—preferably on soft grass or ground rather than pavement—until they reach about a year old. These types of exercises help them to build their muscles. Daily walks are also a must.

Rottweilers, like many large breed dogs, are prone to hip dysplasia or arthritis. Even as puppies these health issues can cause the muscles to atrophy. Feeding high-quality large-breed puppy food will help prevent this. A good breeder should also screen for these issues before selling you the dog.

Intestinal problems can stunt growth in Rottweiler puppies. If you notice that your dog is not gaining weight like she should, it could be that she has parasites like worms (hookworms, roundworms, etc.) or another digestive issue. These are typically easily treated after which your puppy can catch up on her growth.

Rottweilers are also commonly affected by heart disease, like aortic stenosis. This occurs when the aortic valve narrows, forcing the heart to work harder to force blood through the narrowed valve. Over time, this can damage the heart muscle, leading to a heart attack and death. You can’t prevent the condition, but if your dog has it, there are steps you can take to help support heart function. Check with your veterinarian for more information.

Rottweiler Weight Calculator

PUPPY WEIGHT CALCULATOR
What’s your puppy’s breed

What’s your puppy’s weight

What’s your puppy’s birth date?

What’s your puppy’s gender


Frequently Asked Questions

How quickly do Rottweilers grow?

As a large breed, Rottweilers take more time to grow than most other dogs. They will be close to their adult size by one year old but then can continue to grow for another one or two years. Females will reach their full adult weight and height faster than males.

How big is a Rottweiler at 7 months?

At seven months, your Rottweiler pup should be between 65 and 80 pounds and 23-25 inches high at the shoulder, depending on its gender and heritage. (Some may be larger.)

How do I know if my Rottweiler is going to be big?

Rottweilers are large-breed dogs, so most of them will be big dogs. How big your specific puppy will get depends on many factors, including:

  • Gender: males grow larger than females.
  • Heritage: puppies usually take after their parents. American breeds are usually smaller than European breeds.
  • Paw size: as long as your dog’s paws look out of proportion to the rest of his body, he’s still growing.
  • Physical characteristics: dogs with longer, narrower snouts and narrow chests will be smaller than those with blunt noses and broad chests.
How much bigger will my Rottweiler get?

At six months, your Rottweiler has gained about 60 percent or two-thirds of her final adult size. You can expect her to keep growing through her first year, and then a little more through the first 18 months to two years. Males can continue to fill out until three years of age.

At what age does a Rottweiler’s head split?

Usually, a Rottweiler’s head will grow faster than the rest of its body, so it’s normal for the head to look out of proportion to the body until the dog is completely grown. Males will have bigger head sizes than females and can take up to three years to fully develop their heads.

The skull doesn’t really “split,” however. The term splitting refers to the maturation of the breed’s head, which widens and broadens as it grows. Particularly as the muscles develop, it can create a line or indent along the dog’s head that appears like a split, but it’s all muscle. You may notice this forming between one and three years in your dog.

At what age do Rottweilers start guarding?

It takes time for a Rottweiler to grow, mature, and become territorial. Usually, you can expect your dog to start showing guarding behaviors around the age of two years old, though it differs from one dog to another. Keep in mind that your dog needs time to bond with you and to feel like your house is her home before taking any action.

At what age do Rottweilers calm down?

As with guarding behavior, you are likely to notice more mature, calmer behavior once your dog turns two years old. Then he will continue to calm down until he reaches four-to-five years old.

It all depends on how you’re training him, however. A dog receiving daily exercise is likely to be calmer than one that is kept cooped up. The AKC recommends two hours of exercise a day for your Rottweiler. Obedience training will help too and can begin as early as eight weeks old.

Are Rottweilers slow growers?

Rottweilers grow quickly early in life, and later experience growth spurts, but on the whole, they take their time reaching maturity. Unlike a small dog which may be fully grown by 6-8 months, a Rottweiler needs a full 18 months to three years to reach its final size.

Additional Resources

If you’re looking for more information about dog growth in general, we’ve created a puppy weight calculator, an in-depth guide to how heavy your dog should be, and a series of growth charts for different breeds (and dogs and mixed breeds in general):

]]>
Pit Bull Growth Chart: How Big Will Your Pit Bull Get? https://petnewsdaily.com/pit-bull-growth-chart-how-big-will-your-pit-bull-get/ Wed, 26 Oct 2022 00:30:18 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2544 We consulted with our veterinarian, Dr. Jennifer Coates, who reviewed and approved data about puppy weights and sizes, which we then used to create a convenient pit bull growth chart. You can use this as a reference to see how your puppy compares to the average.

The chart shows you a pit bull’s monthly average weight range during the growing phase. You can also refer to the puppy weight calculator to get an idea of how big your puppy is likely to get.

Pit Bull Growth Chart

Pitbull growth chart

 

  • 1 year: 25-55 pounds
  • Fully grown males: 55-70 pounds, 18-19 inches
  • Fully grown females: 40-55 pounds, 17-18 inches

Text Transcript of the Pit Bull Growth Chart

Pitbull – Age Weight Height
2 months
3 months
4 months
5 months
6 months
7 months
8 months
9 months
10 months
11 months

1 year
Fully grown males
Fully grown females

16-20 pounds
27-31 pounds
36-42 pounds
44-50 pounds
50-57 pounds
54-62 pounds
57-66 pounds
59-69 pounds
61-72 pounds
63-74 pounds

25-55 pounds
55-70 pounds
40-55 pounds

18-19 inches
17-18 inches

The American Pit Bull Terrier is one of the so-called bully breeds labeled a pit bull. In truth, “pit bull” isn’t a breed, but a term used to describe several other breeds, including the American Pit Bull Terrier, American Staffordshire Terrier, Bull Terrier, and Staffordshire Bull Terrier.

Many agree that the American Pit Bull Terrier and the American Staffordshire Terrier (AmStaffs for short) are the same, others say they’re different.

When looking specifically at AmStaffs, they are considered confident, courageous, and good-natured companions.1 Like most pit bulls, they have a stocky, muscular build, a well-defined jaw, pronounced cheekbones, a broad head, and round eyes set wide apart.

The breed descends from dogs raised in Great Britain that were created to excel in blood sports. According to the American Kennel Club (AKC), these dogs were expected to fight one another or attack other animals like bears and bulls as spectators watched. These harmful activities have since been outlawed, but they left behind a legacy of several breeds, including the Bulldog, Bull Terrior, and AmStaff.

The AKC decided in the 1930s to designate the breed as the American Staffordshire Terrier to separate it from its pit-fighting past. The group has not recognized the American Pit Bull Terrier.2 The United Kennel Club, however, has recognized it, and offers registration for the breed.3

If you recently brought home a pit bull puppy, you may be dealing with one or more of these breeds, depending on your puppy’s heritage. Regardless of the minor varieties in the breed, however, most will share general pit bull characteristics.

What Are the Growth Stages of a Pit bull?

Like most puppies, pit bull pups are born with their eyes and ears closed, which means they are blind and deaf for the first couple of weeks. They also have no teeth, and are completely reliant on their mothers for survival. Between one and three weeks of age, they will experience their most rapid growth. By three weeks, your pup’s eyes and ears will open and his teeth will emerge.

3 to 7 Weeks

During stage two, between three and seven weeks, your pup will interact with the other puppies in the litter as well as his human owners. He will continue to grow rapidly and will begin to learn social behaviors. By seven weeks, he should be running short distances, barking, wagging his tail, and in general, acting like a little dog.

7 to 12 Weeks

Between 7 and 12 weeks, your pup will be weaned from its mother and allowed to go to a new home. Training should begin at this time, and consists mostly of gentle play time, house training, and simple commands like “sit.”

12 to 16 Weeks

From 12 to 16 weeks, your puppy will become more independent and may act more like a toddler or teenager, refusing your commands and perhaps running away from you. This is when you can begin more serious obedience training so that she will learn appropriate behavior.

This is also when your pup will reach sexual maturity. Her adult coat will replace her puppy one, and when she will start teething, so keep your shoes safe! Talk to your veterinarian about the best time to spay and neuter your dog unless you are planning on having puppies.

16 to 40 Weeks

Between 16 to 40 weeks, your pit bull puppy will continue to grow and may go through periods of testing your authority. Stay consistent and use positive reinforcement for good behavior. Do not encourage mouthing or biting as this can lead to injuries later. It’s best to avoid games of tug-of-war at this time too as it can lead to dominance issues in some puppies.

40 Weeks and 1 Year

Between 40 weeks and one year, your dog will reach his mature size while still acting like a puppy. Daily exercise is important along with continued obedience training. Keep in mind that though your pup seems to be fully grown, she may continue to bulk out and may not reach her ultimate weight until the age of two or three years.

Feed Your Pit Bull Carefully

Picture of a Pitbull eating

During all stages of your puppy’s growth, feed a high-quality medium- or large-breed food, depending on how big you expect your dog to get. (Large breeds are considered 50-60 pounds but less than 90 pounds. Smaller than that is a medium-sized breed.)4 These foods provide the proper nutrition for a big dog like a pit bull but slow the growth rate to decrease the risk of joint problems.

The best food for pit bulls will have high protein levels to sustain their muscle growth. Be careful not to overfeed. Pit bulls can gain too much weight pretty easily, particularly if you’re feeding a lot of treats or spending too much time cuddling on the couch.

Choose treats that are high in protein, not fat. Feed these only occasionally and refrain from giving your dog people food. Check your dog for ideal weight by examining her ribs. You should be able to feel them when you run your hand over your dog’s middle, but not see them when looking at your dog from the side. If you can’t feel them, your dog may be overweight.

You can also look at your dog from the top. She should have a bigger rib cage tapering to a defined waist. If your pit bull is one smooth line from chest to tail, she likely weighs too much. The World Small Animal Veterinary Association (WSAVA) offers some helpful illustrations of proper body condition.

How Big Do Pit Bulls Get?

If you’re curious as to how big your pit bull will get, there are a few ways to estimate her final size.

Begin with the puppy’s age. If she is under one year, she is still growing. Most pit bulls reach their full height at one year old, though they may still gain some weight after that.

Next, consider gender. As with many other animals, males are typically larger than females.5 Whereas females can weigh between 40-55 pounds, a male can weigh between 55-70 pounds.

Take a look at your puppy’s parents if you can. Genetics play a large role in determining what your dog will look like. Typically females will look like their mothers and males like their fathers.

You can also take a look at your puppy’s paws. If they seem oversized or out-of-proportion to the rest of the dog’s body, she is probably still growing and will eventually “grow into” her paw size.

Another way to estimate your puppy’s final weight is to use this simple formula:6

(Current weight/Age in weeks) x 52.

For example, if your pup is 25 pounds at 16 weeks of age, the formula would look like this:

(25/16) = 1.57 (rounded up)

1.57 x 52 = 82 (rounded up)

The best time to check your pit bull with this formula is when he reaches about 12-16 weeks of age. (The larger the dog, the longer you should wait.)

You can also use our puppy size predictor to find out how big your puppy might get as an adult. Or, if you want to see the growth rates of other dogs, we’ve also created a Golden Retriever size chartGreat Dane growth chartChihuahua size chart, and Labrador growth chart.

When Do Pit Bulls Stop Growing?

In general, your pit bull puppy will be fully grown at one year old. But though he will have reached his full height by then, he may continue to grow more muscular for the next year or two before reaching his ultimate adult size.

Things That Affect Pit Bull Growth

As long as you feed your pit bull a nutritious diet, give him regular exercise, and take him to the vet for regular checkups, he should have no problem growing into a healthy adult dog.

There are some things that can affect your puppy’s growth rate, however. Diet is a big one. Puppies need the right amount of nutrients to meet their developmental needs, so it’s important to be sure to use a high-quality food.

Pit bulls are more susceptible to certain health issues, including allergies, torn knee ligaments, thyroid problems, hip dysplasia, and cataracts. Allergies are common, and you may notice that your puppy has itchy skin. If you notice symptoms like excessive rubbing of the face and licking the paws, check with your veterinarian.

A dog that’s not reaching her proper weight may be struggling with worms in the intestines. Hookworms and tapeworms can affect all dogs, particularly if your dog ingests contaminated soil or feces containing worm eggs or larvae. Look for symptoms like diarrhea, vomiting, weight loss, bloated belly, and a dull, dry coat. Ask your veterinarian about deworming your pup.

Spaying or neutering your pit bull early in life may also affect his growth. It can delay the solidification of the puppy’s growth plates, leading to a taller, leaner, and less bulky dog. Check with your veterinarian to determine the best time to spay or neuter your dog.

Too much strenuous exercise (like running on pavement or fierce tugging) can also stress your dog’s bones and joints, so it’s important to maintain a gentle exercise routine until your dog is one year old.

Finally, over-feeding can affect growth. It may put extra weight and pressure on the developing joints, increasing the risk of joint problems later in life.

Pit Bull Weight Calculator

PUPPY WEIGHT CALCULATOR
What’s your puppy’s breed

What’s your puppy’s weight

What’s your puppy’s birth date?

What’s your puppy’s gender


Frequently Asked Questions

How big is a 6-month-old pit bull?

At six months, pit bulls can range from 15 to 35 pounds, depending on heritage and gender. Females will be on the smaller end of the scale, and males on the larger end.

How fast do Pit Bulls grow?

It usually takes about a year for a pit bull to reach his full height, though he may continue to grow and develop more muscle after that. At six months, he will be about two-thirds of his final adult weight. Between two and six months, your puppy will experience his fastest growth rate.

How can you tell how big a Pit Bull will get?

To calculate your puppy’s adult weight, you can use a couple of different methods.

First, divide her weight at 20 weeks by her current age in weeks and multiply by 52. So if she weighed 35 pounds at 20 weeks, your equation would look like this:

35 divided by 20 = 1.75, 1.75×52=91 pounds.

It also helps to look at your puppy’s parents if you can, as he or she will likely resemble them in size. If you don’t know the breeder, check your puppy’s paw size. If it looks bigger than the rest of her body, she’s likely still growing and will eventually fill out so that the paws look more in proportion.

How big should a Pit Bull be at 4 months?

At four months, your male Pit Bull should be between 15-25 pounds, and your female between 10 and 20 pounds.

At what age to Pit Bulls become aggressive?

Pit Bulls can start developing signs of aggression between the ages of eight months and two years. You may notice signs before that, however, in some puppies, or you may notice a sudden aggression that you didn’t notice before. Some dogs may develop aggression when they reach sexual maturity at around six months of age.

Signs of aggression include barking and growling. More subtle signs include an alert gaze and a posture in which the dog seems to “rise up” on his toes. Proper obedience training is key for keeping any aggressive tendencies under control. Since the pit bull is typically very enthusiastic, it’s important to enforce proper manners early on.

At what age does a Pit Bull calm down?

As with most puppies, your pit bull will likely go through a period where she may seem hyperactive. This period typically lasts from three months to 12-18 months, after which you should notice your dog calming down. Consistent behavioral training is important during this entire time.

Additional Resources

If you’re looking for more information about dog growth in general, we’ve created a puppy weight calculator, an in-depth guide to how heavy your dog should be, and a series of growth charts for different breeds (and dogs and mixed breeds in general):

]]>
Australian Shepherd Growth Chart: How Big Will Your Australian Shepherd Get? https://petnewsdaily.com/australian-shepherd-growth-chart-how-big-will-your-australian-shepherd-get/ Wed, 26 Oct 2022 00:10:22 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2545 Most Aussies are medium-sized dogs, but when you get your new puppy, you may wonder how big he or she will get. We consulted with our veterinarian, Dr. Jennifer Coates, who reviewed and approved data about puppy weights and sizes, which we then used to create a convenient puppy growth chart. You can use this as a reference to see how your puppy compares to the average.

The chart shows you an Australian Shepherd’s monthly average weight range during the growing phase. You can also refer to the puppy weight calculator to get an idea of how big your puppy is likely to get.

Australian Shepherd Growth Chart

Australian Shepherd growth chart

  • 1 year: 36-65 pounds, 18-23 inches
  • Fully grown males: 50-65 pounds, 20-23 inches
  • Fully grown females: 40-55 pounds, 18-21 inches

Text Transcript of the Australian Shepherd Growth Chart

Australian Shepherd – Age Weight Height
2 months
3 months
4 months
5 months
6 months
7 months
8 months
9 months
10 months
11 months

1 year
Fully grown males
Fully grown females

4-7 pounds
14-27 pounds
19-35 pounds
23-43 pounds
26-49 pounds
29-55 pounds
31-58 pounds
33-63 pounds
34-65 pounds
35-65 pounds

36-65 pounds
50-65 pounds
40-55 pounds

3-5”
11-13”
11-14”
12-15”
13-17”
14-18”
15-19”
16-20”
17-21”
18-22”

18-23 inches
20-23 inches
18-21 inches

About Australian Shepherds

A “lean, tough ranch dog” is how the American Kennel Club (AKC) describes the Australian shepherd.1 The cowboy’s herding dog of choice, the “Aussie” has an irresistible impulse to herd just about anything, from sheep and cattle to birds and kids.

Remarkably intelligent and athletic, this pup can be “too much dog for a sedentary owner,” but if you’re up for a tireless, trainable partner, you’ve made the right choice.

The Australian Shepherd is descended from a line of herding dogs in Europe. The indigenous people known as the Basque raised their predecessors near the Pyrenees Mountains. In the early 1800s, they sailed to Australia, and there the breed was carefully refined by crossing it with Collies and Border Collies, among other breeds.

Eventually, the Basque people, with their dogs in tow, make their way to California. Ranchers there admired the herding dogs and assuming they were from Australia, named them as such.

Since then, the dogs have been a mainstay of western culture, used consistently in herding and as rodeo performers. They also make great drug detectors, service dogs, search-and-rescue dogs, and therapy dogs.

Known by other names like “Blue Heeler” and “California Shepherds” the Aussie is unique among breeds as it commonly (though not always) has two differently colored eyes. Those with pale blue eyes were considered sacred among the Native Americans, who called them “ghost eyes.”2

What Are the Growth Stages of an Australian Shepherd?

Your new puppy will experience her most rapid period of growth during the first two weeks of life. During that time, she will double her birth weight. By one-month old, your puppy will open her eyes and ears and will begin to socialize with other puppies in the litter. (Aussies typically have six to seven puppies per litter.)

2 Months to 4 Months

At 8 weeks old, her puppy teeth will have come in and she’ll know how to wag her tail and bark. This is when most puppies are weaned to go home with their new owners. This is the time to start socializing them—introducing them to new environments and people so they become accustomed to them.

This is also when your pup will begin her intense chewing age, so give her toys she can safely chew on while teaching her to leave other things (like that neighbor’s shoe) alone.

4 Months to 6 Months

At four months old, your puppy will start to resemble the adult dog she will become. Her ears may be floppy or may stand up, and she’s likely to weigh between 23 and 32 pounds, but only stand about 12-14 inches tall. She’ll have a lot of energy, but her bones will still be growing, so it’s important to use only gentle forms of exercise to avoid potential joint problems later in life.

6 Months to 8 Months

The six-month point marks the time when your Aussie will be about half of her adult size—usually 33-45 pounds and 15-17 inches tall. This is also when puppies reach their sexual maturity, so it’s important to keep a watchful eye on them to avoid unwanted puppies down the road. Talk to your veterinarian about spaying and neutering. Doing so too early can affect bone and joint growth.

8 Months to 12 Months

Between eight and 12 months, your Aussie should reach close to her full adult size. Her bones will become heavier and her muscles will develop, while her growth rate will slow. She is likely to keep filling out until she reaches around 16 months of age.

Proper Nutrition for Your Australian Shepherd Puppy

Picture of an Australian Shepherd eating

Until your dog reaches a year of age, be sure to choose a quality puppy-food variety that will have all the nutrients he needs for optimal growth. Small kibbles are best to match his tiny mouth and teeth.

The food you select should have a foundation of real meat for protein, as that will help support your pup’s growth and development while maintaining lean muscle mass. Look for a minimum of 22 percent protein (26 percent is better for active pups) and at least 8 percent fat, though your puppy will do well on more while growing and developing (12-16 percent).3 Healthy fats help support growth and development as well as nourished skin and coat.

The fat content should include omega fatty acids, such as salmon meals, fish oil, flaxseed, and chicken fat. If your Aussie is very active, consider an active or working breed formula.

Avoid foods that contain by-products, fillers, and artificial additives. An ingredient list that’s on the short side and contains mostly ingredients you can pronounce and understand is best. And though you may want to add some wet or canned food for moisture, don’t rely on canned food entirely. Dry food helps keep your puppy’s teeth clean.

Avoid feeding dairy products, chocolate, grapes, raisins, and other people food. Cooked bones from chicken, turkey, and pork are dangerous as they can potentially splinter and injure your dog. Give only medium-length beef marrow bones.

As your dog grows, keep an eye on her weight. Overweight and obesity in puppies can lead to health problems later in life. A good rule of thumb is to feed puppy-specific foods until your pup reaches full growth, which is usually around 12-16 months of age, then switch to an adult formula.

You can also check for ideal weight by examining the ribs and waist. You should be able to easily feel but not see the ribs and note a well-proportioned waist when looking at your dog from the top. The World Small Animal Veterinary Association (WSAVA) offers some helpful illustrations of proper body condition.

How Big Do Australian Shepherds Get?

To estimate how big your dog will get, first, take a look at his parents if you can. Genetics play a powerful role in weight and height. Your female pup should grow to a similar size as her mother, and a male pup will more closely resemble its father.

If you don’t have access to information about the parents, there are other ways to estimate your dog’s final size. In general, females will be smaller than males.4 Whereas females can reach up to 40-55 pounds, males can grow from 50-65 pounds.

Then take a look at your puppy’s paws. If they look out of proportion when related to the rest of his body, he’s still growing and will eventually “grow into” those paws.

Another way to estimate your puppy’s final growth weight is to use this simple formula:5

(Current weight/Age in weeks) x 52.

For example, if your pup is 25 pounds at 16 weeks of age, the formula would look like this:

  • (25/16) = 1.57 (rounded up)
  • 1.57 x 52 = 82 (rounded up)

The best time to check your Australian Shepherd with this formula is when they reach about 16 weeks of age.

Australian Shepherds will reach their full adult size at around 16 months of age. If your pup is still younger than that, you can expect him to keep growing.

When Will My Australian Shepherd Stop Growing?

You can expect that your Australian Shepherd will stop growing at around 16 months old. He’ll reach his full height at around one year, but then will continue to fill out for another four months after that.

The most rapid period of growth occurs during the first six months, then slows down significantly at eight months.

Things That Affect Growth

According to the Australian Shepherd Club of America, Australian Shepherds are vulnerable to the following health issues:6

  • Autoimmune thyroiditis—a thyroid disease that is easily treatable with medication
  • Cancers (hemangiosarcoma and lymphoma)
  • Cataracts
  • Elbow dysplasia
  • Epilepsy
  • Hip dysplasia
  • MDR1-related drug sensitivity
  • Moderate to severe allergies

Most of these will not affect growth except for allergies. You may notice digestive problems in some dogs, but most with allergies will display skin itch. She may continually scratch, bite, rub, and lick parts of her skin. Over time, this can cause infections. If you notice these signs, check with your veterinarian for suggestions.

It’s also important not to over-exercise your young Australian Shepherd, as that could exacerbate joint problems in the future. Her bones are still developing through the first year, so wait until after that to make your puppy your regular running partner. Stick with gentler forms of exercise like fetch and daily walks on soft surfaces (try to avoid excessive exercise on asphalt and pavement).

Spaying and neutering can also affect growth, depending on when the surgeries are done. Doing so earlier in the puppy’s life will increase the amount of time that the bones have to grow, which may make your puppy taller. The concern is that this will negatively affect the dog’s joints, causing them not to align properly, which could cause problems down the road. Check with your veterinarian on the best time to spay or neuter your dog.

Most veterinarians recommend that you test your dog for the MDR1 gene, as it’s extremely common in this breed and can make a dog sensitive to some medications. If both of the dog’s parents have been tested and are clear, you don’t need to test yours.

Finally, overfeeding your puppy could negatively affect growth. Too much weight too soon can stress the bones and joints while weakening tendons and muscles. The World Small Animal Veterinary Association (WSAVA) offers some helpful illustrations of proper body condition.

Australian Shepherd Weight Calculator

PUPPY WEIGHT CALCULATOR
What’s your puppy’s breed

What’s your puppy’s weight

What’s your puppy’s birth date?

What’s your puppy’s gender


Frequently Asked Questions

How big should my Australian Shepherd be at 6 months?

At six months old, a female Australian Shepherd will range from 26-39 pounds and 13-15 inches tall at the shoulder. A male will range from 38-49 pounds and 15-17 inches tall at the shoulder.

How big will my Australian Shepherd puppy get?

When fully grown, your female Australian will be between 40-55 pounds and 18-21 inches. Males will range from 50 to 65 pounds and stand 20-23 inches tall.

How much should a 7-month-old Australian Shepherd weigh?

At 7 months, your female Australian Shepherd will weigh between 29-44 pounds and stand 14-16 inches tall. Your male will be 44-55 pounds and stand 16-18 inches tall.

At what age do Australian Shepherds calm down?

Australian Shepherds are known for their amazing energy. They are up before you are, constantly ready for action, and still going when you’re ready to hit the sack. On those days when you just can’t keep up, remember that this is what your dog was bred for—all-day work. So she can’t really put a lid on it even if you may want her to.

According to the Aussie University, most Australian Shepherds should begin calming down at about two years of age.7 At that point, they’re considered mature dogs. Not all will seem calmer at this age, though. Some may take longer for their high energy to drop off, but after the age of two, they should be able to at least better manage themselves.

You can cope by giving your dog plenty of exercise. Take him out to walk on the trails, play fetch, let him play in your backyard, and take him for a visit to the dog park.

How tall should a 5-month-old Aussie be?

At five months, your female Aussie will range from 14-16 inches high at the shoulder, while your male will be between 16-18 inches.

Additional Resources

If you’re looking for more information about dog growth in general, we’ve created a puppy weight calculator, an in-depth guide to how heavy your dog should be, and a series of growth charts for different breeds (and dogs and mixed breeds in general):

]]>
French Bulldog Growth Chart: How Big Will Your French Bulldog Get? https://petnewsdaily.com/french-bulldog-growth-chart-how-big-will-your-french-bulldog-get/ Wed, 26 Oct 2022 00:05:25 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2546 If you recently brought home a French Bulldog puppy, you may be wondering how big he will get. We consulted with our veterinarian, Dr. Jennifer Coates, who reviewed and approved data about puppy weights and sizes, which we then used to create a convenient French Bulldog growth chart. You can use this as a reference to see how your puppy compares to the average.

The chart shows you a Frenchie’s monthly average weight range during the growing phase. You can also refer to the puppy weight calculator to get an idea of how big your puppy is likely to get.

French Bulldog Growth Chart

French Bulldog growth chart

  • 1 year: 17-28 pounds, 11-13 inches
  • Fully grown: Under 28 pounds, 11-13 inches

Text Transcript of the French Bulldog Growth Chart

French Bulldog – Age Weight Height
2 months
3 months
4 months
5 months
6 months
7 months
8 months
9 months
10 months
11 months

1 year
Fully grown

3-7 pounds
7-12 pounds
10-16 pounds
11-20 pounds
13-22 pounds
14-25 pounds
15-27 pounds
16-28 pounds
17-28 pounds
17-28 pounds

17-28 pounds
Under 28 pounds

4-6 inches

7-9 inches

10-11 inches

11-13 inches
11-13 inches

With large bat ears and a playful, alert disposition, the French Bulldog is one of the world’s most popular breeds, according to the American Kennel Club (AKC).1

Affectionately known by their owners as “Frenchies,” they resemble standard Bulldogs in miniature except for the large ears that are a standout feature.

The AKC traces the dog’s roots back to the canine gladiators used in bull-baiting, a blood sport outlawed in the mid-19th century. Breeders bred the standard bulldog down to a toy variety, creating the Frenchie of today.

Donning a smooth, brilliant coat and a compact and muscular body, the Frenchie may be small but he makes a wonderful watchdog. That doesn’t mean he barks a lot, though.

He’s a favorite in the cities because he’s not noisy, likes most people and other dogs, and adapts well to indoor environments. His watchfulness instead can be attributed to his natural alertness and the fact that he barks only when warranted.

His head is typically large and square with heavy, adorable wrinkles above the short nose. Purebred colors include fawn, white, brindle, and brindle & white. He sheds but not heavily, so he can be easily taken care of with daily brushing.

What Are the Growth Stages of a French Bulldog?

When your French Bulldog is born, she will be both blind and deaf. She’ll spend most of her time sleeping and nursing until she’s around two weeks old, at which time her eyes and ears will start to open.

Birth to Six Weeks

By one month of age, your puppy’s baby teeth will start to come in, and she’ll start walking around. Play will become important as the puppies in the litter become aware of their surroundings. Between four and six weeks, she’ll start exploring her boundaries and improving her physical coordination.

Six Weeks to Two Months

Between six and eight weeks is when puppies should start receiving their vaccinations, including distemper and parvovirus.2 Most Frenchies are ready to be fully weaned off mother’s milk at eight weeks. This is when you’ll typically take your new puppy home.

Two Months to Four Months

Between two and three months, your puppy is ready to be housetrained and can start learning basic commands like “sit” and “down.” She’ll start to put on more weight, and is likely to be very excitable and full of energy. This is a good time to begin socializing her, gently exposing her to new people and environments, and controlling any aggressive behaviors like nipping at people.

Four Months to Five Months

At four months, your Frenchie will reach about half her adult size. She’ll start to lose her baby teeth and gain her adult teeth—a process that lasts until about six months of age. This is when she will want to chew on everything, so be sure she has plenty of chew toys and cold treats. She may challenge your authority at times, as this is her “toddler” phase, but consistent, gentle correction will help, as will daily attention and exercise.

Five Months to Eight Months

Between five and six months, your puppy will reach sexual maturity. This is a period of fast growth and many changes, so remember to be patient. Your dog may act like a teenager and get into trouble now and then. At seven months she’ll be incredibly active, adventurous, and curious, and will start to take on adult-dog characteristics in terms of her physical development.

At eight months of age, it’s time to talk to your veterinarian about the spay/neuter process. Many will recommend waiting until your puppy has finished growing to avoid interfering with musculoskeletal development, which occurs around nine months to a year.

Nine Months to 1 Year

The growth rate slows at this point, but your puppy will continue to put on weight as she fills out. She’ll need plenty of socialization and activity and lots of positive reinforcement training. If you’re having any behavioral problems at this point, it’s a good idea to talk to a trainer.

Between 10 and 12 months is when your puppy will reach her full adult size. She may get bored with her established routine and need new stimulation. Try walking and exploring new areas, taking her on new adventures, or trying out some new toys. By a year old, she should be well socialized and well-behaved, though she may still have the energy of a puppy.

Feed Your French Bulldog Carefully

Picture of a French Bulldog eating.

During all stages of your puppy’s growth, feed high-quality small-breed food. These foods provide the proper nutrition for a small dog like a Frenchie. A diet that includes protein from real meat, like poultry, beef, or fish is important.

Feed your puppy three times a day while he’s still growing, between the ages of two and six months old. Keep in mind that your puppy may eat a bit, wander around, then come back and finish. This can be due to his flat face and breathing issues.

Leave the food down for at least 30 minutes before taking it away. Owners often find that feeding their Frenchies in enhanced bowls with tilted rims and elevated legs makes mealtime easier.

After six months, you can reduce the feeding schedule to two meals a day. Large meals can lead to gastric distress or even a twisted stomach, which can be life-threatening. Smaller meals also help control a dog’s blood sugar levels.

Frenchies will also have an easier time eating soft wet foods, but they need dry kibble to keep their teeth clean. A combination of the two may work best for your dog.

This breed is prone to obesity, which can damage their physical structure and put them at a higher risk for health issues. Particularly as your puppy gets older, watch his calorie intake and weight. Give treats only in moderation, and avoid giving table scraps, cooked bones, and foods high in fat.

When your dog reaches one year old, switch from puppy food to adult food. Puppy food will be too high in calories at this point, so adult food is healthier and more likely to keep your dog at the right weight.

Do choose quality food made by a conscientious company. A well-balanced diet is key to the health of your dog.

To check your puppy’s weight as he grows, look at him from the top. He should have a bigger rib cage tapering to a defined waist. If you notice him looking too round, offer a bit more exercise or cut back on his food just a little.

If you can see his ribs, he needs more food. The World Small Animal Veterinary Association (WSAVA) offers some helpful illustrations of proper body condition.

The standards of many breeds include a range of height and weight.

The AKC is less particular with the French Bulldog, however. His height ranges from 11-13 inches, but pretty much any weight is okay as long as it’s under 28 pounds. (Any dog that weighs over that is considered disqualified by the AKC.)

How Big Do French Bulldogs Get?

Picture of a French Bulldog looking huge next to a smaller dog

If you’re curious as to how big your French Bulldog will get, there are a few ways to estimate her final size.

Begin with the puppy’s age. Frenchies reach their full height when they are between nine and twelve months old, and their full weight around eight months old, though they’ll continue to fill out after that.

Next, consider gender. As with many other animals, males are typically larger than females.3 Whereas females can weigh between 17-28 pounds, a male can weigh between 20-28 pounds.

Take a look at your puppy’s parents if you can. Genetics plays a large role in determining what your dog will look like. Typically females will look like their mothers and males like their fathers.

You can also take a look at your puppy’s paws. If they seem oversized or out-of-proportion to the rest of the dog’s body, she is probably still growing and will eventually “grow into” her paw size.

Another way to estimate your puppy’s final weight is to use this simple formula:4

(Current weight/Age in weeks) x 52.

For example, if your pup is 25 pounds at 16 weeks of age, the formula would look like this:

  • (25/16) = 1.57 (rounded up)
  • 1.57 x 52 = 82 (rounded up)

The best time to check your French Bulldog with this formula is when he reaches about 12 weeks of age.

You can also use our puppy size predictor to find out how big your puppy might get as an adult. Or, if you want to see the growth rates of other dogs, we’ve also created a Golden Retriever size chartGreat Dane growth chartChihuahua size chart, and Labrador growth chart.

When Do Frenchies Stop Growing?

Most French Bulldogs have reached close to their adult height and weight by nine months of age. They are likely to continue to fill out after that, though, and may gain a few more pounds until they reach one year old.

After the age of one year, it’s important to carefully watch your Frenchie’s weight. This breed has a relatively high tendency to gain weight, so watch his food and daily exercise level carefully.

Things That Affect French Bulldog Growth

The French Bulldog is vulnerable to a few specific health problems, including the following:

  • Skin problems
  • Ear infections
  • Breathing problems (because of their flat noses)
  • Eye Problems (like cataracts)
  • Spinal injury
  • Hip dysplasia and other joint issues
  • Heatstroke

Issues that may specifically affect your puppy’s growth include:

  • Nutrition: A lack of proper nutrition could result in stunted growth. Make sure to feed your puppy a diet formulated for his life stage.
  • Allergies: French Bulldogs can be prone to allergies. If you notice excessive skin itching, sneezing, or other signs of allergies, check with your veterinarian for solutions.
  • Spaying/neutering: These operations, though critical to your dog’s long-term health, can affect your pet’s metabolism if performed too early. Talk to your veterinarian about the best time to spay or neuter your pup.
  • Overfeeding: Overfeeding can cause your puppy to gain too much weight too soon. This can cause problems that affect growth rate, including joint and back problems, breathing difficulties, and heart diseases.
  • Genetics: Some health issues are inherited. Check with your breeder to be advised of any that may affect your puppy. How big your puppy’s parents were will also be a critical factor in how big your puppy will become.
  • Exercise: A physically active dog will be healthier than a sedentary dog, but keep in mind that it’s possible to overexercise your Frenchie. Long walks aren’t recommended due to common breathing problems. Short walks and frequent playtimes are the best way to exercise your dog.

French Bulldog Weight Calculator

PUPPY WEIGHT CALCULATOR
What’s your puppy’s breed

What’s your puppy’s weight

What’s your puppy’s birth date?

What’s your puppy’s gender


Frequently Asked Questions

How can I tell how big my French Bulldog will get?

Most French Bulldogs will range from 11-13 inches high and will weigh up to 28 pounds. Look at your puppy’s parents if you can, as her size will often be similar to theirs. Females are usually smaller than males, and they reach close to their full growth at around nine months old. If your dog is younger than that, she’s still growing.

Use our puppy growth chart above to estimate your puppy’s final weight, or take the weight of your puppy at four months and double it to estimate how large she’ll be when fully grown.

At what age do French Bulldogs stop growing?

You can expect your French Bulldog to reach close to his final weight by nine months old. This is when he will reach his final height, but he will keep growing after that, mainly filling out muscles until he reaches a year old.

How much should a 6-month-old French Bulldog weigh?

At six months old, your Frenchie should weigh between 17 and 22 pounds, with an average weight of about 18.5 pounds for males and 17 pounds for females.

How much weight should a French Bulldog puppy gain?

At birth, a French Bulldog will weigh between 8 and 10 ounces. At one week, he’ll weigh between 14 and 17 ounces, and at three months, between 7 and 12 pounds. A healthy puppy will continue to gain weight until he reaches full size at about 9 months, which should be between 17 and 28 pounds.

How much should a 5-month-old Frenchie eat?

At five months of age, a French Bulldog puppy will eat an average of about 2/3 to 2 cups total per day of puppy food, depending on her weight. Those that weigh close to 12 pounds will be on the lower end and those up to 20 pounds on the higher end.

At this age, it’s also important to split up your puppy’s feedings. Three times a day is ideal for her digestion until she reaches six months of age.

Why are some Frenchies bigger than others?

Male Frenchies will typically be bigger than females, although genetics, body shape, and lifestyle can also affect size. Males have more muscle and bulk so they are likely to be a few pounds heavier. But in general, purebred French Bulldogs will range between 11 and 13 inches high and up to 28 pounds.

You may notice that your Frenchie’s legs are longer than you expected. This can be because of genetics, early spaying/neutering, or early trauma that affected the growth of your puppy’s growth plates and bones. Mixed-breed Frenchies may also be taller than purebreds.

There are some so-called mini or teacup Frenchies out there today as well. They aren’t an “official” or recognized breed by the AKC, but they are popular with many owners. Bred to be smaller than normal, they will grow to less than 11 inches tall and weigh less than 28 pounds.

Additional Resources

If you’re looking for more information about dog growth in general, we’ve created a puppy weight calculator, an in-depth guide to how heavy your dog should be, and a series of growth charts for different breeds (and dogs and mixed breeds in general):

]]>
Great Pyrenees Growth Chart: How Big Will Your Great Pyrenees Get? https://petnewsdaily.com/great-pyrenees-growth-chart-how-big-will-your-great-pyrenees-get/ Tue, 25 Oct 2022 23:00:57 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2548 If you’re the proud owner of a new Great Pyrenees puppy, you know he’s going to get big. The question is: just how big? We consulted with our veterinarian, Dr. Jennifer Coates, who reviewed and approved data about puppy weights and sizes, which we then used to create a convenient Great Pyrenees growth chart. You can use this as a reference to see how your puppy compares to the average.

The chart shows you a Great Pyrenees’ monthly average weight range during the growing phase. You can also refer to the puppy weight calculator to get an idea of how big your puppy is likely to get.

Great Pyrenees Growth Chart

Great Pyrenees Growth Chart

  • 1 year: 80-115 pounds
  • Fully grown males: 100 pounds and up, 27-32 inches
  • Fully grown females: 85 pounds and up, 25-29 inches

Text Transcript of the Great Pyrenees Growth Chart

Great Pyrenees – Age Weight Height
2 months
3 months
4 months
5 months
6 months
7 months
8 months
9 months
10 months
11 months

1 year
Fully grown males
Fully grown females

15-25 pounds
25-40 pounds
35-55 pounds
45-70 pounds
50-80 pounds
55-85 pounds
60-90 pounds
65-95 pounds
70-100 pounds
70-105 pounds

80-115 pounds
100 pounds and up
85 pounds and up

27-32 inches
25-29 inches

About Great Pyrenees

A steadfast guardian is what you get when you bring home a Great Pyrenees. Large, strong, and powerful, this working dog makes a mellow companion and vigilant protector for the home and family.

Often described as “majestic,” they typically have a lush weatherproof coat that is all white, though they can also be white with gray, tan, or reddish-brown markings.1

Originally bred to work with peasant shepherds as herding dogs in the Pyrenees Mountains (between France and Spain), the Great Pyrenees was tasked with protecting sheep from wolves, bears, and even livestock rustlers.

They learned to be patient watchers capable of springing into action whenever danger threatened.

This is an old breed, believed to have arrived in the Pyrenean Mountains with their shepherds around the year 3,000 B.C. Fossils of them have been found in the region and dated to between 1,800 B.C. and 1,000 B.C.

According to the American Kennel Club (AKC), experts “think the breed probably evolved from white mountain dogs that originated in Asia Minor as many as 11,000 years ago.”2

What Are the Growth Stages of a Great Pyrenees?

Through the first year of her life, your Great Pyrenees puppy will go through many growth periods. Your job is to watch to see that she reaches her developmental milestones when she should.

Birth to Two Weeks

Between birth and two weeks, your puppy will be at her most helpless. She is blind and deaf and completely reliant on her mother for survival. At two weeks old, she’ll open her eyes and begin to hear sounds. By one month of age, she will have gained the use of her senses and will be playing and interacting with her litter mates.

Two Months to Three Months

By two months of age, your puppy will be ready to be weaned from her mother so she can go home with you. At this point, feeding and nutrition become very important. It’s best to feed your puppy three meals a day, with the portion sizes changing as she grows. You can also start teaching her basic commands like “sit” and “down,” and start house and obedience training.

Keep in mind that this breed likes to bark. They are naturally protective, so they often bark at everything new to them. Expose them regularly to new people, places, and environments to help them learn about what is “okay” and not a threat.

Three Months to Four Months

At three months old, your puppy will have gained quite a bit of weight. Males weigh between 30-40 pounds and females 25-35 pounds. This is a good time to train your puppy to walk on a leash. Don’t let her pull! You may be able to handle that now, but when she gets to her full adult height it will be much more difficult. Check with a trainer if needed.

This is also a good time to get your dog used to grooming. Daily brushing will help to keep her coat in good shape while keeping shedding to a minimum.

Four Months to Six Months

Between four and five months, your puppy will become a lot more playful. She should be positively settled with you in your home, but you will need to continue regular obedience training and socialization. Daily play and exercise times are critical to helping her manage her energy.

Six Months to Nine Months

At six months, your Great Pyrenees may start showing signs of aggression as she develops physical strength. She will be taller and heavier and may be asking for a lot of exercise. Since she is still growing, don’t overexert her, as this can injure her bones and cause joint problems later in life. Instead, break up her exercise into several smaller sessions.

She needs to be kept mentally stimulated so she doesn’t get herself into trouble. Provide her with plenty of chew toys and daily walks. Between seven and eight months, she should be doing well in her daily routine with you, and you can start taking her on longer walks. You can reduce her mealtimes to two a day, but avoid long runs on the pavement as her bones are still developing.

Nine Months to Twelve Months

Around nine months old, your Great Pyrenees will be close to her final height and should start to behave more maturely. As long as you’ve been consistent in her training, she’ll be listening to you more. Between 10 and 12 months, you can take her for longer walks and even hikes. On her one-year birthday, your dog is nearly full grown, though you can expect her to continue filling out for another 6-12 months.

Tips on Great Pyrenees Nutrition for Optimal Growth

Picture of a person feeding a Great Pyrenees

Large breed dogs experience rapid growth in the first few months of their life, so proper nutrition is critical. You want your puppy to get all the nutrients he needs, but you also don’t want him to grow too fast. Uncontrolled growth (that leads to overweight) can increase the risk that your dog will develop joint problems like hip dysplasia later in life.

All high-quality kibble dog foods specifically designed for large-breed puppies have the optimum balance of nutrients key to controlling bone growth. Avoid foods labeled “for all sizes” as these will not be appropriate for your Great Pyrenees.

Your puppy will have a large muscle mass, so he’ll need a high protein level of 26 percent or so from real meat sources like beef, chicken, fish, and lamb. Fat content should be 8 percent or higher while he’s growing and should come from salmon oils and chicken fat, which supports bone growth, a healthy coat, and brain and eye function.

Break up the feedings when your puppy is small—three or four times a day.

The Great Pyrenees is prone to bloat, so small meals are best. So-called “free feeding” is not a good idea (leaving food down all the time) as if left to their own devices, your puppy may suffer from bloating which can escalate to a serious issue.

This is a large dog, but once fully grown, he has a slow metabolism, so he may not need as much food as you think. Once he settles into his adult weight, you can switch to adult food to keep him healthy.

Maintaining a Healthy Weight In Your Great Pyrenees

With a Great Pyrenees, it can be challenging to determine if he is overweight or underweight just by looking at him. The large size and body build can trick the untrained eye.

The great Pyrenees can be underweight, particularly if he’s not getting the proper nutrition. Illness and genetics can also cause weight loss. Being overweight is also possible, particularly once your dog reaches adulthood.

To determine how your dog is doing, use the “touch method.” Feel along your dog’s ribs, spinal column, and hip bones by pressing gently against his coat. If you can easily feel the bones, your dog is underweight. The bones should have a thin covering of muscle and fat if your dog is the right weight.

Another good way to accurately estimate your dog’s weight is to get him wet! Soak him down for a bath. Then you can observe his real figure. When looking at your dog from the top, you should be able to see an hourglass body shape with a marked tuck at the waist. If you don’t see a waist, your dog may be overweight. The World Small Animal Veterinary Association (WSAVA) offers some helpful illustrations of proper body condition.

If you notice problems with weight, check with your veterinarian. Maintaining a healthy weight can go a long way in making sure your Great Pyrenees has a long and enjoyable life.

How Big Do Great Pyrenees Get?

The AKC notes that an adult male Great Pyrenees will weigh 100 pounds or more, and a female 85 pounds or more.

While your dog is still a puppy, there are a few ways you can estimate what she may weigh as an adult. Start with her sex. As with many other animals, males are typically larger than females.3

Next, consider your puppy’s age. Most will need at least one year to reach close to their adult size. As long as your puppy is younger than that, she is still growing.

If you purchased your dog from a breeder, ask them for information about your puppy’s parents. Genetics plays a large role in height and weight. Your female puppy will likely grow to be a size similar to her mother, and your male is likely to look more like his father.

Check your puppy’s paws too. Oversized paws are a classic feature that indicates your puppy is still growing.

Another way to estimate your puppy’s final growth weight is to use this simple formula:4

(Current weight/Age in weeks) x 52.

For example, if your pup is 25 pounds at 16 weeks of age, the formula would look like this:

  • (25/16) = 1.57 (rounded up)
  • 1.57 x 52 = 82 (rounded up)

The best time to check your Great Pyrenees with this formula is when they reach about 16 weeks of age.

When Do Great Pyreneese Stop Growing?

As a large-sized breed, your Great Pyrenees will take longer to reach his full weight than a smaller breed. At one year, he will be close to his final height, but you can expect him to continue filling out with muscle for at least another year. This is when his chest will get broader and his neck will thicken, while his other muscles become larger and more defined.

Things That Affect Growth

Great Pyrenees are prone to certain genetic diseases and conditions.5 These include the following:

  • Hip and elbow dysplasia
  • Bloat and digestive tortion (stomach twisting)
  • Certain types of cancer, including osteosarcoma (bone cancer)
  • Heart disease

Most of these won’t affect your puppy’s growth, but some can. The vulnerability to bloat, for instance, is why it’s best to feed your puppy three to four meals a day. Smaller meals reduce the likelihood of bloating.

Good nutrition is also key to optimal growth. Dog foods that aren’t designed for large breeds or that lack real sources of protein will not give your puppy the nutrients he needs. Such foods may also contribute to accelerated growth, which can increase the risk of joint problems later in life.

Overfeeding can also be damaging and may increase the risk of your dog developing osteochondritis dissecans or OCD. This is a condition in which the puppy grows too quickly and the cartilage in her joints doesn’t attach properly to the bones. Surgery may be required to fix the problem. Far better to stick to the recommended growth rate and not overfeed.

Spaying or neutering your puppy may also affect growth if it is done too early. Though essential to avoiding unwanted puppies and even diseases like cancer, when performed too soon it can negatively affect bone and joint growth. Check with your veterinarian to determine the best time.

Exercise helps with a puppy’s growth and development, but it’s wise to be cautious about exercising too much too early, particularly before the age of six months. Long exercise periods on hard surfaces (like pavement or asphalt) can impact the formation of joints, ligaments, tendons, and muscles, leading to problems later on.

Infections with intestinal parasites like hookworms can also affect your puppy’s growth. If you notice that he doesn’t seem to be gaining weight like he should check with your vet about a potential deworming treatment.

Great Pyrenees Weight Calculator

PUPPY WEIGHT CALCULATOR
What’s your puppy’s breed

What’s your puppy’s weight

What’s your puppy’s birth date?

What’s your puppy’s gender


Frequently Asked Questions

How big is a 6-month-old Great Pyrenees?

A six-month-old female great Pyrenees will range from 50-60 pounds. A male will weigh between 70-80 pounds.

At what age are Great Pyrenees full grown?

When your Great Pyrenees reaches two years of age, you can consider him to be fully grown. Before that, he’s still developing muscle and bone. By one year of age, however, he will be close to his final height and weight, and will simply be filling out after that.

How much should a 10-month-old Great Pyrenees weigh?

By 10 months of age, your male Great Pyrenees should weigh between 90-100 pounds, while your female will be between 70-85 pounds.

At what age does a Great Pyrenees calm down?

Most Great Pyrenees take between 12 and 16 months to begin to calm down and act more maturely. You may notice some changes at that time, but the process won’t be near completion until around two years. Up until then, your dog may still be acting like a puppy even though he’s reached near his full size!

This breed was bred to be independent, which means they may not always be eager to please their owners. Regular training and positive reinforcement will help, and as your dog learns his place in your family pack, you should notice more mature behavior.

At what age do Great Pyrenees start guarding?

Great Pyrenees are bred to be guarding dogs, so you may wonder what’s up if your dog is still not showing guarding tendencies. She is likely to start barking at new things around 6-8 months of age, but since she hasn’t matured yet, she may not be showing any true guarding tendencies.

Between the age of a year and 18 months, as long as your dog has been receiving regular training, he should start showing more guarding tendencies. He may raise the alarm if he spots something new or different around the house or yard, for instance.

If you bought your dog for herding, remember that though instinct plays a role, training is still necessary to help your dog learn what is expected of him.

At what age do Great Pyrenees start barking?

Great Pyrenees love to bark. As an owner of one of these dogs, you may find yourself wondering how to stop rather than start the barking!

Usually around 6-8 months, your puppy will “find her voice” and start trying out her guarding tendencies. This depends on the dog—some will take less or more time than others. Once the barking starts, though, it’s unlikely to stop. Great Pyrenees bark at strange people, weird noises, birds, kids playing, noise on televisions, and objects that are not where they’re supposed to be—anything they feel may be a threat.

You can help manage the barking, but understand that you will not be able to eliminate it. This is bred into the dog. The more socializing you do, however, the better, as this will expose your dog to what’s “normal” and help her limit those things she sees as threats.

Regular exercise also helps, as does a lot of mental stimulation and training. Great Pyrenees are smart dogs, so they need to have a job to do.

Finally, consider “thanking” your dog for alerting you to the potential danger. Ask “what is it?” If you look and find it’s nothing important, calmly tell your dog everything is ok and lead her away, telling her she’s a “good dog.” This often helps your dog to calm down faster than will trying to get her to stop barking.

Additional Resources

If you’re looking for more information about dog growth in general, we’ve created a puppy weight calculator, an in-depth guide to how heavy your dog should be, and a series of growth charts for different breeds (and dogs and mixed breeds in general):

]]>
Standard Poodle Growth Chart: How Big Will Your Standard Poodle Get? https://petnewsdaily.com/standard-poodle-growth-chart-how-big-will-your-standard-poodle-get/ Tue, 25 Oct 2022 22:00:58 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2549 As you get to know your new puppy, you may be wondering how big he or she might get. We consulted with our veterinarian, Dr. Jennifer Coates, who reviewed and approved data about puppy weights and sizes, which we then used to create a convenient puppy growth chart. You can use this as a reference to see how your puppy compares to the average.

The chart shows you a Standard Poodle’s monthly average weight range during the growing phase. You can also refer to the puppy weight calculator to get an idea of how big your puppy is likely to get.

Standard Poodle Growth Chart

Standard poodle growth chart

  • 1 year: 40-70 pounds, 23-27”
  • Fully grown males: 60-70 pounds, over 15 inches
  • Fully grown females: 40-50 pounds, over 15 inches

Text Transcript of the Standard Poodle Growth Chart

Standard Poodle – Age Weight Height
2 months
3 months
4 months
5 months
6 months
7 months
8 months
9 months
10 months
11 months

1 year
Fully grown males
Fully grown females

11-20 pounds
20-26 pounds
24-35 pounds
26-41 pounds
28-48 pounds
30-55 pounds
32-57 pounds
34-61 pounds
36-63 pounds
38-68 pounds

40-70 pounds
60-70 pounds
40-50 pounds
40 – 55 lbs
50 – 60 lbs
50 – 65 lbs
55 – 70 lbs
55 – 70 lbs
60 – 75 lbs
65 – 80 lbs
65 – 80 lbs

12-13”
14-17
18-19

18-23”

18-24”

23-27”
over 15 inches
over 15 inches

About Standard Poodles

The poodle is one of the most recognizable breeds of dogs available. It comes in three different sizes: Standard, Miniature, and Toy. They all have similar characteristics, with some key differences.

In this article, we’ll focus on the Standard Poodle.

One of the reasons people love the poodle is its coat. Considered non-allergenic or hypoallergenic, it releases fewer allergens into the air than most other dogs’ coats do. Poodles rarely shed, making them the perfect choice for people who typically suffer from allergies to dog dander.

Poodles can also be a lot of fun to groom. Their curly hair can be trimmed and poofed into all sorts of fancy clips, making this breed the true fashion icon of dogs.

Despite this characteristic, poodles are eager, athletic, and “wickedly smart” according to the American Kennel Club (AKC), and can be trained “with great success.”1

The breed originated in Germany, where the word “pudelin” refers to splashing in the water. Indeed, the Standard Poodle began as a retrieving water dog more than 400 years ago. Its coat protected it against the elements and give it a free range of movement in the water.

Today, the poodle is a highly versatile breed that can be trained to do just about anything. Athletic, agile, smart, and eager to please their owners, they make natural entertainers, retrievers, good hunters, helpful therapy dogs, and even superb watchdogs.

Without enough activity, though, they may get bored, so daily exercise and mental stimulation are critical for their overall health and good behavior.

What Are the Growth Stages of a Standard Poodle?

A Standard Poodle, when first born, will weigh only a few ounces to a pound and be less than 10 inches high at the shoulder. The first few weeks will be a time of rapid growth and development, when their eyes and ears will open and they’ll start interacting with people and their littermates.

1 to 2 Months Old

By one month old, your Standard Poodle puppy will start exploring her new world. She’ll be putting on weight, and will range between five and nine pounds. Her baby teeth will come in around this time, and she’ll be able to start eating dog food.

2-3 Months Old

By two months old, she’ll be ready to be weaned from her mother and go home with you. It’s good to start housetraining at this time, and to get her vaccinations. She should eat between three to four meals a day of high-quality puppy food, and weigh between 10 and 20 pounds. (Males are usually bigger than females.)

3-4 Months Old

At three months old, your puppy will start to show an independent streak. Housetraining should be well underway, along with leash training. Don’t be surprised if you notice her shedding a little bit. This is when her wispy puppy hairs will be replaced with her more adult, thicker hair. The process is gradual, though, so you don’t have to worry about excessive shedding.

4-8 Months Old

Between four and eight months, your poodle’s growth rate will start to slow down a little bit. She will be leaving the puppy stage and entering the adolescent stage. This is when she’s more likely to want to explore, test her limits, and even get herself into trouble! Consistent obedience training with positive enforcement will be key during this time to help her grow into an enjoyable companion.

This is also when your puppy’s adult teeth will start coming in, so be sure she has plenty of chew toys to help alleviate the pain and satisfy her need to chew. By five months your Standard Poodle will be large—males will weigh between 32 and 40 pounds and females between 26 and 30 pounds, so she will likely be more of a handful. Housetraining should be complete by now, but it’s important to continue with obedience training and socialization.

By six months, your dog will be larger than small- and medium-sized dogs of other breeds. She’ll still be playful but may be clumsy at times as she learns to manage her long limbs. She’ll need daily walks to keep her energy in check. At the eight-month mark, you can expect her to look more like an adult dog and to be near her final adult size, though she’ll continue to fill out until she reaches two years old.

1 to 2 Years Old

At the one-year age point, she should be acting a little calmer and more mature, though poodles take up to two years to reach full growth and maturity.

Best Nutrition for a Standard Poodle

Picture of a Standard Poodle eating

At all stages of growth, it’s important to feed your Standard Poodle a high-quality, large-breed dog food with real meat (beef, chicken, pork, fish, lamb) as the first ingredient.

Avoid those foods with meat by-products, chemical preservatives, and a lot of artificial dyes and flavors.

Choose instead those with fewer ingredients that you can pronounce and understand and that are nutritionally balanced for a large dog. A food “for all sizes” will not provide your puppy with the right nutrients for optimal growth.

Until your puppy reaches about one year of age, it’s best to split his meals up to three meals per day. This is easier on his digestive system and helps keep his blood sugar in balance.

When your dog reaches the one-year mark, you can back off to twice a day and choose an adult (rather than a puppy) food. Follow the suggested feeding guidelines, and check with your veterinarian if you notice any issues.

Poodles do well on dry food, but you can also combine wet and dry if you like to add some extra taste and moisture. Avoid an all-wet-food diet, however, as this isn’t good for your dog’s teeth and gums.

Dry kibble is also easier on the stomach and intestines. An all-wet-food diet can lead to runny stools.

Snacks and treats can be an important part of your dog’s diet and training program. Just be careful what you feed your four-legged pal, as the wrong foods can mess up his stomach and lead to overweight.

Choose baked or dry dog treats for snacks, and save the moist or chewy ones for training rewards.

Don’t forget water! Make sure your dog’s water bowl is always full and frequently changed, at least once every day. A dog water fountain can help keep the water fresh-tasting while filtering out bacteria.

As your dog grows, keep an eye on his weight. Overweight and obesity in puppies can lead to health problems later in life. A good rule of thumb is to feed puppy-specific foods until your pup reaches full growth, which is usually around 12 months of age.

Due to their full coats, Poodles can put on excess weight without you realizing it. Check by examining the ribs and waist. You should be able to easily feel but not see the ribs and note a well-proportioned waist when looking at your dog from the top.

The World Small Animal Veterinary Association (WSAVA) offers some helpful illustrations of proper body condition.

How Big Will My Standard Poodle Get?

As long as your Standard Poodle is still under a year old, she’s still growing. After a year, she may continue to gain a little weight as she fills out, but her height will stay about the same.

To estimate about how big your Poodle will get, you can try a few things. Start with the dog’s parents if you can. If you bought the dog from a breeder, ask for information about the mother and father and their weight and height, as your dog will likely grow to a similar size.

Your puppy’s sex matters too. As with many other animals, males are typically larger than females.2 Whereas females can weigh between 40-50 pounds, a male can weigh between 60-70 pounds.

Another way to estimate your puppy’s final growth weight is to use this simple formula:3

(Current weight/Age in weeks) x 52.

For example, if your pup is 25 pounds at 16 weeks of age, the formula would look like this:

  • (25/16) = 1.57 (rounded up)
  • 1.57 x 52 = 82 (rounded up)

The best time to check your Standard Poodle with this formula is when they reach about 16 weeks of age.

Try checking your puppy’s paws as well. If they look oversized compared to the pup’s legs and body, you can imagine the final growth based on the size of those paws.

When Do Standard Poodles Stop Growing?

Poodles are considered fully growth adults at two years old. This is when they have finished filling out and also when they will show signs of emotional maturity.

Before that, though, by the age of one year, your dog will have reached his final height or very close to it. After that, the growth will be focused on filling out muscle and cementing final bone formation.

Things That Affect Growth

Like most purebred dogs, Standard Poodle are vulnerable to a few health issues.4 These include:

  • Hip dysplasia
  • Epilepsy
  • Addison’s disease (hormonal disease)
  • Heart disease
  • Bloat
  • Hypothyroidism
  • Eye diseases
  • Skin problems

These can affect growth if they occur early on, but most don’t appear until later in your dog’s life. More common factors affecting growth include genetics, nutrition, and physical activity. Genetics establish how fast your puppy will grow and how big he will get.

Nutrition is a key element of proper growth for your Poodle puppy. Underfeeding can result in malnutrition, while overfeeding can strain muscles and joints, leading to skeletal problems later in life. Regularly check your dog’s weight to be sure you’re where you need to be.

Picture of an active Standard Poodle

Physical activity is key for muscle and bone development and for maintaining a healthy weight. Just be careful not to overexercise your young puppy on hard surfaces like pavement and asphalt. This can negatively affect bone growth. Wait until he’s at least a year old before taking him on long runs on the road.

Poodles are known for being enthusiastic eaters and often gulp down their food very quickly. This can lead to issues including bloat which can be serious. It also causes excess gas, vomiting, and gagging.

To slow mealtimes down, create a peaceful dining area where your Poodle will not be disturbed. Have pets eat separately (if you have more than one), provide more frequent and smaller meals, and incorporate a few snacks to help keep your dog satisfied between meals.

You can also purchase a “slow-feed” bowl that encourages slower eating by forcing a dog to eat around small obstacles. These work well at preventing your Poodle from gulping his food.

Infections with intestinal parasites like hookworms can also affect your puppy’s growth. If you notice that he doesn’t seem to be gaining weight like he should, check with your vet about a potential de-worming treatment.

If you don’t want to have puppies, spaying or neutering your dog will be necessary. It’s important not to do it too soon, however, or you may negatively affect bone and joint growth. Talk to your veterinarian about when the best time may be for your dog.

Puppy Weight Calculator

PUPPY WEIGHT CALCULATOR
What’s your puppy’s breed

What’s your puppy’s weight

What’s your puppy’s birth date?

What’s your puppy’s gender


Frequently Asked Questions

How big will my Standard Poodle get?

When your male Standard Poodle is fully grown, he should weigh between 60-70 pounds and stand between 23-27 inches high at the shoulder. Your female will likely be between 40-50 pounds and stand about the same height, though the AKC says anything over 15 inches is fine.

How big is a 6-month-old Standard Poodle?

At six months of age, your Standard Poodle should weigh between 28 and 48 pounds and stand between 18-23 inches at the shoulder.

How much should an 8-month-old Standard Poodle weigh?

When your puppy reaches 8 months of age, he’ll weigh about 40-48 pounds. A female will weigh about 28-35 pounds.

How much does an 8-week-old Standard Poodle weigh?

At the two-month mark, your Standard Poodle puppy will weigh between 10-20 pounds.

At what age do Standard Poodles calm down?

The Standard Poodle was bred to work which means that they’re likely to have boundless energy that has to be focused. Even with their great temperament, they need a job to do. Without one, they can become extra exuberant or even hyper.

As your dog matures, he’s likely to calm down quite a bit. This begins around one year of age and continues in a gradual process until he’s two to three years old. To help your dog calm down, be sure to give him daily exercise and a variety of things to do. Safe play sessions with other dogs, time to swim, daily walks, puzzle toys, games of fetch, obstacle-course training, and more can all help keep your Poodle occupied and focused so he’s calmer in general.

What’s the best collar for a Standard Poodle?

In our guide to the best collars for Poodles our veterinary advisor selected the Fida Heavy Duty Dog Collar.

What are the best clippers for a Standard Poodle?

In our guide to the best dog clippers for Poodles our veterinary advisor selected the Wahl Professional Animal Chromado Lithium Dog Clipper Kit.

Additional Resources

If you’re looking for more information about dog growth in general, we’ve created a puppy weight calculator, an in-depth guide to how heavy your dog should be, and a series of growth charts for different breeds (and dogs and mixed breeds in general):

]]>
Bernedoodle Growth Chart: How Big Will Your Bernedoodle Get? https://petnewsdaily.com/bernedoodle-growth-chart-how-big-will-your-bernedoodle-get/ Tue, 25 Oct 2022 15:00:43 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2550 As you get to know your new puppy, you may be wondering how big he or she might get. We consulted with our veterinarian, Dr. Jennifer Coates, who reviewed and approved data about puppy weights and sizes, which we then used to create a convenient puppy growth chart—You can use this as a reference to see how your puppy compares to the average.

Bernedoodle Growth Chart

Bernedoodles come in different sizes just like Poodles. Your puppy’s growth will depend on factors like whether its Poodle parent was a standard and its size.

The chart shows you a Berndedoodle’s monthly average weight range during the growing phase. You can also refer to the puppy weight calculator to get an idea of how big your puppy is likely to get.

Bernedoodle growth chart: how big will your Bernedoodle get?

Text Transcript of the Bernedoodle Growth Chart

Bernedoodle – Age Mini Weight Medium Weight Standard Weight
2 months
3 months
4 months
5 months
6 months
7 months
8 months
9 months
10 months
11 months
12 months
Fully grown
10 pounds
14 pounds
18 pounds
20 pounds
22 pounds
24 pounds
26 pounds
27 pounds
28 pounds
29 pounds
29 pounds
30 pounds
18 pounds
25 pounds
33 pounds
36 pounds
40 pounds
43 pounds
46 pounds
48 pounds
50 pounds
51 pounds
52 pounds
53 pounds
24 pounds
33 pounds
42 pounds
46 pounds
52 pounds
55 pounds
59 pounds
62 pounds
64 pounds
65 pounds
66 pounds
67 pounds or more

Height Estimates when Fully Grown:

  • Standard Bernedoodle: 23-29 inches
  • Medium Bernedoodle: 22-23 inches
  • Mini Bernedoodle: 18-22 inches

About Bernedoodles

Breed History

One of today’s popular hybrid breeds—a cross between two purebreds—the Bernedoodle is the product of a Poodle and a Bernese Mountain Dog. Sometimes called the “Bernese Mountain Poo,” the dog is deliberately bred from two purebred parents to create a new breed or “designer breed.”

The first breeder combined the two dogs in 2003. Since then, other breeders have followed suit, producing more dogs that families can enjoy.

Bernedoodle Characteristics

Why would breeders want to combine these two dogs? They wanted the positive characteristics of the Bernese Mountain Dog without the heavy shedding, short lifespan, and propensity for cancer. By crossing the Bernese with Poodles, they were able to create the perfect companion dog while eliminating some of these issues.

Bernedoodle Size

Breeders may mix the Bernese with a standard, medium, or mini Poodle to create different sizes of the hybrid breed. A Standard Poodle crossed with a Bernese is called a Standard Bernedoodle, whereas a mini Poodle crossed with a Bernese is a Mini Bernedoodle.

No matter the size, these dogs are typically very gentle around the elderly and children and make great therapy and service dogs. They are easy to train and love being part of the family.

Is Bernedoodle An Official Breed?

Because they are hybrid dogs, Bernedoodles are not recognized by the American Kennel Club (AKC). You can register your new puppy with the American Canine Hybrid Club and the United Bernedoodle Registry.1

What Are the Growth Stages of a Bernedoodle?

Like all puppies, Bernedoodles experience their most rapid growth between birth and two weeks of age.

Birth to 2 Weeks

A newborn will weigh around one pound, and you can expect that to double within the first week or so. This is also when their eyes and ears will open and they’ll start to interact with their littermates.

3 Weeks to 3 Months

Between 3 weeks and 3 months of age, your puppy will experience a huge growth spurt. She’ll start to explore her world, interact with humans, and between 8 and 12 weeks, be weaned off her mom so she can go home with you.

At three months, your puppy is likely to have reached about 30 percent of her total growth. She’ll be ready for her first vaccinations and beginning training, which may include housetraining and simple obedience training.

4 to 6 Months

When your puppy is between four and six months of age, he may weigh between 45 and 55 pounds (if he’s a Standard size), and his growth rate will begin to slow down a little bit. He is likely to still have a voracious appetite and will be very playful and active.

This is when obedience training becomes very important, as you want to teach your puppy some standard commands (sit, down, stay) and help him to understand his boundaries before he gets too big to handle.

7 to 9 Months

Between seven and nine months of age, your puppy will start to look more like an adult Bernedoodle, though he will still have a lot of growing to do.

Keep in mind that the type of Bernedoodle you have will affect these growth stages. Smaller ones will grow more quickly and may attain their adult size by six to eight months. Larger ones will take longer.

10 to 12 Months

Finally, between 10-12 months, your puppy will be nearly fully grown, though larger ones can take up to two years to fill out.

She may start to act more mature at this age too, though larger Bernedoodles may retain their puppy attitudes until they reach two years of age.

Best Nutrition for a Standard Bernedoodle

At all stages of growth, it’s important to feed your Bernedoodle puppy the appropriate dog food for his age and size. Standard Bernedoodles will need large-breed puppy food, while mini ones will do better with small-breed varieties. These are specifically formulated to help optimize growth. Avoid “for all sizes” type foods as they will not contain the nutrients your puppy needs.

Choose the highest quality food you can that is free of fillers, chemicals, and unnecessary ingredients. Look for those with a quality protein source listed first—real meat is best, including chicken, beef, pork, fish, and lamb. Then feed your puppy three to four times a day until he reaches one year old. This helps avoid bloat, which can turn dangerous in some instances. Smaller, more frequent meals are better for your Bernedoodle.

As your dog grows, keep an eye on his weight. Overweight and obesity in puppies can lead to health problems later in life. Bernedoodles are known for being voracious eaters, so it’s best not to leave food down for them to graze on as they wish. Instead, establish a regular feeding schedule early on. Feed your pup at the same time each day, three times a day. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions on the amount for your dog’s size.

At around six to nine months of age, your puppy’s growth rate will slow and you may notice that he’s putting on weight. If so, transition him to twice-daily feedings, which you’ll then maintain for the rest of his life. When he reaches one year old, switch to quality adult food.

Then be sure to periodically check your dog’s weight to see how he’s doing. If you can see the hip or rib bones, your dog may be underweight. Gradually increase his food amount until his body shape matches that of a healthy dog.

If you notice a rounded stomach or if your dog’s waist starts to disappear when viewed from the side or top, he’s overweight. Increase his exercise and reduce the food amount only slightly until his shape returns. The World Small Animal Veterinary Association (WSAVA) offers some helpful illustrations of proper body condition.

Be careful feeding your Bernedoodle treats. Begging behaviors don’t necessarily mean she’s hungry—usually, they’re more about getting attention. Stick to your feeding schedule, avoid feeding your dog human scraps, and when you do treat, use healthy products specifically made for dogs.

How Big Will My Bernedoodle Get?

Picture of a full grown Bernedoodle

How big your Bernedoodle will get depends heavily on his parents and the size of the Poodles in his background. If you purchased him from a breeder, gather all the information you can on his parents and grandparents, as that will help you estimate his final size.

Your puppy’s sex matters too. As with many other animals, males are typically larger than females, though the difference in Bernedoodles may be only about 10 percent.

There are a couple of formulas you can use to estimate the fully grown size of your puppy. Both are based on age. The first one goes like this:2

Current weight x [1 + (100 / % size in weeks)]

So if your puppy weighs 10 pounds at 3 months old—when he’s reached about 30 percent of his final weight—you would calculate the formula like this:

10 x [1 + (100 / 30%)] = 10 x 4.33 = 43.33 pounds when fully grown.

At about 15 weeks, your Bernedoodle will be about 50 percent of his total body weight. At that point, you can just double it to get an estimate of his final weight.

Another way to estimate your puppy’s final growth weight is to use this simple formula:3

(Current weight/Age in weeks) x 52.

For example, if your pup is 25 pounds at 16 weeks of age, the formula would look like this:

  • (25/16) = 1.57 (rounded up)
  • 1.57 x 52 = 82 (rounded up)

The best time to check your Standard Bernedoddle with this formula is when she reaches about 16 weeks of age. You can check smaller varieties sooner, between 12 and 15 weeks.

Try checking your puppy’s paws as well. If they look oversized compared to the pup’s legs and body, you can imagine the final growth based on the size of those paws.

Another option is to use a DNA test. This will tell you a close estimate of the expected size of your puppy when he’s fully grown. It will also tell you your dog’s complete dog-breed ratios—how much Poodle is in him, for instance, compared to how much Bernese Mountain Dog he has.

When Do Bernedoodles Stop Growing?

When you can expect your Bernedoodle to stop growing depends on its size. Standard Bernedoodles will be close to their adult size at one year but may continue to grow until they reach two years or later.

Smaller sizes will reach their adult height sooner—around 9 months of age.

Things That Affect Growth

Like most dogs, Bernedoodles are vulnerable to certain health issues. They are considered healthier overall than their purebred ancestors, but it’s best to be on the lookout for some potential problems:

  • Hip and elbow dysplasia
  • Skin diseases (hot spots)
  • Eye diseases
  • Allergies
  • Bloat
  • Heatstroke

Though these are concerns you’ll want to keep your eye on as your dog matures, most of them (outside of bloat) won’t affect his growth. Factors that will include the following:

  • Genetics: Your dog’s genes factor greatly into how big he will become. Find out all you can about your dog’s parents to estimate his final size.
  • Diet: Nutrition has a significant effect on the growth of your puppy. A poor diet lacking the proper nutrients can cause joint problems later in life, and may also affect your dog’s brain development. It’s critical to provide your puppy with the highest quality food possible.
  • Physical activity: Exercise and daily activity influences your dog’s overall health and growth. As your puppy gets older, she’ll require increased activity. Daily walks, games of fetch, and safe playtime with other dogs can all help fulfill this requirement.
  • It is important not to overexercise your puppy too soon. Her bones are still developing and if they are strained with long runs on hard surfaces, they may not form correctly, increasing the risk for joint problems down the road.
  • Worms and parasites: Puppies can become infected with heartworms and other parasites from their mothers, when sniffing or licking infected feces, when digging in the soil (if there are hookworm larvae there), or when catching or eating rodents and birds. If your dog is not gaining weight like she should, check with your veterinarian about a deworming solution.
  • Spaying and neutering: Unless you plan to have puppies, it’s important to spay or neuter your dog. The operation can have positive health effects, reducing the risk of some types of cancer. If done too soon, however, it can also negatively affect bone and joint growth. Check with your vet on the best time for your dog.

Bernedoodle Weight Calculator

You can also use our puppy weight calculator to determine how big your  Bernedoodle will get:

PUPPY WEIGHT CALCULATOR
What’s your puppy’s breed

What’s your puppy’s weight

What’s your puppy’s birth date?

What’s your puppy’s gender


Frequently Asked Questions

How big does a Bernedoodle dog grow?

Your dog’s fully grown weight and height will depend greatly on genetics. If you have a Standard Bernedoodle, he’s likely to weigh between 70-90 pounds at full size. A mini Bernedoodle, by contrast, will weigh between 20 and 45 pounds.

At what age does a Bernedoodle fade?

Some Bernedoodles inherit a gene that affects their coat color as they age. The gene comes from the Poodle side of the family. So your dog may start as black and later turn to silver or cream. Unfortunately, there is no genetic test to determine if your dog will fade. The only way to try to prevent it is to know her lineage and choose breeding dogs that have not faded.

If your Bernedoodle has the fading gene, you’ll notice her color start to fade between six and ten months of age. Also called “clearing,” the color change is most noticeable in darker-colored dogs who have black and brown in their coats. Black dogs change to silver, gray, and bluish tones, whereas chocolate or brown dogs can turn silver, cream, or silver beige.

How big will my f1b Bernedoodle get?

F1b Bernedoodles are known as second-generation mixes. They are the result of breeding a first-generation Bernedoodle with a purebred Poodle. First-generation Bernedoodles are 50 percent Poodle and 50 percent Bernese Mountain Dog. That means your F1b Bernedoodle will be 75 percent Poodle and only 25 percent Bernese Mountain Dog.

Though traits may vary, this type of Bernedoodle will likely be more like a Poodle than the Bernese. Since most breeders use the Standard Poodle for this variety, your pup will be closer to the Poodle sizes, which is between 40-70 pounds when grown. It depends on the parents though, so gather all the information you can about them.

Additional Resources

If you’re looking for more information about dog growth in general, we’ve created a puppy weight calculator, an in-depth guide to how heavy your dog should be, and a series of growth charts for different breeds (and dogs and mixed breeds in general):

]]>
Husky Growth Chart: How Big Will Your Husky Get? https://petnewsdaily.com/husky-growth-chart-how-big-will-your-husky-get/ Tue, 25 Oct 2022 11:05:59 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2547 As you get to know your new puppy, you may be wondering how big he or she might get. We consulted with our veterinarian, Dr. Jennifer Coates, who reviewed and approved data about puppy weights and sizes, which we then used to create a convenient puppy growth chart. You can use this as a reference to see how your puppy compares to the average.

The chart shows you a Husky’s monthly average weight range during the growing phase. You can also refer to the puppy weight calculator to get an idea of how big your puppy is likely to get.

Husky Growth Chart

Husky growth chart

 

  • 1 year: 34-58 pounds, 20-24 inches
  • Fully grown males: 45-60 pounds, 21-24 inches
  • Fully grown females: 35-50 pounds, 20-22 inches

Text Transcript of the Husky Growth Chart

Husky – Age Weight Height
2 months
3 months
4 months
5 months
6 months
7 months
8 months
9 months
10 months
11 months

1 year
Fully grown males
Fully grown females

8-15 pounds
13-23 pounds
18-30 pounds
21-35 pounds
23-40 pounds
25-43 pounds
28-47 pounds
31-52 pounds
32-55 pounds
33-58 pounds

34-58 pounds
45-60 pounds
35-50 pounds

10-12”
10-12”
12-15”
12-15”
14-19”
14-19”
16-22”
16-22”
18-24”
20-24”

20-24 inches
21-24 inches
20-22 inches

About Huskies

Characterized as loyal, outgoing, and mischievous, the Siberian Husky is a thickly coated, compact sled dog. Bred to work in packs pulling light loads over vast frozen expanses, they’re high-energy, friendly dogs that can make exceptional companions as long as you’re ready for action!

The Chukchi people in Asia are credited with originating the breed. They kept the dogs as companion animals for their families and as endurance sled dogs. In the early 1900s, the Siberian Husky gained popularity in the west after “legendary musher Leonhard Seppala led a relay of them 658 miles in only five days to rush a lifesaving serum to Nome, Alaska, where an epidemic of diphtheria had broken out,” according to the American Kennel Club (AKC).1

Today, Huskies are prized for their beauty, intelligence, athleticism, and friendliness with people and other dogs. If you have a new Husky puppy, you can look forward to an affectionate and good-natured pal. Do make sure, however, that you have a stout enclosure ready, as Huskies are known to be escape artists. They also can’t resist chasing small animals, so they need a secure yard and daily exercise.2

What Are the Growth Stages of a Siberian Husky?

Huskies are medium-sized dogs that reach their full height and weight at about 1.5 years old. Until that time, they’ll go through a variety of growth stages, during which they’ll reach developmental milestones on their way to becoming adults.

Birth to 3 Months

A puppy experiences its most rapid growth during its first couple of weeks of life. By two months of age, she’s ready to be weaned off her mother and added to your family. This is the time to make an appointment with your vet for her first vaccinations and to start with very basic training, which consists mainly of daily interaction with the people in your household, and housetraining.

3 Months to 4 Months

At three months of age, your Husky will start to show some signs of her future personality. She’ll be more active and will eat a lot, though she may back off her food a bit when her teeth are coming in. Make sure she has lots of chew toys available! She’ll weigh between 13-20 pounds and will stand about 10-12 inches tall. (Males will be a little bit bigger.)

4 Months to 5 Months

By four months of age, your Husky will start taking on more adult dog characteristics. She’s likely to have a voracious appetite, so it’s important to feed her a well-balanced diet. She’ll be a lot more playful so games like fetch and daily walks are a must. This is also the time to get serious about obedience training. Huskies need a lot of structure, so you may want to consider joining a puppy kindergarten class in your area.

5 Months to 7 Months

Between five and six months, your Husky may take on a more lanky, awkward stage, entering her adolescent time. She will be ready for a lot of exercise, but be careful as lots of running on the pavement could harm her developing bones. Stick to games, yard play, and walks on softer surfaces, such as in the park. Keep a firm and consistent routine going to help her learn discipline and structure.

7 Months to 9 Months

Through the seventh and eighth months, your Husky should settle into her day-to-day life with you. She will be closer to her adult height and weight and can be taken on walks of up to 45 minutes a day. She will still retain her mischievous nature, so remain consistent and positive in your training.

9 Months to 1 Year

By nine months, your dog is likely to begin behaving more maturely, though Huskies remain rambunctious and playful. Give your pal lots of toys to play with and keep her mentally and physically stimulated to avoid bad behaviors. Between ten and eleven months, the growth rate will slow, though your dog is likely to continue filling out until she’s about 18 months old.

Provide Proper Nutrition for Your Husky

Picture of a Husky eating

At all stages of growth, your Husky needs the appropriate nutrition for optimal health. Feed a high-quality dog food appropriate for his age. Avoid “food for all life stages” types, as these may lack some of the nutrients your puppy needs. Protein should be the top ingredient—something that comes from meat like beef, chicken, or turkey.

Avoid byproducts like “chicken byproduct meal” or mystery meats like “meat meal.”  You can add in some raw meat if you like.

Fats are essential for your Husky puppy, as they help maintain healthy skin and coat, nervous system function, vitamin transport, hormone production, and energy. Carbohydrates are needed in general, but at a higher level if your dog is active.

Then make sure that your food has the right balance of vitamins, minerals, and fiber.

A mix of dry and wet food is often considered best for a Husky. The wet food gives him some much-needed moisture, while the dry food helps keep his teeth clean. The amount of food depends on your dog’s age, size, and activity level.

Working dogs will require more calories and more protein, specifically during the winter if they are hauling sleds. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations, and if you have questions about your puppy’s weight gain, talk to your veterinarian.

A consistent feeding schedule is important for your Husky. While he’s growing, split up his feedings to at least three a day, and never feed right before or after exercising.

Wait at least two hours so he won’t be exercising on a full stomach. Feeding too closely to exercise increases the risk of digestive issues, including gastric torsion, when the stomach twists and bloats dangerously.3

Avoid feeding table scraps, as well, as they can cause digestive upset. Cooked bones from chicken, turkey, and pork are dangerous as they can potentially splinter and injure your dog. Give only medium-length beef marrow bones. Safe treats for your husky include apple and banana pieces and treats made specifically for dogs.

Another thing Husky owners notice is that their dogs may not finish their bowl of food, or may not be interested in eating at all. Unlike most dogs that will eat whatever is put in front of them, Huskies are more self-regulating and may eat just enough to match their daily activity.4

Huskies can also get bored if you leave food down all the time, so it’s best to have specific feeding times, after which you remove the food until the next feeding time.

That doesn’t mean your dog will never get too heavy, however. Overweight and obesity in puppies can lead to health problems later in life. A good rule of thumb is to feed puppy-specific foods until your pup reaches full growth, which is usually around 12 months of age. At that point, switch to adult dog food to avoid giving your Husky too many calories. You can also drop the number of feedings to two per day.

Check for ideal weight by examining the ribs and waist. You should be able to easily feel but not see the ribs and note a well-proportioned waist when looking at your dog from the top. The World Small Animal Veterinary Association (WSAVA) offers some helpful illustrations of proper body condition.

How Big Do Huskies Get?

Picture of a full grown and puppy Husky

Your Husky will likely grow to reach the figures represented above. If your puppy is less than a year old, he is still growing and you can expect him to get close to 45-60 pounds. (Females are usually a little smaller.)

If you purchased your Husky from a breeder, ask them for information about his parents. Genetics play a big role in your dog’s final size, and you can tell a lot by what the parents looked like.

There are a few other ways to get an estimate on how big your Husky may get:

  • Gender: As with many other animals, males are typically larger than females.5 Whereas females can weigh between 35-50 pounds, a male can weigh between 45-60 pounds.
  • Age: Try dividing your puppy’s current weight by her age in weeks. Then multiply that number by 52. That will give you a rough estimate of what your dog might weigh when he reaches one year old.6 The best time to check your pup with this formula is 16 weeks.
  • Paw size: If your puppy’s paws look big for the rest of his body, he likely still has a lot of growing to do, and will eventually grow into those paws.

Some Huskies may be larger than others because of the way they were bred. Those bred specifically for pulling sleds may be larger than those bred to be family pets.

You can also use our puppy size predictor to find out how big your puppy might get as an adult. Or, if you want to see the growth rates of other dogs, we’ve also created a Golden Retriever size chartGreat Dane growth chartChihuahua size chart, and Labrador growth chart.

When Do Huskies Stop Growing?

Huskies usually reach their full adult height at one year old. They will also be close to their full weight at that time, but as they continue to develop muscles, they are likely to put on a few more pounds until they reach about 15-18 months of age. Males typically take longer than females to reach their final weight.

Your dog will also be more mature by a year old, but may still be growing mentally as well until about three years of age. It’s important to keep training during these early years to cement proper behavior and establish your healthy home routine.

Things That Affect Growth

The good news is that according to the American Kennel Club (AKC), the Siberian Husky is a relatively healthy breed. Responsible breeders screen for one common problem which includes juvenile cataracts. Regular eye exams are important every year, as huskies are also at risk for other eye defects like corneal dystrophy and progressive retinal atrophy.

Like many bigger working dogs, Huskies can be vulnerable to hip dysplasia and other joint issues, so it’s wise to make sure your puppy is screened for these as well. Then be sure to be gentle with exercise until your dog reaches one year of age.

Some health issues that may affect your puppy’s growth. These include the following:

1. Zinc-responsive-dermatosis

This is a condition in which the dog can’t absorb the zinc from his diet properly. This can lead to a zinc deficiency, which can cause itchy, dry coats, stunted growth, diarrhea, and increased infections. Huskies are more vulnerable to this issue than most dog breeds. Treatment includes a change in diet and zinc supplementation.

2. Follicular Dysplasia

Also common in Huskies, this condition may affect them between 3-4 months of age. It can cause abnormal hair growth, hair loss, or patchy, infectious skin. There is currently no treatment, though veterinarians usually recommend specific shampoos and topical applications.

3. Hypothyroidism

This refers to a malfunction in the thyroid gland, which produces certain hormones. A Husky with this condition is likely to gain too much weight, even when eating a normal or less-than-normal amount. Other symptoms include lethargy and increased sleep. Check with your veterinarian for treatments.

4. Spaying/Neutering

Unless you’re planning on breeding your puppy, it’s best to spay or neuter them. Doing it too early, however, can negatively affect your dog’s growth. It increases the total length of time that bones grow, which can result in a taller dog while messing up the way the dog’s joints align. Consequences include joint pain and arthritis later in life. Check with your veterinarian on the best time to spay or neuter your dog.

5. Over or Under Eating

Huskies are known to be picky eaters. If your Husky isn’t eating enough while she’s growing, she may not meet her growth milestones and could be suffering from malnutrition. Talk to your vet about solutions, which usually include changing up your dog’s diet.

Overfeeding is less likely in Huskies, but it’s still possible if your dog likes to eat. Puppies need a lot of nutrition, but if your dog is getting too big too fast, use caution, as this could put extra strain on his bones and joints.

Husky Weight Calculator

PUPPY WEIGHT CALCULATOR
What’s your puppy’s breed

What’s your puppy’s weight

What’s your puppy’s birth date?

What’s your puppy’s gender


Frequently Asked Questions

How big should a 6-month-old Husky be?

At six months old, a male Husky will range from 30-40 pounds and 15-19 inches. A female Husky will range from 23-33 pounds and 14-16 inches.

How can I tell how big my Husky will get?

Paw size can be a helpful predictor of how big your Husky puppy will get. The size of the pup’s parents is also a good indicator, as is its gender. You can use our puppy weight calculator above to get an estimate or try this formula when your dog is around 16 weeks old.

(Current weight/Age in weeks) x 52.

At what age is a Husky full-grown?

Most Huskies have reached their adult height at one year of age. They may continue to fill out after that, gaining a few more pounds. Females will reach their final size at around 15 months, while males may take up to 18 months.

How big is a 7-month-old Husky?

A seventh-month-old male Husky will range from 33-43 pounds and stand 15-19 inches high at the shoulder. A female will weigh between 25-38 pounds and stand 14-16 inches high.

At what age do Huskies calm down?

It takes a while for your Husky to grow out of the excitable puppy stage and move into the more mature dog stage. Your dog may start to act more like an adult at one year of age, but many Huskies continue to be more puppy-like until they reach 2-3 years of age.

It is important to realize that even adult Huskies can have a hyper temperament. Built to be working dogs, they are not well suited for sitting around all day. The best approach is to provide daily exercise and rigorous behavioral training.

Additional Resources

If you’re looking for more information about dog growth in general, we’ve created a puppy weight calculator, an in-depth guide to how heavy your dog should be, and a series of growth charts for different breeds (and dogs and mixed breeds in general):

]]>
Home Remedies for a Cat Throwing Up Food https://petnewsdaily.com/cat-throwing-up-food/ Tue, 25 Oct 2022 03:28:06 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2801 Cats throw up food for many different reasons. Some are serious and require veterinary attention, but others, like eating too much too quickly, can usually be handled with home remedies. If your cat has just vomited once or twice but seems to feel fine otherwise, it’s safe to try some home treatment.

But do not try treating your cat at home if any of the following applies. Call your veterinarian for advice instead.

  • The cat is very young, very old, or has underlying health problems
  • The cat is vomiting frequently
  • Vomiting has been present for more than a day or two
  • The vomit contains blood
  • The cat also has diarrhea
  • The cat is weak, in pain, or seems mentally out of it
  • The cat can’t hold down water

Easy-to-Treat Reasons for a Cat Throwing Up Food

Some relatively simple problems can make cats throw up food. Here are some of the most common and home remedies that may help.

Eating Too Quickly

Cats who throw up food may be eating too fast. This can happen when a cat is very hungry because they are going too long between meals. Cats are designed to eat multiple small meals throughout the day, but this schedule can be hard to maintain if you’re busy, out of the house, or while you are sleeping. An automatic pet feeder will let your cat eat multiple small meals overnight or when you’re not home. Puzzle feeders like the Lickimat or a slow feeder bowl can also help cats eat more slowly.

A Mild Upset Stomach

Cats can develop a mild upset stomach for simple reasons like eating something new or unusual. Sometimes all that is needed is to give the cat’s digestive tract a break by not offering food for a short period of time.

Healthy adult cats can safely skip a meal or two, which will give their stomach a chance to empty and rest, but be sure to leave out fresh, clean water to prevent dehydration. Make an appointment with your veterinarian if your cat’s vomiting continues or if your cat is not willing to eat after 24 hours or so. Cats who don’t take in sufficient calories, even for relatively short periods, can develop a serious disease called hepatic lipidosis.

Hairballs

Picture of a cat with a hairball

Hairballs are a common reason for cats to throw up and their vomit may contain food. Laxatone is a safe and effective, veterinarian-recommended flavored hairball control gel. Never give your cat mineral oil, butter, lard, grease, or vegetable oils as a home remedy for hairballs. At best, they won’t work. At worst, they can make your cat sick. Diets like Hill’s Science Diet Adult Hairball Control Canned Cat Food and brushing your cat more frequently can help prevent hairballs.

Talk to your veterinarian if your cat vomits hairballs more than a couple of times a month. Frequent hairballs can be caused by diseases affecting the digestive tract or skin.

An Adverse Food Reaction

Cats can react poorly to certain ingredients in food. What’s safe for one cat may cause another to vomit. Switching to a different diet may help when a cat is throwing up food. Wet cat foods tend to be a better option than dry because they are usually higher in protein and lower in carbohydrates, which is a better match for a cat’s nutritional needs. Wet cat foods also contain more water and fewer (or no) artificial preservatives in comparison to dry. The following options are all highly rated:

If you have to feed dry cat food, look for a high-quality, high-protein option like ORIJEN® Dry Original Cat Food Premium.

Motion Sickness

Cats can vomit due to motion sickness! If your cat only throws up food while in the car, try not feeding them for a few hours before the trip. If that doesn’t work, talk to your veterinarian. They can prescribe medications that will help ease nausea associated with motion sickness in cats.

What to Do When Home Remedies Don’t Work

Of course, these aren’t the only reasons why a cat might throw up food. If your cat has severe or chronic vomiting, your veterinarian will need to determine its underlying cause. They will start by taking a thorough health history and performing a physical examination, which is often followed up with some diagnostic tests. This can include some combination of fecal examinations, blood work, urinalysis, x-rays, ultrasound studies, specialized laboratory tests, and even exploratory surgery or endoscopy and tissue biopsies

Your veterinarian can recommend appropriate treatment once they have identified the likely reason why your cat is throwing up food.

Additional Resources On Cat Vomiting

If you’re looking for more information about your cat vomiting, this is a good video overview from Dr. Sarah Wooten on cat vomiting:

You can also check out these sources:

And finally we’ve created a series of posts here on Pet News Daily related to gastro intestinal issues for cats and cat health in general, including:

]]>
4 Home Remedies for a Cat Vomiting Bile https://petnewsdaily.com/cat-vomiting-bile/ Tue, 25 Oct 2022 03:12:54 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2799 Bile is a digestive fluid that is made in the liver and secreted into the small intestine. Bile can be seen in a cat’s vomit, giving it a yellow, orange, or even a brown or greenish tinge. You’re more likely to see bile when a cat vomits on an empty stomach, so you’ll often notice bile mixed in with a little bit of fluid, mucus, or foam.

Here are four possible home remedies for a cat that’s vomiting bile:

  1. Leave food out
  2. Feed multiple times throughout the day
  3. Use an automatic cat feeder
  4. Switch cat foods

What is Bilious Vomiting Syndrome?

Cats who vomit on an empty stomach but are otherwise healthy (no diarrhea, weight loss, etc.) are often diagnosed with bilious vomiting syndrome. Veterinarians don’t know the exact cause of the condition, but a common theory is that gastric acid, bile, or other digestive fluids irritate the lining of the empty stomach leading to vomiting.

If your cat is vomiting bile but seems to feel just fine, bilious vomiting is a likely culprit. Thankfully, home treatment is relatively straightforward.

Treatment for Bilious Vomiting Syndrome

Cats who have bilious vomiting syndrome need to eat more frequently. Since the trigger for vomiting is an empty stomach, you want to minimize the amount of time your cat’s stomach is empty.

1. Leave Food Out

One option is to simply leave food out all the time. However, this can easily lead to unhealthy weight gain.

2. Feed Multiple Times Throughout the Day

Feeding multiple small meals throughout the day, particularly right before bedtime, is ideal but the schedule can be hard to maintain if you’re busy or away from home for long periods of time.

3. Automatic Cat Feeder

An automatic pet feeder that allows you to preschedule frequent small meals can be a sanity saver. You can even set them to offer a meal or two in the middle of the night.

4. Switch Cat Foods

When feeding multiple small meals does stop your cat from vomiting bile but they are gaining weight, either cut back on your cat’s meal size or switch to a different cat food. Wet cat foods tend to be the best choice because they are high in protein, low in carbohydrates, and contain a lot of water, all of which can help with weight maintenance and support overall health. Good options for weight management include Purina Pro Plan Weight Control Pate Wet Cat Food and Blue Buffalo True Solutions Fit & Healthy Natural Weight Control Adult Wet Cat Food. If you have to feed dry cat food, look for a high-protein option like ORIJEN Fit and Trim Recipe.

What If Home Remedies for a Cat Vomiting Bile Don’t Work?

If you try feeding your cat multiple small meals throughout the day and night but they continue to vomit bile, it’s time to see your veterinarian. First, they will want to confirm that your cat does indeed have bilious vomiting syndrome. They will ask you a lot of questions about your cat’s health, lifestyle, and environment; perform a physical examination, and then possibly run some diagnostic tests like a fecal exam, a panel of blood work, and a urinalysis. If they’re very concerned that something else might be going on they might also recommend x-rays, ultrasound exams, endoscopy, surgery, and tissue biopsies. Almost any cause of vomiting can make a cat vomit bile, so it’s important to get to the bottom of things.

But what happens when the doctor has diagnosed a cat with bilious vomiting syndrome and feeding more frequent meals hasn’t helped? In these cases, your veterinarian can prescribe medications that should reduce or eliminate the vomiting. Options include:

  • Famotidine, omeprazole, or other medications to reduce stomach acid production
  • Metoclopramide to increase the frequency of contractions within the small intestines
  • Maropitant, which is a broad-spectrum anti-vomiting drug

Talk to your veterinarian if your cat is vomiting bile and your home remedies haven’t worked. They can help you figure out what is going on and recommend appropriate options for treatment.

Additional Resources On Cat Vomiting

If you’re looking for more information about your cat vomiting, this is a good video overview from Dr. Sarah Wooten on cat vomiting:

You can also check out these sources:

And finally we’ve created a series of posts here on Pet News Daily related to gastro intestinal issues for cats and cat health in general, including:

]]>
What To Do if Your Cat is Vomiting Blood (Call Your Vet!) https://petnewsdaily.com/cat-vomiting-blood/ Tue, 25 Oct 2022 03:03:06 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2796 Vomiting isn’t all that unusual in cats. Whether it’s because of a hairball or because they ate something unusual, a cat who vomits once or twice but is acting normally doesn’t necessarily need to be rushed to the veterinarian. But the situation is very different if you see blood in your cat’s vomit.

If your cat is vomiting blood, CALL YOUR VETERINARIAN! Depending on your cat’s overall condition, the doctor may recommend that you bring your cat in for an evaluation right away or they might set up an appointment in the not-too-distant future. Signs that your cat’s vomiting could be an emergency include:

  • The presence of large amounts of blood
  • Frequent vomiting
  • Vomiting combined with diarrhea
  • Abdominal pain
  • Weakness, lethargy, or depression
  • An inability to hold down water or food
  • Your cat is very young, very old, or has underlying health problems

What Makes Cats Throw Up Blood

Blood in cat vomit is usually pretty obvious, but sometimes it doesn’t look exactly like the bright red blood you’d expect. Partially digested blood in vomit can be dark and granular, looking a little bit like coffee grounds. Blood may also be mixed with mucus, white foam, food, or bile. Regardless of its appearance, blood in cat vomit can have many different causes:

  • Severe or chronic vomiting – Anything that causes severe or chronic vomiting can irritate the lining of the digestive tract and cause bleeding.
  • Trauma – Swallowing bones or other foreign material, surgery, or traumatic injuries can damage the digestive tract.
  • Inflammatory bowel disease – Severe inflammation can result in bleeding.
  • Cancer – Certain types of cancer can lead to bleeding within the digestive tract.
  • Kidney disease – Vomiting is a common symptom of kidney disease. Ulcers that may bleed can also occur.
  • Liver disease – Cats with liver disease frequently vomit and may develop blood clotting abnormalities that result in bleeding.
  • Blood clotting disorders – Cats who are exposed to anticoagulant rodenticides or who have diseases that alter the ability of their blood to clot may vomit blood.
  • Infections – Viral, bacterial, and fungal infections affecting the digestive tract or other parts of the body may lead to vomiting and blood in a cat’s vomit.
  • Corrosives – Certain types of cleaning solutions and other caustic materials can cause bleeding in a cat’s digestive tract when they are swallowed.
  • Adverse drug reactions – Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatories, corticosteroids, and other drugs can cause gastrointestinal ulcers that may bleed.
  • Shock – All types of shock can damage the digestive tract and lead to bleeding.
  • Swallowed blood – Injuries to the mouth, nose bleeds, or coughing up and swallowing blood may lead to bloody vomit.

How Is Bloody Cat Vomit Treated?

To come up with a treatment plan, a veterinarian will first need to determine why a cat is vomiting blood. They will start the diagnostic work-up by taking a thorough health history and performing a physical examination. This is usually followed by diagnostic testing, which may include fecal examinations, blood work, a urinalysis, x-rays, ultrasound exams, specialized laboratory tests, and even exploratory surgery or endoscopy and tissue biopsies.

Supportive care for a cat who is vomiting blood can include:

  • IV fluids
  • Blood transfusions
  • Nutritional support
  • Anti-nausea medications
  • Medications to reduce the secretion of gastric acid or to coat ulcers

Further treatment will be focused on the underlying problem. For example, the veterinarian might prescribe an antibiotic for a bacterial infection or a special diet and immunosuppressant medications for inflammatory bowel disease.

Bloody cat vomit isn’t always an emergency, but a cat’s condition can go downhill quickly so don’t wait to get your cat the care they need. Early treatment can save money, and even more importantly, your cat’s life.

Additional Resources On Cat Vomiting

If you’re looking for more information about your cat vomiting, this is a good video overview from Dr. Sarah Wooten on cat vomiting:

You can also check out these sources:

And finally we’ve created a series of posts here on Pet News Daily related to gastro intestinal issues for cats and cat health in general, including:

]]>
4 Things to Do if Your Cat is Throwing Up White Foam https://petnewsdaily.com/cat-throwing-up-white-foam/ Tue, 25 Oct 2022 02:53:52 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2789 The white foam that cats vomit is usually just mucus mixed with a little fluid. Mucus and fluid are almost always present in cat vomit, but they’re easy to miss when they’re mixed with food or other materials. White foamy cat vomit is most apparent when a cat throws up on an empty stomach.

There are four things you can do if your cat is throwing up white foam:

  1. Feed your cat more frequently
  2. Try a different food
  3. Hairball medicines
  4. Talk to your vet

What Causes Cats to Throw Up White Foam

Cats can throw up white foam for many different reasons including:

  • Hairballs
  • Eating a new food or something unusual
  • Intestinal parasites
  • Inflammatory bowel disease
  • Motion sickness
  • Swallowing something that can’t be digested like string or bones
  • Viral, bacterial, or fungal infections
  • Kidney disease
  • Liver failure
  • Heartworm disease
  • Pancreatitis
  • Hyperthyroidism
  • Diabetes
  • Food allergies and other adverse food reactions
  • Exposure to some types of toxins
  • Drug side effects
  • Cancer
  • and more

Some of these health problems are very serious, but others can resolve with a little treatment at home.

Home Treatments for Cats Throwing Up White Foam

If your cat has just vomited once or twice but seems to feel fine otherwise, you can try some home treatment.

1. Feed Your Cat More Frequently

Cats who vomit on an empty stomach may simply need to eat more frequently. Leaving food out all the time is one option, but this can lead to unhealthy weight gain. Feeding multiple small meals is a better option, but the schedule can be hard to maintain if you’re busy, out of the house, or asleep. An automatic pet feeder will let your cat eat multiple small meals overnight or when you’re not home.

2. Try a Different Food

Picture of different cat food.

Cats can have adverse reactions to different ingredients in food. Switching to a different diet may help when a cat is vomiting. Wet cat foods tend to be the best choice because, in comparison to kibble, they are usually higher in protein and lower in carbohydrates, which is a better match for a cat’s nutritional needs. Wet cat foods also contain more water and fewer (or no) artificial preservatives than dry foods.

You can even start with an easy-to-digest food like Royal Canin Feline Care Nutrition Digest Sensitive. Once your cat’s vomiting has stopped, slowly switch back to their regular food by mixing increasing amounts of their regular food in with decreasing amounts of the easy-to-digest food. If you have to feed dry cat food, look for a high-quality, high-protein option like ORIJEN® Dry Original Cat Food Premium.

3. Hairball Medicines

Hairballs are a common reason for cats to vomit. It often takes several attempts to bring up a hairball, and during those first few episodes, cats may just throw up white foam.

There are many different types of hairball remedies on the market, but veterinarians frequently recommend Laxatone, a flavored hairball control gel. Never give your cat mineral oil, butter, lard, grease, or vegetable oils as a home treatment for hairballs. At best, they won’t work. At worst, they can make your cat very sick. Brushing your cat more frequently and feeding a hairball prevention diet like Hill’s Science Diet Adult Hairball Control Canned Cat Food can help too.

Talk to your veterinarian if your cat vomits hairballs more than a couple of times a month. Frequent hairballs can be caused by diseases affecting the digestive tract or skin.

4. What If Home Remedies for a Cat Throwing Up White Foam Don’t Work? Talk to Your Vet

Talk to your veterinarian if your cat continues to vomit white foam for more than a day or two or if their condition worsens at any time.

The doctor will need to figure out the cause of your cat’s vomiting, or at least rule out some of the more serious ones, before they can recommend good options for treatment. First, they will ask you a lot of questions about your cat’s health, lifestyle, and environment; perform a physical examination; and then possibly run some diagnostic tests like a fecal exam, a panel of blood work, and a urinalysis. Depending on the results of these initial tests, they might also recommend x-rays, ultrasound exams, endoscopy, surgery, and tissue biopsies, particularly if your cat appears to be very sick.

Whenever possible, treatment for cat vomiting will focus on the cat’s underlying health problem. For example, cats with intestinal parasites will need to be given medications to help them eliminate those parasites. Sometimes symptomatic care is also required when a cat is throwing up white foam, and this can include therapeutic diets, anti-nausea medications, and fluid therapy.

Don’t wait too long to get your cat the care they need. In the end, early diagnosis and treatment are almost always more successful and less expensive than delaying a trip to a veterinarian’s office.

Additional Resources On Cat Vomiting

If you’re looking for more information about your cat vomiting, this is a good video overview from Dr. Sarah Wooten on cat vomiting:

You can also check out these sources:

And finally we’ve created a series of posts here on Pet News Daily related to gastro intestinal issues for cats and cat health in general, including:

]]>
Over the Counter Medicine for Cat Diarrhea (4 Types) https://petnewsdaily.com/over-the-counter-medicine-for-cat-diarrhea/ Tue, 25 Oct 2022 02:20:12 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2785 Diarrhea is a symptom of many different diseases in cats. Some are serious, but a few will get better with a little home treatment.

If over the counter medication is an option, the four main options are:

  1. Anti-bacterial medications
  2. Probiotics
  3. Diet
  4. Hydration Supplements

If your cat has had just a few episodes of diarrhea but seems to feel fine otherwise, you can try some over the counter medicine. However, if your cat is very young, very old, or has a health condition that makes even mild diarrhea risky, home treatment is NOT a good idea.

Cat Diarrhea: When to Call Your Veterinarian

Symptoms that tell you it’s time to call the veterinarian include:

  • Severe diarrhea
  • Diarrhea that has been present for more than a day or two
  • Bloody diarrhea (partially digested blood looks dark and tarry)
  • Diarrhea combined with vomiting
  • Abdominal pain
  • Weakness
  • Changes in a cat’s behavior or level of awareness
  • A poor appetite
  • A loss of interest in drinking water

What Causes Diarrhea in Cats?

Cats can develop diarrhea for many different reasons, including:

  • Eating a new food or something unusual
  • Intestinal parasites
  • Inflammatory bowel disease
  • Swallowing something that can’t be digested like string or bones
  • Viral, bacterial, or fungal infections
  • Kidney disease
  • Liver failure
  • Pancreatitis
  • Hyperthyroidism
  • Heart failure
  • Diabetes
  • Food allergies and other adverse food reactions
  • Exposure to some types of toxins
  • Drug side effects
  • Cancer
  • and more

If your cat has severe or chronic diarrhea, your veterinarian will need to determine its underlying cause. They will start the diagnostic work-up by taking a thorough health history and performing a physical examination. This is usually followed by diagnostic testing, which may include fecal examinations, blood work, a urinalysis, x-rays, abdominal ultrasound, specialized laboratory tests, and even exploratory surgery or endoscopy and tissue biopsies.

Over the Counter Medicine for Cat Diarrhea: The 4 Types

But if your cat has just had diarrhea for a day or two and seems to feel fine otherwise, you can try some home treatment. The following over the counter options are safe for cats.

1. Anti-Diarrheal Medications

Kaolin-pectin is the safest over the counter anti-diarrheal medication for cats.  Many others, like loperamide (Imodium) and bismuth subsalicylate (Pepto Bismol) can be very dangerous. Some human anti-diarrheal medications that look like they should contain kaolin-pectin (Kaopectate, for example) actually are made with other ingredients that are dangerous for cats. To be safe, only give your cat an anti-diarrheal medication that is specifically labeled for use in cats. One cat-friendly product, Pro-Pectalin, contains both kaolin-pectin and probiotics.

2. Probiotics

A picture of a cat near medications

Probiotics are microorganisms that are normally found in a cat’s digestive tract. Probiotic bacteria and yeast promote gut health and function. Whatever the cause of a cat’s diarrhea, giving a probiotic can help get things back to normal. Look for probiotics that are designed specifically for pets and that are made by companies that have a good reputation for quality control. Fortiflora has been used successfully for years.

3. Diet

Sometimes food is the best medicine. Keep feeding your cat even if they have diarrhea. Food will actually help their gut to heal, but switching to a different diet can be beneficial. Certain changes will work better than others based on the underlying cause of a cat’s diarrhea. If possible, feed canned food only because this will help keep cats hydrated.

  • Highly digestible diets, like Royal Canin Feline Care Nutrition Digest Sensitive, tend to work best when a cat is producing large amounts of poop every time they have diarrhea.
  • Fiber supplementation can be helpful when a cat is producing small amounts of diarrhea frequently. Soluble prebiotic fibers like psyllium, chicory, inulin, fructooligosaccharides, pectins, or beet pulp are food for beneficial intestinal microorganisms, support the health of the cells that line the large intestine, and absorb extra water from within the digestive tract. Unflavored psyllium (Metamucil) is a good source of soluble prebiotic fiber. Some probiotic supplements, like Proviable-DC, also contain prebiotics.
  • Combination diets are available that are made with highly digestible ingredients but are also supplemented with prebiotic fiber. Blue Buffalo True Solutions Blissful Belly Natural Digestive Care Formula is a good example.
  • Limited ingredient foods that are made with novel protein sources can help cats that have food allergies or other adverse food reactions. Some, like Instinct Limited Ingredient Wet Cat Food, are available over the counter but your veterinarian can also prescribe other cat foods that are even more hypoallergenic.

4. Hydration Supplements

Water is even more important than food when cats have diarrhea. Cats with diarrhea can easily become dehydrated, so make sure to keep fresh, clean water available at all times. Feeding canned food mixed with a tablespoon or two of warm water is another good way to prevent dehydration when a cat has diarrhea. Oral hydration supplements, like Purina Hydra Care, have also been shown to increase a cat’s water intake.

If despite your home treatment, your cat’s condition fails to improve in a day or two or gets worse at any time, stop giving over the counter medicines for diarrhea and make an appointment with your veterinarian.

Additional Resources On Cat Diarrhea

If you’re looking for more information about your cat’s diarrhea, this is a good video overview from Dr. Sarah Wooten on diarrhea in cats:

You can also check out these sources:

And finally we’ve created a series of posts here on Pet News Daily related to gastro intestinal issues for cats and cat health in general, including:

]]>
4 Home Remedies for Cat Diarrhea https://petnewsdaily.com/home-remedies-for-cat-diarrhea/ Tue, 25 Oct 2022 02:03:06 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2779 Sometimes a cat with diarrhea needs to see a vet ASAP, but there are occasions when trying a little home treatment first just makes sense. Let’s take a look at the best ways to approach cat diarrhea and what home remedies might help your feline friend feel better.

The four home remedies for treating your cat’s diarrhea are:

  1. Change in Diet
  2. Probiotics
  3. Anti-Diarrheal Medications
  4. Oral Hydration

When Are Home Remedies Appropriate?

First off: you want to make sure that a home remedy is appropriate.

Healthy adult cats who have mild to moderate diarrhea and no other symptoms are ideal candidates for home treatment. As long as your cat continues to eat and drink well, they should be able to compensate for the dehydrating effects of a day or two of diarrhea.

If, however, any of the following apply to your cat, DO NOT try any home remedies.

Cat Diarrhea: When to Call Your Veterinarian

Call your veterinarian if:

  • Your cat is a young kitten, is a feline senior citizen, or has health problems.
  • Your cat’s diarrhea is severe or contains blood. Diarrhea containing partially digested blood looks dark and tarry.
  • Your cat has other serious symptoms like vomiting, weakness, a poor appetite, or pain.

4 Home Remedies for Cat Diarrhea

1. Change In Diet

Picture of a cat with food

So, your otherwise healthy adult cat seems to feel pretty good, is continuing to eat and drink well, and has only mild to moderate diarrhea. Your next step is to determine what type of diarrhea your cat has because that will affect your treatment options.

  • Cats with large bowel diarrhea poop frequently but only produce small amounts of diarrhea each time. The diarrhea may contain mucus or red blood.
  • Cats with small bowel diarrhea usually produce a large amount of poop whenever they go but they only have to poop a few times a day.

If you think your cat has large bowel diarrhea, try a cat food that is supplemented with soluble, prebiotic fibers like chicory, inulin, fructooligosaccharides, pectins, psyllium, plant gum, or beet pulp. This type of fiber absorbs water from the intestinal tract, supports populations of good intestinal bacteria, and provides energy to the cells that line the large intestine, all of which can help resolve diarrhea. If you can’t change your cat’s diet, try adding unflavored psyllium (Metamucil) to your cat’s current food instead.

When a cat’s symptoms fit better with small bowel diarrhea, a highly digestible cat food is usually a better option. Highly digestible ingredients will decrease the amount of poop cats produce.

Some types of cat food like Blue Buffalo True Solutions Blissful Belly Natural Digestive Care Formula contain added prebiotic fiber but are otherwise highly digestible. They are a great option if you’re unsure of what type of diarrhea your cat has or if they have symptoms that fit with both large and small bowel diarrhea. Canned foods are better than dry because they help cats stay hydrated.

2. Probiotics

In addition to diet, a few other over-the-counter remedies are also appropriate for home treatment of cat diarrhea as well, with the first being probiotics.

When a cat has diarrhea, their normal populations of gut bacteria can get out of whack. Giving cats a probiotic, a supplement that contains “good” gut microorganisms, for a few days can restore their healthy intestinal microbiome. The best probiotics for cats are made by reputable companies and designed specifically for pets. Fortiflora and Proviable-DC are two good options. Follow the label instructions for dosing.

3. Anti-Diarrheal Medications

Many of the anti-diarrheal medications that are safe for use in people should not be given to cats unless a veterinarian has told you to do so. One over-the-counter option that is safe for cats is kaolin-pectin, but pet parents need to be very careful! Some medications that look like they should contain kaolin-pectin (Kaopectate, for example) are actually made with other ingredients that are dangerous for cats. Kaolin-pectin products made specifically for pets are a better option. Some, like Pro-Pectalin, also contain probiotics, which makes treating cat diarrhea at home as simple as possible.

4. Oral Hydration

Picture of a cat drinking water (oral hydration)

Cats with diarrhea need to stay hydrated. The easiest way to encourage good hydration is to keep fresh, clean water available at all times and to feed canned food only. You can even boost your cat’s water intake a little more by mixing an extra tablespoon or two of warm water in with your cat’s canned food. Oral hydration supplements, like Purina Hydra Care, also encourage cats to drink more than they might otherwise.

Of course, home remedies for cat diarrhea don’t always work. It’s time to make an appointment with your veterinarian if your cat’s diarrhea gets worse, if they develop new, worrisome symptoms, or if their diarrhea doesn’t get better after a few days of home treatment. Your veterinarian can diagnose the underlying cause of the diarrhea and figure out the best treatment options based on what they find.

Additional Resources On Cat Diarrhea

If you’re looking for more information about your cat’s diarrhea, this is a good video overview from Dr. Sarah Wooten on diarrhea in cats:

You can also check out these sources:

And finally we’ve created a series of posts here on Pet News Daily related to gastro intestinal issues for cats and cat health in general, including:

]]>
Is Pepto Bismol Safe for Dogs? (Important Considerations) https://petnewsdaily.com/is-pepto-bismol-safe-for-dogs/ Sun, 23 Oct 2022 02:15:40 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2715 My dog is constantly trying to eat all kinds of things he shouldn’t. This is extremely stressful for pet parents. The most obvious reason is that you don’t want your dog to get sick, but you also have to think about whether the thing they’ve gotten into is even bad for the dog.

Do you really need to go to the vet?

For this post we asked our veterinary advisor Dr. Jamie Whittenburg to offer some general tips for what to do when your pet gets into something they shouldn’t (or that you’re not sure about) and will give you all the information you need about Pepto Bismol and your dog.

Is Pepto Bismol Safe for Dogs?

Pepto Bismol is safe for certain dogs, but can cause serious issues for some dogs and breeds. Generally you should not administer Pepto Bismol to your dog without consulting with your veterinarian.

Dogs experience stomach distress the same as humans. Pet owners may be tempted to relieve the misery caused by diarrhea, vomiting, upset stomachs, and parvo with Pepto Bismol. 

Before administering the medication, owners must understand the purpose and risks of treating a dog with Pepto Bismol. 

What is Pepto Bismol?

Pepto Bismol is an antacid and anti-diarrheal medication that can provide temporary relief from stomach discomfort, indigestion, heartburn, nausea, and diarrhea. It is available over-the-counter in both liquid and chewable tablet forms. Pepto Bismol should not be used for more than two days in a row as it may lead to constipation or other gastrointestinal problems.

Why Give a Dog Pepto Bismol?

Pepto Bismol can be safe for dogs with vomiting or diarrhea, but isn’t always. The pink liquid that soothes upset stomachs for humans can also help our pups feel better. 

Vets may prescribe the medicine as a treatment for helicobacter bacterial infections, which damages the stomach and intestine lining and needs to be handled swiftly and effectively.

Pepto Bismol is also sometimes administered to dogs with parvo. The medicine doesn’t treat the illness but could lessen your pup’s symptoms. 

How to Administer Pepto Bismol to a Dog

If your vet does recommend using Pepto Bismol, here’s how to administer it to a dog.

Your dog won’t simply drink the medicine from the little cup that comes with the bottle. Canines generally dislike the taste of Pepto Bismol and will try to spit it out to avoid swallowing it. 

Only offer your dog the liquid form of the medicine. The caplets are too powerful and will be dangerous to your pup. Additionally, avoid extra-strength formulas. Only the original version of Pepto Bismol is safe for dogs.

Dogs prefer the taste of the cooled liquid, so keep the bottle refrigerated. 

Administer the treatment by:

  1. Fill an empty syringe with the proper dosage. 
  2. Holding your dog by the muzzle, open its mouth.
  3. Place the syringe at the back of the dog’s mouth and depress the plunger.
  4. Keep the dog’s head steady to ensure it swallows the full dosage of the medicine. 

Be sure to adhere to dosage guidelines. Veterinarians recommend one teaspoon of Pepto Bismol for every ten pounds of dog. Space out doses between six and eight hours. 

If your dog’s diarrhea persists after taking the medicine a few times, stop administering the treatment and contact your vet. 

What are the Risks of Giving a Dog Pepto Bismol?

Pepto Bismol treats a dog’s symptoms but can have adverse side effects. The medicine can cause internal bleeding.

Accidental overdoses of Pepto Bismol can cause:

  • Vomiting
  • Depression
  • Hyperthermia
  • Internal bleeding
  • Trouble breathing
  • Tremors
  • Seizures
  • Coma

Closely monitor the medicine your dog ingests, and be sure to administer it carefully. 

Pepto Bismol & Xrays

Pepto Bismol tablets can look like metal objects on an Xray, which could cause confusion in diagnosing an issue with your dog.

Alternatives to Pepto Bismol

Pepto Bismol effectively relieves a pup’s upset stomach, vomiting, and diarrhea; however, the risks may not outweigh the benefits. Contact your vet if you’re considering using one of these alternatives:

  • Imodium: Provide one over-the-counter two-milligram capsule per 40 pounds of dog. It’s best to hide these pills in food since dogs dislike the taste.
  • Pepcid: Vets recommend 10 milligrams per 20 pounds of dog. Pepcid can’t be given with food, so you’ll have to massage the medicine down the dog’s throat.
  • Pumpkin
  • Rice
  • Probiotics 

Veterinarians should approve any medical treatment, whether it’s organic or pharmaceutical. 

This is a good video overview on how to think about Pepto Bismol and your dog by veterinarian Dr. Andy Roark:

Tips from Our Vets

It is normal to be concerned whenever your dog or cat gets into something they should not have. Dogs particularly tend to eat things with little to no regard for edibility. Because so many things can be toxic to pets, even some that are perfectly safe for humans, it can be hard to know what to do. Here are three key steps to take first:

  1. The first thing you must do if your dog or cat ate or were exposed to something that they should not have is to determine how much of the substance they actually ingested.
  2. Save labels or take pictures so that you are able to show the ingredients to your pet’s veterinarian.
  3. Your veterinarian should be the first point of contact in the case of such an event. Call the nearest emergency veterinary hospital if it is outside of normal business hours.

Please follow the advice of your veterinarian. If your dog has ingested something toxic, they must immediately be taken to a hospital or clinic for treatment. If your veterinarian does not recommend seeing your pet right away, you should observe them carefully for any signs of illness. Things to be on the lookout for include:

  1. Vomiting – Your dog may vomit from simple gastrointestinal distress after eating something other than their dog or cat food. However, intractable or repeated vomiting can signal a toxin ingestion or another serious issue like gastric dilation volvulus. These conditions are life threatening and require emergency treatment right away.
  2. Lethargy – If your dog is acting oddly, or “not themselves,” it is a clue that the ingestion might be serious. Veterinary care should be sought as soon as possible.
  3. Hypersalivation – Excessive drooling may signal a toxin exposure or an injury to the mouth. It can also be a sign of nausea. If your dog or cat is in hypersalivation, you should reach out to their veterinarian.
  4. Weakness – If your dog or cat appears to be weak, is stumbling, or has difficulty walking, the likelihood of a toxin ingestion is higher. This is a sign that your dog requires veterinary care.
  5. Seizures – Twitching, rapid leg or eye movements, and convulsions are all signs that something is wrong. These abnormal movements may be due to a toxin or another issue that the dog is experiencing.
  6. Dribbling urine – Leaking urine is often seen in cases of marijuana toxicity. Dogs or cats exhibiting this sign should be taken to the nearest veterinary clinic for treatment.

If you are unable to reach your veterinarian, a great resource for help is the ASPCA Animal Poison Control Center. The APCC is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. You can reach them at (888) 426-4435. There is a one-time $75 fee for this service.

Final Thoughts: Is Pepto Bismol Safe for Dogs?

Pepto Bismol is safe for some dogs, but only in the correct dosage.

Side effects can include

  • discolored stool
  • internal bleeding
  • vomiting
  • depression
  • hyperthermia
  • difficulty breathing
  • tremors
  • seizures
  • coma

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I give my dog Pepto-Bismol for upset stomach?

Ask your veterinarian as some dogs have adverse reactions to Pepto Bismol. If approved, you can give your dog Pepto-Bismol for an upset stomach. The recommended dosage is 1/4 teaspoon for every 10 pounds of body weight.

What can you give dogs for upset stomach?

There are several things you can give dogs for an upset stomach (assuming your vet approves), including:

  • Pepto-Bismol
  • Kaopectate
  • Tums
  • Ginger root capsules
  • Pumpkin puree
What dog should not take Pepto-Bismol?

Dogs with certain health conditions should not take Pepto-Bismol, including those with:

  • Kidney disease
  • Liver disease
  • Pancreatitis
What kind of Pepto Can I give my dog?

You can give your dog the regular strength Pepto-Bismol liquid or chewable tablets. Do not give your dog the maximum strength Pepto-Bismol or the Pepto-Bismol for kids.

Does Pepto stop diarrhea in dogs?

Yes, Pepto-Bismol can help stop diarrhea in dogs. The active ingredient in Pepto-Bismol, bismuth subsalicylate, coats the stomach and helps to soothe an upset stomach.

What does Pepto Bismol do for dogs?

Pepto-Bismol can help relieve an upset stomach, diarrhea, and nausea in dogs. The active ingredient, bismuth subsalicylate, coats the stomach and helps to soothe an upset stomach. It can also cause major issues for the wrong dog, however.

Can dogs have Tums or Pepto Bismol?

Yes, dogs can take Tums or Pepto Bismol. The active ingredient in both Tums and Pepto Bismol, calcium carbonate, can help to neutralize stomach acid and provide relief from an upset stomach.

Is Pepto Bismol or Kaopectate better for dogs?

There is no definitive answer as to which medication is better for dogs. It is best to consult with your veterinarian to determine which medication is best for your dog.

Can dogs take Pepto-Bismol chewables?

Yes, dogs can take Pepto-Bismol chewables. The active ingredient, bismuth subsalicylate, coats the stomach and helps to soothe an upset stomach. Chewables are also easier for dogs to consume than liquid Pepto Bismol.

Additional Resources

Our writing staff and team of veterinarians have dedicated a ton of time and energy to bringing you the best information possible about household products and food to help make sure your pets are safe.

You can check out our giant guide to human foods dogs can and can not eat, and we’ve created guides on whether over 40 human foods are safe for dogs to eat.

We’ve also created a series of posts on what household products are and aren’t safe for your pet, including:

]]>
Is Citronella Safe for Dogs? (Oil, Plant, & Spray) https://petnewsdaily.com/is-citronella-safe-for-dogs/ Sun, 23 Oct 2022 01:18:01 +0000 https://petnewsdaily.com/?p=2711 My dog is constantly trying to eat all kinds of things he shouldn’t. This is extremely stressful for pet parents. The most obvious reason is that you don’t want your dog to get sick, but you also have to think about whether the thing they’ve gotten into is even bad for the dog.

Do you really need to go to the vet?

For this post we asked our veterinary advisor Dr. Jamie Whittenburg to offer some general tips for what to do when your pet gets into something they shouldn’t (or that you’re not sure about) and will give you all the information you need about citronella and your dog.

Is Citronella Safe for Dogs?

  No, Citronella is toxic to dogs.

Citronella is a common product used to deter insects during the summer. There are Citronella plants, as well as oils and other products derived from the plant. You may have these around your home, but are they safe for your dog?

You should be careful using this product in and around your home because it’s not something your dog should consume.

Is Citronella Safe for Dogs To Eat?

Here is where things can be a little confusing. There are different kinds of Citronella and Citronella-like plants that are similar in scent that people use to try and deter insects. Citronella geraniums are the version most toxic to plants. 

Citronella geraniums have deeply lobed leaves, a green coloring, and pink or lavender flowers. When the leaves are crushed, they smell like lemongrass citronella, which is used in essential oils. They’re commonly planted around patios and are not safe for animals to consume.

Is It Safe for Dogs’ Eyes?

No. Citronella is toxic for dogs and will irritate if it gets in their eyes. If you suspect they’ve obtained Citronella in their eyes, you should flush the area immediately and contact your veterinarian.

Is It Safe for Dogs’ Paws?

Citronella is not safe for a dog’s paws and will irritate the skin. 

Is It Safe for Dogs’ Skin?

You might wonder, “Is citronella safe for dogs topically?” The answer is no. Citronella is not safe for a dog’s skin. You should avoid using Citronella-based essential oils on your dog’s skin because it can cause a rash.

Is It Safe for Dogs’ Wounds?

No, Citronella is not safe for a dog’s wounds. Citronella is considered toxic and can irritate the skin. It is not advised to put any Citronella on an open wound. Instead, take your pet to a veterinarian.

Is It Safe for Dogs’ To Lick?

Citronella is unsafe for dogs to consume and can cause stomach irritation. It probably won’t harm your dog to lick a Citronella plant, but it’s not advisable. 

You should not allow your dog to lick any Citronella oil.

What Are the Side Effects for a Dog That Eats or Gets Citronella on Their Skin?

Dogs can experience gastrointestinal upset, such as vomiting or diarrhea. They may also experience muscle weakness, depression, and hypothermia.

When in contact with their skin, dogs can develop dermatitis. This is a skin irritation or rash.

Citronella Alternatives for Use as Mosquito Spray

One of the most common uses for citronella that dog owners look to replace to keep from harming their pup is as mosquito spray.

There are a variety of natural alternatives to citronella-based mosquito sprays.

These include products made with essential oils, like:

  • Lemon
  • Eucalyptus oil
  • Lavender oil

You can also find mosquito repellents that use plant-based ingredients, like catnip or neem oil.

If you’re looking for a natural mosquito repellent, be sure to read the labels carefully. Some products may not be as effective as others. And, keep in mind that natural mosquito repellents may need to be reapplied more often than chemical alternatives.

Here’s a good video overview from a veterinarian on what to be concerned about when it comes to essential oils for dogs generally:

Tips from Our Vets

It is normal to be concerned whenever your dog or cat gets into something they should not have. Dogs particularly tend to eat things with little to no regard for edibility. Because so many things can be toxic to pets, even some that are perfectly safe for humans, it can be hard to know what to do. Here are three key steps to take first:

  1. The first thing you must do if your dog or cat ate or were exposed to something that they should not have is to determine how much of the substance they actually ingested.
  2. Save labels or take pictures so that you are able to show the ingredients to your pet’s veterinarian.
  3. Your veterinarian should be the first point of contact in the case of such an event. Call the nearest emergency veterinary hospital if it is outside of normal business hours.

Please follow the advice of your veterinarian. If your dog has ingested something toxic, they must immediately be taken to a hospital or clinic for treatment. If your veterinarian does not recommend seeing your pet right away, you should observe them carefully for any signs of illness. Things to be on the lookout for include:

  1. Vomiting – Your dog may vomit from simple gastrointestinal distress after eating something other than their dog or cat food. However, intractable or repeated vomiting can signal a toxin ingestion or another serious issue like gastric dilation volvulus. These conditions are life threatening and require emergency treatment right away.
  2. Lethargy – If your dog is acting oddly, or “not themselves,” it is a clue that the ingestion might be serious. Veterinary care should be sought as soon as possible.
  3. Hypersalivation – Excessive drooling may signal a toxin exposure or an injury to the mouth. It can also be a sign of nausea. If your dog or cat is in hypersalivation, you should reach out to their veterinarian.
  4. Weakness – If your dog or cat appears to be weak, is stumbling, or has difficulty walking, the likelihood of a toxin ingestion is higher. This is a sign that your dog requires veterinary care.
  5. Seizures – Twitching, rapid leg or eye movements, and convulsions are all signs that something is wrong. These abnormal movements may be due to a toxin or another issue that the dog is experiencing.
  6. Dribbling urine – Leaking urine is often seen in cases of marijuana toxicity. Dogs or cats exhibiting this sign should be taken to the nearest veterinary clinic for treatment.

If you are unable to reach your veterinarian, a great resource for help is the ASPCA Animal Poison Control Center. The APCC is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. You can reach them at (888) 426-4435. There is a one-time $75 fee for this service.

Final Thoughts: Are Citronella Plants Safe for Dogs?

 No, Citronella is not safe for dogs. Here are the important facts to remember:

  • Citronella geraniums are commonly planted around patios and yards to deter insects.
  • Citronella geraniums are not safe for dogs to consume because it can cause gastrointestinal upset.
  • Citronella geraniums can cause dermatitis in dogs when it comes in contact with their skin.
  • Citronella geraniums should not be used to treat eye infections, wounds, or as any kind of medical intervention for your dog.
  • If you’re concerned that your dog has been in contact with Citronella and may be experiencing an adverse reaction, you should contact your veterinarian immediately.

Frequently Asked Questions

Is it safe for dogs to smell citronella?

Citronella oil is generally considered safe for dogs when used in small amounts and diluted properly. However, some dogs may be sensitive to the scent and may experience respiratory irritation or other side effects. If you are concerned about using citronella oil around your dog, consult your veterinarian first.

What will citronella do to a dog?

Citronella oil may cause respiratory irritation or other side effects in some dogs. If you are concerned about using citronella oil around your dog, consult your veterinarian first.

Do dogs hate the smell of citronella?

Some dogs may be sensitive to the scent of citronella and may not enjoy the smell. However, other dogs may not mind the scent or even find it pleasant. If you are concerned about using citronella oil around your dog, consult your veterinarian first.

Is diluted citronella oil safe for dogs?

Citronella oil is safe for dogs when used as directed. However, some dogs may be sensitive to the scent of citronella and may not enjoy the smell. If you are concerned about using citronella oil around your dog, consult your veterinarian first.

Are citronella collars harmful to dogs?

No, citronella collars are not harmful to dogs. However, some dogs may be sensitive to the scent of citronella and may not enjoy the smell. If you are concerned about using a citronella collar on your dog, consult your veterinarian first.

How do you use citronella spray on dogs?

To use citronella spray on dogs, simply spray the dog’s coat evenly with the solution. Be sure to avoid spraying the solution in your dog’s eyes, nose, or mouth. Citronella spray can be used as often as needed to keep your dog smelling fresh and clean.

Is citronella plant toxic to dogs?

No, the citronella plant is not toxic to dogs. However, the oil from the plant can be irritating to a dog’s skin and eyes. If your dog comes in contact with citronella oil, be sure to wash the area with soap and water.

Does citronella make dogs sick?

No, citronella does not usually make dogs sick. However, if your dog ingests a large amount of citronella oil, it could cause vomiting and diarrhea. If your dog ingests a small amount of citronella oil, there is no need to be concerned.

Can citronella kill dogs?

No, citronella cannot kill dogs. However, if your dog ingests a large amount of citronella oil, it could cause vomiting and diarrhea. If your dog ingests a small amount of citronella oil, there is no need to be concerned.

Can dogs smell citronella candles?

Yes, dogs can smell citronella candles. However, the smell is not harmful to them.

Additional Resources

Our writing staff and team of veterinarians have dedicated a ton of time and energy to bringing you the best information possible about household products and food to help make sure your pets are safe.

You can check out our giant guide to human foods dogs can and can not eat, and we’ve created guides on whether over 40 human foods are safe for dogs to eat.

We’ve also created a series of posts on what household products are and aren’t safe for your pet, including:

]]>